BILLS OF QUANTITIES€¦ · The building is a new construction to house additional students and renovation of the existing building. 2.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATION 2.1 General – Mechanical

BILLS OF QUANTITIES ST. MARYS SECONDARY SCHOOL

VOLUME 2 - MEP SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

MINISTRY OF EDUCATION

GOVERNMENT OF ANTIGUA & BARBUDA ARCHITECT MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL MOULTON MAYERS ARCHITECTS SYLVESTER ENGINEERING LIMITED MCKIES HILL #30A VIERRA DRIVE KINGSTON CHAMPS FLEUR ST. VINCENT KINGSTON ST. VINCENT & THE GRENADINES TEL: (784) 457-2072 TEL: (868) 662-7935 FAX: (784) 457-2290 FAX: (784) 456-1207 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS QUANTITY SURVEYORS ADDISON WORKMAN ENGINEERING DESIGN COLLABORATIVE WEATHERRILLS ROAD “LAURISTON” ST. JOHN’S COLLYMORE ROCK ANTIGUA & BARBUDA ST. MICHAEL BARBADOS TEL: (268) 462-3700 TEL: (246) 426-1741 FAX: (268) 461-1459 FAX: (246) 429-4595

NOVEMBER 2018

MEP SPECIFICATIONS Contents Scope of Works Ref. 1207-2-GE-10-009 Electrical Specifications Ref. 1207-EL-6-000 Mechanical Specifications Ref. 1207-ME-5-000 Elec./Mech. Supplemental Requirements Ref. 1207-GE-01-500/600 DX Split A/C Units Ref. 1207-2-ME-5-730 Fans Ref. 1207-2-ME-5-800 Indoor Air Quality Ref. 1207-2-ME-5-994 Voice & Data Communication Cabling Ref. 1207-2-EL-6-742 Wireless Access Points Ref. 1207-2-EL-6-748 Surveillance TV Ref. 1207-2-EL-6-782 Public Address System Ref. 1207-2-EL-6-791 Special Materials Ref. 1207-2-ME-5-090 Elevator Ref. 1207-2-ME-5-400 Vibration Isolation Ref. 1207-2-ME-5-550 Potable Water System Sterilisation Ref. 1207-2-ME-5-600

GOVERNMENT OF ANTIGUA & BARBUDA

_________________________________________

BEP II ST. MARY’S SECONDARY SCHOOL

SCOPE OF WORK – M&E INSTALLATION SERVICES

BID PACKAGE NO: 1207-2-GE-10-009

TENDER NO:_____________ REV DATE DESCRIPTION ORIG APPROVALS

A 21-SEP-2016 TENDER ISSUE TOS TOS Approved by: Date:

Company Approval: Date:

BEP II ANTIGUA ST. MARY’S SECONDARY SCHOOL

SCOPE OF WORK

M&E INSTALLATION SERVICES

Document No 1207-2-GE-10-009

21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 2 of 18

Prepared by: Sylvester Engineering Limited

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................. 3

2.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATION .............................................................................................................. 3

2.1 General – Mechanical/ Plumbing 3

2.2. Sub-Contractors Responsibility 5

2.3 General Contractors Responsibility to M&E Sub-Contractor 6

2.4. Site Investigation & Measurements 6

2.5. Liaison with Existing Equipment Manufacturers 6

2.6 Detailed Design Drawings 6

2.7 Construction Management Services 7

2.8 Site Technical Queries 7

2.9 Preparation of Client Hand Over Documentation 7

2.10 WARRANTY PERIOD 7

3.0 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................................. 7

3.1 General 7

3.2 Work Included – Potable Water Distribution 8

3.3 Work Included – Electrical Distribution 8

3.4 Work Included – Other Services 10

4.0 INSPECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING ................................................................................. 10

5.0 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 13

6.0 DOCUMENTATION .......................................................................................................................... 14

7.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................................... 14

APPENDIX A ................................................................................................................................................. 15

APPENDIX B ................................................................................................................................................. 17


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 3 of 18


1.0 INTRODUCTION

The Government of Antigua & Barbuda through the Basic Education Programme (BEP) II, the Client on St. Mary’s Secondary School Project in Antigua, is currently seeking to engage the services of an experienced and qualified Mechanical/ Plumbing and Electrical Contractor, to provide supply and installation services to satisfy the basic requirements of the facility in addition to installation of specialist equipment.

The building is a new construction to house additional students and renovation of

the existing building.

2.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATION

2.1 General – Mechanical/ Plumbing

This specification defines the minimum requirements for the, supply, installation,

inspection, testing and commissioning of the potable water, waste water and

sewage systems follows

Installation and connection of all lavatories, water closets, urinals, shower mixers

and janitorial sinks complete with appropriate angle valves, taps, traps, floor

isolation valves.

Supply and install all floor drains with appropriate traps and trap primers.

Supply and install all PVC and CPVC potable water, waste water, vent and soil

piping and fittings of all sizes and lengths, with appropriate hangers, fasteners,

thrust blocks, saddles, supports and safings as necessary to effect a secure

installation.

Supply and install the required sluice, wash out and air valves and water

hammer arrestors on the incoming APUA line. Air valves at the top of the potable

water headers and all other vent caps as required for the installation.

Supply and install septic tank and seepage pits.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 4 of 18


Make provision for inspection by local authorities and obtain necessary

certificates to allow connection to facility by APUA.

Supply and install all Air-conditioning Equipment as per specification and design

drawings

It is the intent of this document to indicate the full scope of the package. However it

shall be the sub-contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all materials and

components designed and installed conform to SYLENG’s Specifications, the

Uniform Plumbing and Mechanical Codes of Practice, and other relevant and

applicable codes referenced in the specifications. Any established code or standard

not referenced in the specification but is typically required shall also be applicable.

Any omission from this specification shall not relieve the Sub-contractor of the

responsibility to provide a high quality installation.

The Sub-contractor’s scope of work shall be based on the design shown on the

attached drawings and documentation included in this specification.

General –Electrical LV/ELV

This specification defines the minimum requirements for the, supply, installation,

inspection, testing and commissioning of the following:

SITC incoming LV distribution Boards.

SITC all building lighting fixtures

SITC all 15kW Solar Auxiliary grid-tie Power System with storage batteries

SITC cables and isolation switches for all AC condensers.

SITC all Lightning protection components

Supply and install a TVSS unit

Supply and install all wiring of the electrical distribution system inclusive of all

accessories, receptacles and conduits


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 5 of 18


Make provisions for power to all other electrical equipment as required.

Supply and install all cables to ground all steel structures and electrical

equipment as specified.

Supply and install all CCTV equipment

Supply and install all structured data cables and outlets

Supply and install Public Address System

Supply and install Fire Alarm System

Make provision for inspection by local authorities and obtain necessary

certificates to allow connection by APUA.

It is the intent of this specification to indicate the full scope of the package. However,

it shall be the sub-contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all materials and

components designed and installed conform to SYLENG’s Specifications, the Local

Electrical Code, IET Code, National Electrical Code, NFPA and other relevant and

applicable codes referenced in the specifications. Any established code or standard

not referenced in the specification but is typically required shall also be applicable.

The Contractor shall ensure that all works meet the requirements for heavily saline

site conditions.

Any omission from this specification shall not relieve the Sub-contractor of the

responsibility to provide a high quality installation.

The Sub-contractor’s scope of work shall be based on the design shown on the

attached drawings and documentation included in this specification.

2.2. Sub-Contractors Responsibility

All ancillary materials and components for, final assembly, installation, testing and

commissioning of the services shall be the responsibility of the sub-contractor.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 6 of 18


2.3 General Contractors Responsibility to M&E Sub-Contractor

Free access to the site

Facilitate coordination with other trades.

2.4. Site Investigation & Measurements

The Contractor shall visit the site prior to the close of this Tender to acquaint himself

with the requirements. Detailed measurements shall be taken to ensure that detailed

estimates are accurate and that all details and eventualities are catered for in the

Sub-contractor’s Bid.

2.5. Liaison with Existing Equipment Manufacturers

The Sub-contractor shall liaise with the nominated equipment

suppliers/manufacturers via the General Contractor or Technical Representative to

ensure that all provisions made for installation of the equipment are as

recommended.

2.6 Detailed Design Drawings

All revised equipment manufacturers drawings for items supplied by the sub-

contractor and those free issued by the General Contractor shall be submitted to

General Contractor or Technical Representative for approval prior to as-built.

All pipe routing drawings etc. which require modification shall be submitted to

General Contractor or Technical Representative for approval.

General Contractor or Technical Representative must be fully informed of all

technical details which may have been omitted and required for ensuring a proper

interface between all systems to provide a fully integrated system.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 7 of 18


2.7 Construction Management Services

The sub-contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination of his installation activities. He

shall be prepared to attend site meetings during the course of the construction.

Daily reports, providing status of the works in progress and forecast of works to be

undertaken, shall be submitted to General Contractor or Technical Representative

on a daily basis.

2.8 Site Technical Queries

The Sub-contractor shall address all technical queries to the General Contractor

who shall in turn consult with any related third parties.

2.9 Preparation of Client Hand Over Documentation

The Sub-contractor shall prepare all hand over documentation prior to acceptance

by the General Contractor. This will be reviewed by all parties to ensure that this

documentation meets the requirements of the Client.

2.10 WARRANTY PERIOD

The Sub-contractor shall ensure that he is available to address any operating issues

surrounding the installation during the defects liability period of his contract.

3.0 SCOPE OF WORK

3.1 General

The General Contractor shall provide the Sub-contractor with access to the work site

as per mutually agreed schedule between the two parties.

3.1.1 The General Contractor shall also provide HSE supervision via a Safety Officer on

site during the execution of these works.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 8 of 18


3.1.2 The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for the labour, materials, as-built

documentation, required to, install, test and commission all the services equipment

for the Building as stated in the Bill of Quantities (Measured Works) unless stated

otherwise in this specification.

3.2 Work Included – Potable Water Distribution

3.2.1 Supply and install all potable water, waste water, soil water, and vent pvc piping,

fittings, and valves for a complete systems.

3.2.2 Install and connect all water lavatories, water closets, urinals, traps, and showers,

complete with isolation angle valves, Water Hammer Arresters, Air Valves and over

flow lines as required.

3.2.4 There shall be no pipes visible at the end of the installation, where required;

all PVC pipes must be placed in masonry or accessible pipe chases.

3.2.8 After installation all pipe work must be fitted with appropriate isolation valves to allow

pressure testing of all piping to APUA standards. Following the pressure test all

potable water piping and tanks must be sanitised before putting into service.

3.2.9 All electrical connections to equipment will be the responsibility of the electrical sub-

contractor, who must be notified when the mechanical installation has been

completed and prior to commissioning the equipment.

3.3 Work Included – Electrical Distribution

3.3.1 The Contractor shall supply and install a new LV Switchboard in the

designated room to accept the main incoming cable and to provide power to

all equipment as outlined in the design drawings.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 9 of 18


3.3.3 Electrical Power shall be distributed throughout the building by vertical

cable risers.

3.3.4 All rooms shall be wired as per the design drawings, and new fixtures

supplied and installed.

There shall be no cables and or conduits visible at the end of the

installation, where required; all PVC conduits must be placed in

masonry. Conduits which must be surfaced mounted shall be EMT or

heavy wall PVC (internal) or RGD Steel (external) – no exceptions.

3.3.5 The Sub-contractor shall supply and install all Lighting Fixtures as per

Lighting Fixture Schedule. Where specified fixtures cannot be sourced

alternate fixtures shall be submitted for approval.

3.3.6 The sub-contractor shall supply and install all the necessary grounding

cable/tape fixings to ensure that all equipment is bonded in accordance with

the National Electrical and IET Codes of Practice.

3.3.7 The sub-contractor must supply and install all solar PV cells, grid-tied

Inverter and wire into distribution system as per specification.

3.3.9 The sub-contractor must supply all LV equipment.

3.3.10 The sub-contractor must supply all pull boxes, duct work, and conduit

infrastructure for all services as required to complete the job.

3.4 Work Included – Air Conditioning

3.4.1 The sub-contractor shall supply and install all the necessary condensers

and evapourators as per ASHRAE codes.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 10 of 18


3.4.2 All hydronic piping with appropriate insulation

3.4.3 All condensate piping, suitable insulated.

3.5 Work Included – Other Services

3.5.1 The Sub-contractor shall supply and install all the necessary grounding

cables and fixings to ensure that all equipment is bonded in accordance with

the National Electrical and IET Codes of Practice.

3.5.2 Supply and installation of all Fire Alarm, PA, CCTV, Data Cabling and

access points all per design drawings and specifications

3.5.3 Provision electrical power for all mechanical equipment such as air

conditioning equipment, or any other equipment as required.

3.5.4 Supply and install all lightning protection components.

4.0 INSPECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING

MECHANICAL/ PLUMBING

4.1 Tests as specified in the relevant codes shall be carried out on all equipment and

pipe work. In addition to all checking, testing or commissioning necessary to provide

a safe, reliable and functionally sound plumbing and mechanical installation. If these

tests reveal defects in the workmanship or materials, the General Contractor or

Technical Representative shall be notified immediately.

4.2 Details of the procedures for checking, testing and commissioning, including

applicable forms for recording results, shall be developed and submitted to the

General Contractor for approval.

4.3 All testing equipment shall be supplied by the Sub-contractor. Details of calibration

of test instruments, including test laboratory and date shall be made available to the

GC on request. The technical advisors shall witness all/any tests and


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 11 of 18


commissioning functions on site. The Sub-contractor shall provide test schedules to

the GC in advance for review, and where noted, for agreement.

4.4 As a minimum, testing/commissioning records provided to the GC shall contain the

following information:-

Date of test and equipment under test.

Description of the test or commissioning function.

Applicable ratings, equipment numbers.

Minimum test values acceptable in compliance with the codes, standards, and

regulations.

Test results, including comments where necessary, for clarification.

Details of any corrective action taken.

Where facilities fail to meet acceptable standards or the intended function during

testing and commissioning, the GC shall be advised immediately.

On completion of tests, it shall be ensured that all links have been closed and

tightened, all fuses replaced, all terminations are tight, all electronic equipment,

meters, earthing, etc have been reconnected and all covers replaced.

4.5 The specific test which shall be performed but not limited to on piping systems are

as follows:

Piping Test

Before final acceptance of the work, test each system as in service to demonstrate

compliance with contract requirements. Furnish electricity, instruments, connecting

devices, and personnel for the tests. Correct defects in work provided by the sub-

Contractor and repeat tests until work is in compliance with contract requirements.

The GC will furnish fuel for piping testing and flushing provided by the sub-

contractor. Sub-contractor shall be responsible for test fuel losses greater than 10

percent.

Pneumatic Test


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 12 of 18


Pneumatically test each piping system to 172 kPa (gage) 25 psig, examine joints

with soap solution. Gradually increase to 345 kPa (gage) 50 psig and hold for 1

hour. The pneumatic test is more hazardous than a hydrostatic test, therefore,

special safety measures, including the wearing of face masks, shall be taken during

testing under pressure. Only authorized personnel shall be permitted in the area

during pneumatic and hydrostatic testing.

Hydrostatic Tests

Upon completion of pneumatic testing, hydrostatically test each piping system at 1.5

times maximum system operating pressure but in no case more than 1896 kPa

(gage) 275 psig in accordance with ASME B31.3 and API RP 1110,with no leakage

or reduction in gage pressure for 4 hours.

Flushing

Thoroughly flush piping before placing in operation. Flush piping, including branch

piping, at a minimum velocity of 2.40 meters/s (8 feet per second).

ELECTRICAL

4.1 Tests as specified in the relevant codes shall be carried out on all equipment. In

addition to all checking, testing or commissioning necessary to provide a safe,

reliable and functionally sound electrical and mechanical installation shall be

performed. If these tests reveal defects in the workmanship or materials, the

General Contractor or Technical Representative shall be notified immediately.

4.2 Details of the procedures for checking, testing and commissioning, including

applicable forms for recording results, shall be developed and submitted to the

General Contractor for approval.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 13 of 18


4.3 All testing equipment shall be supplied by the Sub-contractor. Details of calibration

of test instruments, including test laboratory and date shall be made available to the

GC on request. The technical advisors shall witness all/any tests and

commissioning functions on site. The Sub-contractor shall provide test schedules to

the GC in advance for review, and where noted, for agreement.

4.4 As a minimum, testing/commissioning records provided to the GC shall contain the

following information:-

Date of test and equipment under test.

Description of the test or commissioning function.

Applicable ratings, equipment numbers.

Minimum test values acceptable in compliance with the codes, standards, and

regulations.

Test results, including comments where necessary, for clarification.

Details of any corrective action taken.

Where facilities fail to meet acceptable standards or the intended function during

testing and commissioning, the GC shall be advised immediately.

On completion of tests, it shall be ensured that all links have been closed and

tightened, all fuses replaced, all terminations are tight, all electronic equipment,

meters, earthing, etc have been reconnected and all covers replaced.

4.5 The specific electrical tests which shall be performed but not limited to on

equipment are as follows:-

Continuity Tests - Functional check of operation and logic. All necessary point-

to-point and continuity tests to prove the connection and integrity of the system.

5.0 SPECIFICATIONS

All works shall be in accordance with the SYLENG specifications listed in the

‘Drawing & Specification Schedule’ attached as Appendices ‘A’ & ‘B’.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 14 of 18


6.0 DOCUMENTATION

Following the completion of equipment/system testing and commissioning the Sub-

contractor shall submit to the GC the following documentation:-

“Red Line” marked up As Built Electrical Drawings

Test Certificates

Inspection Certificates

Commissioning Records and Data Sheets

7.0 DRAWINGS

See ‘Drawing & Specification Schedule’ attached as Appendices ‘A’ & ‘B’.


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 15 of 18


APPENDIX A

ELECTRICAL DRAWING & SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE

SPECIFICATIONS

DOCUMENT NO. REVISION

NO. DOCUMENT TITLE

1207-2-GE-10-009-1 A BILL OF MATERIALS – MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SERVICES

1207-GE-01-500-600 A ELECTRICAL & MECHANICAL SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

EL-6-000 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL

1207-2-EL-6-742 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - VOICE DATA

COMMUNICATION CABLING

1207-2-EL-6-748 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - WIRELESS

ACCESS POINTS

1207-2-EL-6-782 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS -

SURVEILLANCE CCTV

1207-2-EL-6-791 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - PUBLIC

ADDRESS SYSTEM DRAWINGS


NO. DOCUMENT TITLE

1207-EL-GEN-01 00D ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION NOTES 1207-2-EL-GE-85 00D SITE UTILITY DUCTS LV & ELV DUCTS 1207-2-EL-LG-10 00D LIGHTING LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR BLOCK

A 1207-2-EL-LG-11 00D LIGHTING LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR BLOCK

B 1207-2-EL-LG-12 00D LIGHTING LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR BLOCK

C NORTH & EAST 1207-2-EL-LG-13 00D LIGHTING LAYOUT - FIRST FLOOR BLOCK B 1207-2-EL-LG-14 00D LIGHTING LAYOUT - FIRST FLOOR BLOCK C

NORTH 1207-2-EL-LG-16 00D SITE PERIMETER LIGHTING & SECURITY

BOOTH LIGHTING & POWER LAYOUT 1207-2-EL-LV-20 00D POWER LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR BLOCK A1207-2-EL-LV-21 00D POWER LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR BLOCK B1207-2-EL-LV-22 00D POWER & TELECOM LAYOUT - GROUND

FLOOR BLOCK C NORTH & EAST 1207-2-EL-LV-23 00D POWER LAYOUT - FIRST FLOOR BLOCK B 1207-2-EL-LV-24 00D POWER LAYOUT - FIRST FLOOR BLOCK C

NORTH & EAST 1207-2-EL-LV-25 00D SOLAR POWER DETAILS


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 16 of 18


1207-2-EL-LV-40 00D ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 1207-2-EL-FA-01 00D FIRE SERVICES ALARM SYSTEM RISER 1207-2-EL-FA-02 00D BLOCK A FIRE ALARM LAYOUT 1207-2-EL-FA-03 00D BLOCK B FIRE ALARM LAYOUT 1207-2-EL-FA-04 00D BLOCK C GF FIRE ALARM LAYOUT 1207-2-EL-PA-01 00D PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PA SYSTEM

RISER 1207-2-EL-PA-02 00D BLOCK A PA LAYOUT 1207-2-EL-SE-01 00C SECURITY SYSTEM RISER DIAGRAM 1207-2-EL-SE-02 00D SECURITY SYSTEM SITE LAYOUT 1207-2-EL-TE-01 00D TELECOM SYSTEMS TELECOM RISER


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 17 of 18


APPENDIX B

MECHANICAL/ PLUMBING DRAWING & SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE

SPECIFICATIONS


NO. DOCUMENT TITLE

1207-2-GE-10-009-1 A BILL OF MATERIALS – MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

1207-GE-01-500-600 A ELECTRICAL & MECHANICAL SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1207-ME-5-000 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – MECHANICAL

1207-2-ME-5-090 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - SPECIAL

MATERIALS 1207-2-ME-5-400 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ELEVATORS

1207-2-ME-5-550 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - VIBRATION

ISOLATION

1207-2-ME-5-600 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - WATER TANK

STERILIZATION

1207-2-ME-5-730 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DX SPLIT AIR

CONDITIONING UNITS 1207-2-ME-5-800 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - FANS

1207-2-ME-5-994 A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - INDOOR AIR

QUALITY DRAWINGS


NO. DOCUMENT TITLE

1207-2-ME-AC-01 00D AC HYDRONIC & CONDENSATE PIPING LAYOUT GROUND FLOOR AND ROOF BLOCK A

1207-2-ME-AC-02 00D AC HYDRONIC & CONDENSATE PIPING LAYOUT GROUND FLOOR AND ROOF BLOCK C EAST

1207-2-ME-AC-101 00D AC HYDRONIC & CONDENSATE PIPING ISOMETRIC BLOCK A

1207-2-ME-AC-102 00D AC HYDRONIC & CONDENSATE PIPING ISOMETRIC BLOCK C EAST

1207-2-ME-GP-01 00D GAS PIPING LAYOUT & ISOMETRIC - BLOCK A 1207-2-ME-GP-02 00D GAS PIPING LAYOUT - GROUND FLOOR BLOCK

B 1207-2-ME-GP-03 00D GAS PIPING LAYOUT & ISOMETRIC - FIRST

FLOOR BLOCK B 1207-2-ME-PW-01 00D POTABLE WATER LAYOUT & ROOF - BLOCK A 1207-2-ME-PW-02 00D POTABLE WATER LAYOUT - BLOCK B GROUND

FLOOR


SCOPE OF WORK



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 18 of 18


1207-2-ME-PW-03 00D POTABLE WATER LAYOUT - BLOCK B FIRST FLOOR AND ROOF

1207-2-ME-PW-04 00D POTABLE WATER LAYOUT - BLOCK C GROUND & FIRST FLOORS

1207-2-ME-PW-101 00D POTABLE WATER ISOMETRIC - BLOCK A 1207-2-ME-PW-102 00D POTABLE WATER ISOMETRIC - BLOCK B 1207-2-ME-PW-103 00D POTABLE WATER ISOMETRIC - BLOCK C 1207-2-ME-PW-200 00D POTABLE WATER SITE DISTRIBUTION LAYOUT1207-2-ME-PW-201 00D POTABLE WATER ISOMETRIC 1207-2-ME-WH-01 00D RAIN WATER BLOCK B HARVESTING 1207-2-ME-WW-01 00D WASTE WATER LAYOUT & ISOMETRIC - BLOCK

A 1207-2-ME-WW-02 00D WASTE WATER LAYOUT - GROUND & FIRST

FLOORS BLOCK B 1207-2-ME-WW-03 00D WASTE WATER LAYOUT - GROUND & FIRST

FLOORS BLOCK C 1207-2-ME-WW-101 00D WASTE WATER ISOMETRIC - BLOCK A 1207-2-ME-WW-102 00D WASTE WATER ISOMETRIC - BLOCK B 1207-2-ME-WW-103 00D WASTE WATER ISOMETRIC - BLOCK C 1207-2-ME-WW-200 00D WASTE WATER SITE DISTRIBUTION LAYOUT 1207-2-ME-WW-201 00D WASTE WATER SITE ISOMETRIC

_________________________________________

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MECHANICAL

DOCUMENT NO: 1207-ME-5-000

REV DATE DESCRIPTION ORIG APPROVALS

A 21-SEP-2016 ISSUE FOR TENDER ML TOS

Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL

DOCUMENT NO. 1207-ME-5-000

21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 2 of 65


Disclaimer This specification has been prepared on behalf of and for the exclusive and confidential use of our Client, and is subject to and issued in accordance with the agreement between The Client and Moulton Mayers Architects. The opinions, determinations, evaluations, recommendations, appraisals, and advice delivered or given by SYLENG in this specification represent only its informed professional judgment, consistent with professional industry standards, based on data and information reasonably available to it or obtained from The Client Consequently, SYLENG shall not be liable for any cost, expense, loss or damage sustained by The Client as a result of the manner in which such services were in good faith performed by SYLENG, or as a result of the failure of SYLENG in good faith to perform any service, or as result of the reliance by The Client or any other party on any determination, recommendation or projection made or advice given by SYLENG, except to the extent SYLENG is guilty of gross negligence or willful misconduct. Copying this specification without the permission of The Client or SYLENG is not permitted.

REV DESCRIPTION ORIG REVIEW SYLENG APPROVAL

DATE CLIENT APPROVAL

DATE

A

ISSUE FOR TENDER

____________

_____________

___________

8-APR-2016

___________

_________

M. Lans T. Sylvester T. Sylvester



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 3 of 65


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATION: 5-001 – MOTORS & ELECTRIC WORK ........................................ 4

SPECIFICATION: 5-020 - SANITARY AND VENT SYSTEMS ................................. 10

SPECIFICATION: 5-030 – ROOF & STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM ........................ 16

SPECIFICATION: 5-040 - WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.................................. 21

SPECIFICATION: 5-060 – CLEAR WATER, WATSE AND VENT SYSTEM ............ 29

SPECIFICATION: 5-150 - PLUMBING FIXTURES ................................................... 32

SPECIFICATION: 5-510 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS ............................................. 36

SPECIFICATION: 5-520 - VALVES ........................................................................... 58



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 4 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-001 – MOTORS & ELECTRIC WORK

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical

Supplementary Requirements, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to

work specified in this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Substitution of Materials: Refer to Division 1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings for all motors, including manufacturer, motor rpm,

full load efficiency, full load power factor, service factor, and frame type.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Provide all motors, power transformers, control power transformers and all

electrically powered or electrically controlled equipment.

B. All starters, disconnects, relays, pushbuttons, pilot lights, and other devices

required for the control of motors or electrical equipment shall be furnished by

Division 5, except as specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications.

Where starters and disconnects are furnished by Division 5 Contractor, they

shall be installed by Division 6 Contractor, coordinated with Division 6

Contractor, connected by Division 6 Contractor, and furnished in accordance

with Division 6 Sections of the specifications.

C. Coordinate minimum AIC ratings with Division 6 drawings for Division 5

supplied starters and variable frequency drives.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 5 of 65


D. Drawings and/or specifications show number and horsepower rating of all

motors, together with their actuating devices. Should any change in size,

horsepower rating or means of control be made to any motor or other

electrical equipment after the contracts are awarded, Division 5 Contractor is

to immediately notify General Contractor of change. Any additional costs due

to these changes shall be the responsibility of Division 5 Contractor.

E. Division 6 Contractor will provide power wiring to starter, disconnect and

motor and connect all equipment complete and ready to operate. Division 5

Contractor shall provide all control wiring line and low voltage, including

temperature control wiring and associated conduit for all control wiring.

F. Wire all equipment associated with this contract, including interlock wiring,

except wiring which is scheduled to be done by others.

G. Provide wiring diagrams to Division 6 Contractor for all apparatus

indicating external connection and internal controls.

1.5 PRODUCT CRITERIA

A. Select motors for conditions in which they will be required to perform; i.e.,

general purpose, splash-proof, explosion proof, standard duty, high torque, or

any other special type as required by the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Motor enclosures shall be of the type recommended by the equipment

manufacturer for the specified application.

C. All motors shall be furnished for starting in accordance with utility

requirements, and shall be compatible with starters, as specified hereinafter,

or under Division 16 of the specifications.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 6 of 65


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic

approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any

submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications

included here.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All material shall be new and guaranteed for the service intended.

2.3 STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS

A. Furnish starters in accordance with Specification 6-155 of Division 6

Specifications.

B. Furnish adjustable frequency drives in accordance with Specification 6-156

of Division 6 Specifications.

C. Furnish disconnect switches in accordance with Specification 6-170 of

Division 6 Specifications.

D. Starters for NEMA rated 200 or 230 volt motors, 30 HP and above shall be

reduced voltage starting type.

E. Starters for NEMA rated 460 volt motors, 60 HP and above, shall be

reduced voltage starting type.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, reduced voltage starters to be solid state type.

G. Equipment control power transformers shall have the required primary and

secondary voltage and be of adequate size for equipment served.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 7 of 65


H. AIC Ratings:

1. All starters and adjustable frequency drives (AFD/VFD) furnished by

Division 5 shall comply with minimum amps interrupting current (AIC)

rating as identified on Division 6 drawings and specifications. Where

furnished equipment does not meet these minimum ratings

requirements by itself, then a U.L. series rating can be used by

providing a U.L. recognized fuse or circuit breaker located upstream of

starter or VFD in accordance with U.L. distance limitations. Division 5

Contractor is responsible for providing any additional fusing or circuit

breakers to meet the minimum AIC requirements.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Motors 1/3 HP and below shall be single phase power, 60 cycle, and

motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be NEMA rated three phase power, 60 cycle,

unless otherwise indicated.

B. All 120 volt single phase motors shall be provided with integral internal

thermal overload protection.

C. Refer to the equipment schedules and specification sections for specific

voltages required.

D. All motors shall be 1750 RPM, unless otherwise noted.

E. Use NEMA Design B motors, normal starting torque with Class B insulation

unless specified otherwise or unless the manufacturer of the equipment on

which the motor is being used has different requirements. Motors in drip-proof

enclosures to have a 1.15 service factor. Motors in all other enclosures to

have minimum 1.0 service factors.

F. All motors 1 HP and larger, except specially wound motors, shall be high



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 8 of 65


efficiency motors. Nominal efficiency of each high efficiency motor shall meet

or exceed the value listed below when tested in accordance with IEEE

Standard 112, Method B procedures as stated in NEMA MG 1-12.53a.

HP 1200 rpm 1800 rpm 3600 rpm

1 84.0 84.0 84.0

1 ½ 84.0 84.0 84.0

21 84.0 84.0 84.0

3 87.5 87.5 87.5

5 88.5 88.5 88.5

7 ½ 89.5 89.5 89.5

10 90.2 90.2 90.2

15 91.1 91.1 91.1

20 92.0 92.0 92.0

25 92.4 92.4 92.4

30 92.5 92.5 92.5

40 93.1 93.1 93.1

50 93.6 93.6 93.6

60 94.1 94.1 94.1

75 94.2 94.2 94.2

100 94.6 94.6 94.6

125 94.6 94.6 94.6

150 95.1 95.1 95.1

200 95.1 95.1 95.1

G. All motors 40 HP and greater shall be provided with motor mounted power

factor correction capacitors to improve power factor to .90 minimum. Motors

less than 40 HP shall be provided with .85 power factor. Where motors less

than 40 HP are not available with minimum .85 power factor, provide motor

mounted power factor correction capacitor to improve power factor to at least



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 9 of 65


.90 under rated load condition.

H. Motors for single phase operation shall be permanent split capacitor or first

grade capacitor start, induction run motors. Motors shall be equipped with

permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings, and shall be selected for

quiet operation. Motors 1/8 HP and below may be shaded pole type with

permanently oiled unit bearings.

I. Unless otherwise indicated, two speed motors to be one winding,

consequent pole, variable torque type.

J. Motors for use with adjustable frequency drive controllers shall be inverter

duty rated and meet NEMA MGI-1998, Part 31.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with details, approved shop drawings, and

manufacturer's instructions.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 10 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-020 - SANITARY AND VENT SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Requirements, apply to work specified in this section.

DESCRIPTION

A. This section includes soil, waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and to locations indicated.

RELATED WORK

A. Refer to Excavation and Backfill paragraph of the Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements.

B. Refer to Specification 5-120 - Hangers, Supports and Anchors. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Substitution of Materials: Refer to Division 1. B. Label each section of pipe with class and applicable standard. C. Soil, waste and vent piping to be capable of a working pressure

rating of 10 foot head of water.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For pipe, tube, fittings and couplings.

B. Field Test Reports:

1. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements listed under Quality Assurance.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 11 of 65


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials herein specified shall be new, unless noted otherwise. 2.2 PVC PIPING (FOR USE ON SANITARY, VENT AND GREASE PIPING)

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, solid wall drain, waste and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, socket type made to

ASTM D 3311, drain, waste and vent patterns. 2. PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F409, drainage pattern tube and

tubular fittings with ends as required for application. B. CPVC Piping:

1. Spears “Lab Waste” CPVC schedule 40 piping and fittings shall be used.

2. CPVC piping shall be installed in kitchens starting at each floor sink/drain receiving discharge from a dishwasher. The CPVC piping shall continue a minimum of 15’ downstream.

2.3 JOINTS

A. Solvent weld meeting ASTM Specification D2564. CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts specified shall comply with ASME A112.36.2M. Equal products of Zurn Mfg. Co., Wade, J.R. Smith or Josam, may be submitted.

1. Floor Cleanouts FCO: a. Zurn Z1400-NL-BP – coated cast iron floor cleanout,

tapered thread bronze plug, adjustable housing with scoriated secured round nickel bronze top.

2. Exterior Cleanouts ECO: a. Zurn Z1402-NL-BP-HD – cast iron cleanout, tapered

thread bronze plug, with heavy duty scoriated loose set, round cast iron tractor cover.

3. Notes: a. Floor cleanouts installed above slab on grade shall

be supplied with flashing and flashing clamps. b. Exterior cleanouts on sanitary sewer main exiting

the building shall be installed with a 4” concrete pad flush with finished grade and shall include two (2) cleanouts with a 2-way cleanout pipe fitting, Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute No. 8446 for 4” or No. 8450 for 6”. Provide increaser fittings as required.

4. Wall Cleanouts WCO: a. Zurn Z1441-BP round smooth stainless steel

secured cover, coated cast iron cleanout ferrule with spigot connection and recessed tapered threaded bronze plug.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 12 of 65


5. Pipe cleanout (in line above ceiling): a. Zurn Z1440-BP no-hub cast iron cleanout ferrule

and bronze counter sunk plug. FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drains comply with ASME A112.21.1M. Equal products of Zurn, Wade, Smith or Josam may be submitted. Refer to the drawing for a schedule of drains.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Section “Earthwork” for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Client for Project-site sanitary sewer piping. B. Refer to “Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements”

for basic piping installation. C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary

drains connect to building sanitary sewers. D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in

sanitary force-main piping. E. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration

through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 5 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for wall penetration systems.

F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep ¼ bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 13 of 65


requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

I. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

J. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to "Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements" for basic piping joint construction.

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Specification 5-120 “Hangers, Supports and Anchors” for seismic-restraint devices.

CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes

indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Specification 5-150 “Plumbing Fixtures.”

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Specification 5-090 “Plumbing Specialties.”

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 14 of 65


1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 15 of 65


having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: i. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered,

extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

ii. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

iii. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

iv. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 16 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-030 – ROOF & STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Control, including General and


Supplementary Requirements, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work

specified in this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. All interior piping to a point five (5) feet outside the building wall.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Refer to Excavation Backfill of Specification 1-500-600 - Mechanical and Electrical

Supplementary Requirements.

B. Refer to Specification 5-140 - Thermal Insulation

C. Refer to Specification 5-120 - Hangers Supports and Anchors.

D. Refer to Specification 5-010 - Exterior Services.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings on all items specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials herein specified shall be new unless noted otherwise.

2.2 STORM SEWER PIPING

Pipe Fittings Joints



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 17 of 65


PVC Schedule 40 PVC Drainage Solvent Weld

ASTM D-2665 Pattern ASTM D-2564

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts specified are used to establish a standard of quality. Equal products of

Zurn Mfg. Co., Wade, J.R. Smith or Josam may be submitted.

1. Floor Cleanouts FCO:

a. Zurn Z1400-NL-BP - coated cast iron floor cleanout, tapered thread bronze

plug, adjustable housing with scoriated secured round nickel bronze top.

2. Exterior Cleanouts ECO:

a. Zurn Z1402-NL-BP-HD - coated cast iron cleanout, tapered thread bronze

plug, adjustable housing with heavy duty scoriated loose set, round cast iron

tractor cover.

b. Notes:

1) Floor cleanouts installed above slab on grade shall be supplied with

flashing and flashing clamps.

2) Exterior cleanouts on storm sewer main exiting the building shall be

installed with a 4" concrete pad flush with finished grade and shall

include two (2) cleanouts with a 2-way cleanout pipe fitting, Cast Iron

Soil Pipe Institute No. 8446 for 4" or No. 8450 for 6". Provide increaser

fittings as required.

3. Wall Cleanouts WCO:

a. Zurn Z1441-BP – round smooth stainless steel secured cover, coated cast

iron cleanout ferrule with spigot connection and recessed tapered threaded

bronze plug.

4. Pipe cleanout (in line above ceiling):



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 18 of 65


a. Charlotte No-hub PVC cleanout ferrule and PVC countersunk plug.

2.4 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof drains specified are used to establish a standard of quality, equal products of

Zurn Mfg. Co., Wade, J. R. Smith or Josam may be submitted. Refer to the drawings

for schedule of drains.

2.5 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench drain channels shall be made of precast polymer concrete with a top width

of 6 inches, radiused bottoms and nominal lengths of 1/2 or 1 meter. All channels

shall interlock with tongue and groove connections with adjoining channels. Each

channel shall have four horizontal anchoring ribs to mechanically lock the channel

into the floor slab or pavement. Provide channel and grate lengths as required.

B. Channels shall have available vertical cut outs for 4" or 6" discharge and available

4" or 6" horizontal outlet end caps. Channels shall have a built-in bottom slope of

.6%, or be non-sloping, as shown on plans.

C. Channel grates should be heavy duty PolyDrain #422 or 423 made of galvanized

steel.

Grates should be securely locked down with built-in channel lock blocks.

D. Trench drains shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's details. A

minimum of 4 inches of concrete shall be placed beneath each channel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install a complete storm water drainage system, including roof drains, area drains

rain water conductors and underground drainage system.

B. Verify all invert elevations and measurements prior to the installation of materials,

either underground, above ground, or in the building.

C. All underground piping outside and inside the building shall be laid and supported

on 4" compacted bedding of sand, gravel, or crushed stone of which 100% will pass

through 1/2" sieve.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 19 of 65


D. Install underground lines passing under foundations with minimum of 6" clearance

to concrete and insure there is no disturbance of bearing soil. Underground storm

sewer piping shall be laid with bell ends pointing upgrade, a continuous trough shall

be shaped to receive the bottom quadrant of pipe. Bell holes shall be excavated so

that only the pipe barrel receives bearing pressure.

E. The bedding shall be shaped for clearance for all joints and fittings, and tamped in

place, graded evenly to insure uniform bearing for the full length of the bottom

quadrant of pipe. No piping shall be supported by blocking, planking or mounding of

bedding material.

F. Grade all storm sewer horizontal lines with minimum of 1/8" per foot. Run all piping

parallel with the building lines, except as may be shown on the plans. Install

overhead piping as high as possible.

G. Joints for screwed pipe shall be made by cutting pipe square and reaming inside.

Threads shall be cut so that end of pipe extends to a shoulder of fittings. Exposed

threads shall not exceed three in number and shall be painted with heavy coat of

asphaltum. Use approved joint compounds sparingly and only on male threads.

H. Install plastic pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Include

adequate offsets or expansion joints to allow for pipe expansion.

I. Plastic pipe shall not penetrate a fire rated assembly. Metal or glass pipe shall be

used for 10 inches on each side of the fire rated assembly. Fire rated assemblies

include walls and floors. Plastic pipe and combustible materials shall not be installed

in return air plenum ceiling spaces.

J. Provide plugs or caps for all openings during the construction phase. The

temporary plug shall be plastic cap or equivalent. Duct tape is unacceptable for use

as a plug, support, or to separate ferrous from non-ferrous materials for the

construction phase.

3.2 TESTING

A. Refer to Testing paragraph of Specification 1-500-600 - Mechanical and Electrical

Supplemental Requirements.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 20 of 65


B. A water test shall be applied to the system either in its entirety or in sections. The

piping shall be tightly plugged and submitted to a 10-foot head of water located at the

highest point. Provide a separate standpipe above the highest point being tested or

extend the system to obtain the required 10-foot head of water. The water shall be

kept for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts.

C. Defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and

inspection and test repeated. Repairs shall be made with new materials. No caulking

of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 21 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-040 - WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and


Supplementary Requirements, apply to work of this Specification.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

This Specification covers all interior domestic hot, cold and hot recirculation water

piping to a point 5 feet outside the building wall.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Refer to Specification 5-090 - Material Specialties.

B. Refer to Specification 5-120 - Hangers, Supports and Anchors.

C. Refer to Specification 5-010 - Exterior Services.

D. Refer to Specification 5-140 - Insulation.


A. Substitution of Materials: Refer to Architect.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit drawings indicating location of all balancing valves and their GPM flow

rate setting. A copy shall be submitted to Owner.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 22 of 65


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It is

the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for

products that meet or exceed the specifications included here.

2.2 MATERIALS

All materials herein specified shall be new unless noted otherwise.

2.3 PIPE AND FITTING

A. Above Grade and Below Slab (2” and smaller): Schedule 40 CPVC ASTM

#2846-92 with socket weld joints. Piping shall be Flow Guard Gold or Harvel.

CPVC ball valves and CTS fittings shall be Spears, CTS CPVC ball valves.

B. Above Grade and Below Slab (2-1/2” and Larger):

1. CPVC Schedule 40 and 80 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS)

conforming to ASTM F 441. CPVC Schedule 80 fittings shall conform

to ASTM F 439. CPVC Schedule 80 threaded fittings shall conform to

ASTM F 437. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured as a system and

be the product of one manufacturer. All pipe and fittings shall be

manufactured in the United States. Pipe and fittings shall conform to

National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61 or the health effects

portion of NSF Standard 14.

2.4 JOINTS

A. Solvent cement meeting ASTM Specification A2846 and F493.

2.5 VALVES

A. Manufacturers: The following list of valve manufacturers are acceptable

subject to providing valves equal to item specified. Nibco, Hammond, Apollo

and Watts.

B. Ball Valves:

1. For pipe 2 inches and smaller, the following ball valves may be used:

a. Full port, swing away type, teflon seats, blowout-proof stem,

screwed or soldered joint, Nibco T-595.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 23 of 65


b. Milwaukee Butterball, bronze body, type 302 stainless steel

disc, Viton seal, 175 psi WOG rated, series BB-1, soldered or

screwed.

C. Butterfly Valves:

1. For pipes 2-1/2 inches and larger the following butterfly valves may be

used:

a. Cast iron body, aluminum bronze disk, 416 stainless steel

stem, EPDM seat, wafer design, Keystone Fig. 100. Provide

lever operator for valves 6 inches and smaller.

D. Check Valves:

1. Check valves 2 inches and smaller, bronze body, bronze trim, swing

flapper 150 psi saturated steam working pressure, Jenkins Fig. 92-A.

2. Check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, iron body, bronze mounted, wing

flapper 125 psi steam working pressure, Jenkins Fig. 624.

E. Balancing Valves:

1. Griswold Controls, Automatic Flow Control, or equals by Tour &

Anderson or Armstrong.

2. Refer to drawings for locations, model number and flow rates.

F. Provide reinforced CPVC adapters at all valves equal to Spears.

2.6 UNIONS

A. Pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, malleable iron, ground brass seat, 105 psi

steam working pressure, Stockham Fig. 694.

B. Pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger, cast iron flanges, ANSI Standard B16.1

with neoprene gasket.

2.7 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, malleable iron, vulcanized fiber insulator with

neoprene gasket, 300 psi WOG working pressure, Stockham Fig. 693 1/2.

B. Pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger, Epco Model GX with Epconite #2

insulating gasket, 250 psi WOG working pressure.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 24 of 65


C. Duct tape and insulation is not an acceptable method of isolating ferrous from

non-ferrous materials.

D. Insulating couplings of nylon with steel jacket, 1000 psi hydrostatic test

pressure manufactured by Walter Vallet Company.

2.8 EXTERIOR WALL PIPE WRAPS

A. Piping within concrete block walls shall be wrapped with UPC watertight

plastic covering all joints, elbows, and tees. Shall be completely sealed with

wrap with no seams exposed.

2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Mechanical Water Hammer Arrestors:

1. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized and located according to

manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Water hammer arrestors shall be used at all fixtures or battery of

fixtures, and at top of risers. There shall be a minimum of one in each

branch distribution piping.

Air chambers shall not be considered equal to water hammer arrestors.

Air chambers are not permitted.

3. Mechanical water hammer arrestors shall be used to control water

hammer.

Refer to the drawings for a schedule.

4. Include access panels as required by code.

5. Acceptable manufacturers are Sioux Chief and Precision Plumbing

Products (PPP), equal to sizes shown.

2.10 NIPPLES

A. All nipples shall be schedule 40 galvanized pipe except for shore and

shoulder nipples which shall be schedule 80 galvanized pipe.

B. Exposed supplies, stops, P-Traps, escutcheons, nipples at fixtures, etc.,

below counters or within cabinet spaces shall be IPS chromium plated red

brass pipe.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 25 of 65


2.11 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. For pipe 2 inches and smaller, Metraflex Model HPFF-3 compensators,

stainless steel bellows, brass case components.

B. For pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger, Metraflex MetraLoop. Flexible loops shall be

designed to impart no thrust loads on the anchors.

C. The following table shall be used for expansion loops where Metraflex

MetraLoop is not provided:

Pipe Size Length of Each

Loop

Number of Legs

3/4" 38" 3

1" 40" 3

1-1/4" 42" 3

1-1/2" 46" 3

2" 50" 3

2-1/2" 54" 3

3" 60" 3

4" 68" 3

6” 76” 3



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 26 of 65


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The system shall include all connections to plumbing fixtures, each piece of

equipment and all equipment furnished under other contracts.

B. The system shall be laid out so as to obtain a neat installation conforming with

intent of drawings and specifications. Piping shall avoid interference with other

work. General routing shown on plans, however, additional offsets and routing

shall be part of this contract. All connections shall be made so as to eliminate

the possibility of back siphoning or cross-connections.

C. All water piping shall be installed true and square with the building and shall

be drainable with drain valves at the low point in the piping. All drain valves

shall be capped-off.

D. Install all water pipe by use of proper pipe and fitting materials. All changes in

pipe size shall be by use of reducing fittings. Bushings shall not be used.

E. Install unions on equipment side of all isolating valves. Provide unions for all

equipment such as pumps, water softeners, water heaters, and similar items

and as shown on the drawings.

F. Install anchors with two (2) sets of guides each on either side of expansion

joints as shown on drawings.

G. Install chain operators on all valves in mechanical rooms over 8 feet from the

floor, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

H. Install plugs or caps on all openings during the construction phase. The

temporary plug shall be cap of same material as pipe. Duct tape is

unacceptable for use as a plug for the construction phase.

I. Provide valve boxes or manholes for all valves installed underground.

3.2 CLEANING

All piping shall be flushed prior to testing.

3.3 TESTING

A. Refer to Testing Article of - General Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental

Requirements.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 27 of 65


B. Test the water system at a hydrostatic pressure of 100 psi for 24 hours.

C. Test the water system at a hydrostatic pressure not less than 25 psi above

working pressure or a minimum of 100 psi. The water used for tests shall be

obtained from potable source of water.

D. Provide a pressure gauge located at the highest point of the system being

tested.

Pressure gauge shall have a shutoff valve and bleeder valve to check gauge

operation.

The test shall be applied for 1 hour with no drop in gauge pressure. All joints

shall be inspected during the test. No portion of the water system shall be

concealed until tested.

3.4 BALANCING

A. Balance the water distribution. All control valves shall be adjusted for proper

operation.

B. Balance flush valves, bleed valves, flow control valves for proper flow to the

plumbing fixtures or equipment.

3.5 DISINFECTION

A. Provide chlorine disinfection as outlined. Other approved disinfection methods

may be used with prior approval of the Architect.

B. Disinfection of potable water system:

1. Procedure - New or repaired potable water systems shall be

disinfected prior to use. The method to be followed shall be as follows:

a. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until no

dirty water appears at the points of outlet.

b. The system or parts thereof shall be filled with a water chlorine

solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine and the

system or part thereof shall be valved-off and allowed to stand for 6

hours or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water

chlorine solution containing at least 100 parts per million of chlorine

and allowed to stand for 2 hours.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 28 of 65


c. Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed

with clean potable water until no chlorine remains in the water

coming from the system.

d. The procedures shall be repeated if it is shown by a bacteriological

examination, conducted by a governmental certified independent

testing laboratory that contamination still exists in the system.

Supply all bacteriological tests to Architect/Engineer for review.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 29 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-060 – CLEAR WATER, WATSE AND VENT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General

and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and

Electrical Supplementary Requirements, apply to work specified in

this Specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Refer to Specification 5-120 - Hangers, Supports and Anchors.


A. Substitution of Materials: Refer to Architects specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS


2.2 PVC PIPING

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, solid wall drain, waste and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, socket type made to

ASTM D 3311, drain, waste and vent patterns.

2. PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F409, drainage pattern tube and

tubular fittings with ends as required for application.

2.3 JOINTS

A. Solvent weld meeting ASTM Specification D2564.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Provide cleanouts manufactured by Josam, Zurn, or Smith, as

specified in Specification Specification 5-020, and where shown on

drawings.

B. Provide recessed solid brass cleanout plugs where fittings are used

as cleanouts.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 30 of 65


2.5 DRAINS

A. Provide floor drains manufactured by Josam, Wade, Zurn, Smith or

Josam, equal to numbers listed in Drain Schedule indicated on

drawings.

B. Provide hub drain as shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Connect clear-water waste and vent piping to all drains as shown.

Waste lines shall pitch at minimum 1/8 inch per foot slope unless

space requirements dictate otherwise.

Minimum allowable pitch is 1/8 inch per foot slope.

B. Install drains in coordination with other contractors. The drains are

provided for condensate from heating and ventilating equipment

and therefore the Mechanical Contractor should be consulted

before final location of the drain. Rim of drain shall be installed a

minimum of 2 inches above finished floor.

C. Joints for screwed pipe shall be made by cutting pipe square and

reaming. Threads shall be cut so that end of pipe extends to

shoulder of fittings. Exposed threads shall not exceed three and

shall be painted with a heavy coat of asphaltum. Use approved joint

compounds sparingly and only on outer threads.

D. Install plugs or caps for all openings during the construction phase.

The temporary plug shall be plastic cap or equivalent. Duct tape is

unacceptable for use as a plug for the construction phase.

3.2 TESTING

A. Refer to Testing paragraph of - General Mechanical Requirements.

B. A water test shall be applied to the system either in its entirety or in

Specifications. The piping shall be plugged and submitted to a 10-

foot head of water located at the highest point.

Provide a separate standpipe above the highest point or extend the



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 31 of 65


system to obtain the required 10-foot head. The water shall be kept

for at least 30 minutes before the inspection of joints starts.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 32 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-150 - PLUMBING FIXTURES


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and


Supplemental Requirements apply to work specified in this section.


Substitution of Materials: Refer to Architects Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings on all items specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It is



2.2 MATERIALS

All materials specified herein shall be new unless noted otherwise.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. All front of house plumbing fixtures, faucets and shower valves to

be specified by Interiors Consultant.

B. Water coolers shall be Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Sunroc or Oasis.

C. Supplies and stops shall be McGuire, Brasscraft or Zurn.

D. Flush valves shall be Sloan, Zurn or Hydrotek (sensor type only)

equal to number listed.

E. Carriers and supports for water closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories

shall be Josam, Wade, Smith, Ancon or Zurn.

F. Molded stone janitor's receptors and shower bases shall be

Powers-Fiat or Sterns-Williams equal to Powers-Fiat number listed.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 33 of 65


G. Plumbing fixtures shall be American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Zurn or

Kohler, equal to number listed.

H. Faucets shallb e Chicago, T & S Brass, Speakman or Zurn.

I. Stainless steel sinks shall be Elkay or Just equal to number listed.

2.4 FIXTURES

Refer to drawings for schedule of plumbing fixtures and trim.

2.5 PLUMBING FIXTURE WATER CONSERVATION

A. Water Closets

1. Water closets, either flush tank or flushometer operated,

shall be designed, manufactured and installed to be operable

and adequate flushed with no more than 1.6 gallons per

flushing cycle when tested in accordance with applicable

standards.

B. Urinals

1. Urinals shall be designed, manufactured, and installed to be

operable and adequate flushed with no more than 1.0

gallons of water per flush.

C. Public Facilities

1. Lavatory

a. Faucets for public lavatories shall be equipped with

outlet devices which limit the flow of water to a

maximum of 0.5 gpm or be equipped with selfclosing

valves that limit the delivery to a maximum of 0.25

gallons of hot water for recirculating systems and to a

maximum of 0.5 gallons for nonrecirculating systems.

Exception: Separate lavatories for physically

handicapped persons may be equipped with self-

closing valves if valve remains open for a minimum

of ten (10) seconds.

D. Private Facilities



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 34 of 65


1. Faucets for private lavatories shall be designed,

manufactured and installed to deliver water at a flow rate not

to exceed 2.2 gpm when tested in accordance with

applicable standards.

E. Shower Heads

1. Shower heads shall be designed, manufactured, and

installed to deliver water at a rate not to exceed 2.5 gpm

when tested in accordance with applicable standards.

F. Sink Faucets

1. Sink faucets shall be designed, manufactured, and installed

to deliver water at a rate not to exceed 2.2 gpm when tested

in accordance with applicable standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All plumbing fixtures shall be installed as recommended by the

respective manufacturer.

B. Wall hung lavatories and sinks if not specified with carrier shall be

provided with steel backing plate. Backing plate shall be secured to

studs or installed behind masonry walls.

Bolts to fixture hanging plate shall be a minimum 3/8 inch size and

tack welded to the backing plate. In addition to bolts for the fixture

hanging plate, bolts shall be provided to prevent uplift of the wall

hung fixture.

C. All individual supplies to fixtures shall be provided with adequate

support to prevent movement. Additional blocking should be added

as required.

D. All exposed supplies, stops, traps, etc., piping below and within

counters and cabinets shall be chrome plated.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 35 of 65


3.2 PROTECTION

After installation but before acceptance by Owner, all fixtures shall be protected to

prevent scratching or other construction damage.

3.3 CLEANING

Before acceptance by Owner all fixtures shall be cleaned with compounds

recommended by the respective manufacturer.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 36 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-510 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



Supplemental Requirements, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to


1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Valves: Refer to Specification 5-520 - Valves.

B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Specification 5-530 - Piping Specialties.

C. Pipe Hangers: Refer to Specification 5-540 - Mechanical Supporting

Devices.

D. Systems Balancing: Refer to Specification 5-930 – Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing.



1.4 DESCRIPTION

A. This section includes pipe and pipe fitting specifications and installation

requirements.

B. Specification of an item in this or any other section shall not relieve the

Contractor from providing all items, articles, materials, operations, methods,

labor, equipment and incidentals necessary for a complete and functional

system.

C. Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and guarantee for

the services intended.

D. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the

respective system in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31 or Section 1 of the

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for boiler external piping.

E. Use material meeting the latest revision of ASTM specifications as listed in



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 37 of 65


this specification.

F. Follow local codes if they require other types of pipe or joints.

G. Non-metallic piping will be acceptable only for the services indicated. It will

not be acceptable in occupied spaces and ventilation plenum spaces,

including plenum ceilings.

H. Use only long radius elbows having a center line radius of 1.5 pipe

diameters.

I. Where ASTM A-53, grade A pipe is specified, ASTM A-53, grade B may be

substituted at Contractor's option.

1.5 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS

A. All welds to be made by qualified welders experienced in piping work.

B. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified

complying with the provisions of the latest revision of ANSI/ASME B 31.1 -

Power Piping or Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for

boiler external piping. For all high pressure steam applications and

ANSI/ASME B31.9 “Building Services Piping” for all other piping systems.

C. Before any welding is performed, Contractor to submit his Standard

Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification

Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code.

D. The Architect or Engineer reserves the right to test the work of any welder

employed on the project, at the Contractor's expense. If the work of the welder

is found to be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further

welding on the project.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Welder's specifications and qualifications.

B. Submit schedule of pipe and pipe fittings showing manufacturer and

catalog number.

C. Submittals may be in the form of a typewritten list, with proper references,

indicating service and pipe or pipe fitting specifications.

D. Submit piping systems on 1/8" or approved scale coordinated layout



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 38 of 65


drawings.

E. The supplier of the pre-insulated piping systems shall provide 1/8" scale

coordinated drawings for submittal. Drawings must be approved before

installation. The supplier shall also provide factory-trained field supervision for

the training of contractor's field crew and inspection of the progress of

installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.7 LP GAS SERVICE

A. Regulators:

1. Gas regulator shall be furnished by gas Service Company with the

following capacities:

Regulator No. 1 - (High Pressure at Storage Tank)

Pressure - 20 PSIG

Regulator No. 2 - (Boiler Room)

Pressure - 14" W.C.

Regulator No. 3 - (Kitchen)

Pressure - 14" W.C.

Regulator No. 4 - (Pool Heater)

Pressure - 14" W.C.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 39 of 65


PART 2 -PRODUCTS





included herein.

2.2 BOILER FEED WATER, BLOW DOWN, BOILER DRAIN AND TRIM

A. Use “ASME” rated pipe and pipe fittings as indicated for the associated

steam condensate specified in this section.

2.3 CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSATE WATER

A. PVC Pipe:

1. Pipe: Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, piping up to 12 inch

diameter, all new, solvent welded, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), rigid

pressure pipe; made from Class 12454-B (formerly Type I, Grade 1)

virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D-1784.

a. Unless otherwise designated, all PVC pipe 1-1/2” diameter

and smaller to be Schedule 80.

b. All PVC piping 2” diameter and larger to be Schedule 40.

c. Dimensions and maximum operating pressure shall conform

to ASTM D-1785.

d. Solvent weld in accordance with ASTM D-2564.

B. PVC Fittings:

1. General:

a. Base Material: Of the same schedule rating as adjoining pipe,

polyvinyl chloride (PVC) made from Class 12454-B (formerly

Type I, Grade 1), containing no fillers or re-grounds in

accordance with ASTM D-1784.

b. Self Supporting Design: All fittings shall be designed to carry



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 40 of 65


stresses developed with a “Free Ends” condition when

hydrostatic pressure testing is performed.

2. Construction:

a. All fittings shall be “molded” type. “Fabricated” PVC fittings

are not allowed. “Thermally butt-fused” PVC fittings are not

allowed.

3. Molded-in code stamps indicating: ANSI compliances, schedule

rating, maximum pressure rating, manufacturer, date and lot.

C. PVC Pipe Joints:

1. Straight pipe and typical PVC fittings shall be solvent-welded, bell

and spigot joints.

2. Where pipe joints to a dissimilar material, provide a flanged coupling,

unless otherwise shown, socket welded, 150 lb. bolt pattern, with extra

heavy reinforcing in the flange to prevent cracking. Companion flanges

two-inch diameter and larger shall be “Vanstone” type.

2.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Use pipe and pipe fittings as indicated for the system to which the chemical

treatment piping is connected.

2.5 VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES

A. Use pipe and pipe fittings as indicated for the system to which the relief

valve or vent is connected.

2.6 COOLING COIL CONDENSATE

A. Piping shall be one of the following:

1. ASTM B88, type M, hard temper copper tubing, with ASTM

B145/ANSI B16.23 cast red bronze or ASTM B75/ANSI B16.20

wrought solder-type drainage fittings.

2. ASTM D1785, schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe with ASTM

D2665 drainage pattern, solvent weld PVC fittings.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 41 of 65


2.7 UNDERGROUND PIPE WRAP

A. Use for all underground piping which is not encased in a conduit and for

underground gas conduit. Material to be Tapecoat CT or approved equal, a

flexible polymer film with a coal tar and synthetic elastomeric coating of 36 mil

thickness and dielectric strength exceeding 12 KV. Primer to be Tapecoat CT

Coldprime or approved equal.


A. 1" and Smaller: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3, 300-pound, WOG malleable

insulating unions, with vulcanized fiber insulating sleeve and neoprene

gasket, equal to Stockham figure 693-1/2, or Epco model FX or FB dielectric

unions with Epconite No. 2 gasket, 250 psi at 210 degrees F.

B. 1-1/2" and Larger: Epco Model GX dielectric flange with Epconite No. 2

gasket, 175 psi at 210-degrees-F.

2.9 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. 2" and Smaller: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3, malleable iron unions, with brass

seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping, and galvanized

malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use unions of a pressure class

equal to, or higher than, specified for the fittings of the respective piping

service.

B. 2-1/2" and Larger: ASTM A181 or A105, grade 1, hot forged steel flanges

of threaded, welding neck, or slip-on pattern. Use raised face flanges, ANSI

B16.5, for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or

full face gaskets. Use flat flanges, ANSI B16.1, for mating with other flat face

flanges on equipment with full face gaskets.

C. Use pressure class compatible with that specified for valves, piping

specialties, and fittings of the respective piping service. Gasket material to be

suitable for pressures and temperatures of the piping system.

D. ASTM A516, grade 60/ANSI B16.5, cold formed steel flanges will be

acceptable.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 42 of 65


2.10 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS

A. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings, as manufactured by

Victaulic, Grinnell - Gruvlok, or Star Pipe Products, may be used with steel

pipe on the systems indicated below. Where malleable iron fittings are

indicated, they shall conform to ASTM A47.

Where fabricated steel fittings are indicated, they shall conform to ASTM A53,

type F, in sizes 3/4" through 1-1/2" and type E or S, grade B, in sizes 2"

through 20". Gaskets in all cases shall be EPDM, suitable for temperatures to

230-degrees-F.

B. The following services may use mechanical grooved pipe connections

within the building in mechanical spaces and above accessible ceilings:

1. Heating Hot Water

2. Chilled Water

3. Condenser Water

4. Cooling Coil Condensate

C. Acceptable fittings and couplings are listed below, based on Victaulic or

equals by Grinnel-Gruvlok or Star Pipe Products will be accepted. When used

on galvanized piping, fittings and couplings shall be galvanized. When used

on black steel piping, fittings and couplings shall have an enamel coating.

D. Couplings:

1. Malleable iron standard couplings, Style 77, or lightweight couplings, Style

75.

2. Outlet Couplings:

a. Malleable iron outlet couplings, Style 72.

3. Flanges:

a. Malleable iron, Style 741 or 742, except at butterfly valves where

standard welding flanges shall be used.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 43 of 65


4. Fittings:

a. Malleable iron elbows and tees, of the manufacturer's standard line,

may be used in all sizes except bullhead tees will not be accepted.

Fabricated steel fittings may be used in all sizes where fitting wall

thickness conforms to standard weight pipe.

E. Expansion Joints:

1. Credit for the inherent flexibility of mechanical grooved pipe connections,

when used for expansion joints, may be allowed upon specific application by

the Contractor. Request shall be made in writing and shall include service,

location, line size, proposed application and supporting calculations for the

intended service.

2.11 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Type ACR, ASTM B88 seamless, type K hard temper copper tube, with

wrought copper, brazed-joint fittings. Copper tube shall be factory or shop

cleaned, dehydrated and capped.

2.12 PRE-INSULATED PIPE (UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER)

A. Below grade piping for chilled water piping systems shall be preinsulated

type as manufactured by Thermacor, Energy Task Force, Rovanco, Perma-

Pipe or Insultek.

B. Carrier Pipe:

1. Pipe shall be SDR 26 Class 160, push joint PVC, gasketed.

C. Insulation

1. All pipe and fittings will be insulated with poly-urethane foam with the

following minimum characteristics: K factor = .13, Density = 2 pcf,

Closed cell Content - 90-95% in conformance with MIL-I-24172 and

ASTM C-591. Insulation shall completely fill the annular space between

carrier pipe and jacketing. Minimum insulation thickness shall be as per

Table 1. Insulation thickness shown shall be a minimum; nominal

thickness will not be allowed.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 44 of 65


PIPE

SIZE

CASING

SIZE

PIPE

O.D.

CASING

I.D.

CASING

O.D.

CASING

THICK

INSUL.

THICK.

¾ 4 1.05 4.22 4.50 0.14 1.59

1 4 1.32 4.22 4.50 0.14 1.45

1-1/4 6 1.66 5.90 6.14 0.12 2.12

1-1/2 6 1.90 5.90 6.14 0.12 2

2 6 2.38 5.90 6.14 0.12 1.76

2-1/2 6 2.88 5.90 6.14 0.12 1.51

3 8 3.50 7.84 8.16 0.16 2.17

4 8 4.50 7.84 8.16 0.16 1.67

6 10 6.63 9.80 10.20 0.20 1.59

8 12 8.63 11.76 12.24 0.24 1.57

10 14 10.75 14.70 15.30 0.30 1.68

12 16 12.75 14.60 15.30 0.30 1.68

TABLE 1

D. Jacketing Material

1. Casing pipe shall be polyvinyl chloride (SDR 102 PVC) meeting the

minimum classification requirements of ASTM D 1784. The thickness

shall be in accordance with Table 1. For pipes 14 inches and greater,

use HDP per ASTM D1248.

E. Fittings

1. Shall match carrier pipe, not be preinsulated, and be pushed in

thrust blocks.

F. Joining Method

1. Pipe shall be gasketed push joint.

G. Pipe Joints

1. All pipe joints shall be made per manufacturers recommendation.

After testing of service pipe, field closures shall be made at all



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 45 of 65


connections. All field applied insulation shall be a straight field joints

only. Field insulation and jacketing of fittings will not be acceptable.

H. Field Supervision

1. The services of a factory trained field service instructor directly

employed by the system manufacturer (not a sales agent or

representative) shall be required during all stages of the installation

and testing. The contractor must obtain a daily written report from the

installation instructor of the system supplier. The written report shall be

presented to the contractor on the same day it is prepared and one

copy shall be forwarded to manufacturer's office and the contracting

office. The report shall state whether or not the condition and quality of

materials used and the installation of the system are in accordance

with the manufacturer's approved drawing and published literature and

is satisfactory in all respects. A final report shall be signed by an officer

of the manufacturer and duly notarized certifying the materials are

installed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and

recommendations and will satisfactorily serve the intended use,

including maintaining an insulation barrier between the pipe and

surrounding soil, for the anticipated service life of the pipe. At a

minimum, provide up to 60 days of service.

I. Entry Elbows:

1. Entry elbows (where piping penetrates a slab into a building) shall be

prefabricated, pre-insulated steel pipe with PVC jacket. An anchor shall be

provided on the steel pipe within 3 feet of the connection point between the

steel pipe and push joint PVC pipe.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 46 of 65


PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Set pipe on end and hammer sides to remove foreign materials before

erection. Ream ends of all piping to remove burrs.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings, and at such heights

as not to obstruct any portion of window, doorway, stairway, or passageway.

Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to

clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of

pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings or other architectural

details before installing pipe.

B. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints, and expansion loops so

that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment or

building.

C. Mitered ells, notched tees, and "orange peel" reducers are not acceptable.

On threaded piping, bushings are not acceptable.

D. "Weld-o-lets" and "Thread-o-lets" may be used for branch takeoff up to

one-half (1/2) the diameter of the main.

E. During construction, provide temporary end caps on all piping to prevent

dirt and debris from entering the piping systems.

F. Install drains and vents throughout the systems to permit complete

drainage and venting of the entire system.

G. Install all valves, control valves, and piping specialties, including items

furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all

equipment installed by others where that equipment requires the piping

service indicated in this section.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 47 of 65


3.3 PRE-INSULATED PIPE

A. Install underground piping in compliance with manufacturers recommended

procedures and details. Pitch all pipe one inch in forty feet toward all drain

points.

B. Push Joint PVC Piping:

1. Push joints require a more stringent tolerance regarding deflection. A

maximum deflection of 1 to 1-1/2 degrees is allowed, unless manufacturer has

more strict requirements. Deflection shall be checked by the manufacturer’s

field representative prior to back filling.

2. Make overall inspection of the load. End packaging should not show signs

of damage. If the load has shifted, or end packing damaged, then each piece

must be carefully inspected for damage. Specifically the ends should be

inspected for scars, nicks, etc. Other obvious defects are also reason for

rejection. Check total quantities of each item against tally sheet (pipe, fittings,

etc.). Any damaged or missing items are to be note on delivery receipt and

the receipt returned to the carrier. Notify the carrier immediately and make

claim in accordance with the carrier’s instructions. Manufacturer shall assist, if

necessary, in handling this claim.

3. Unloading Instructions: The means by which the pipes are unloaded in the

field shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The use

of mechanical equipment shall be used to unload the larger sizes and provide

extra protection against damage in handling. To prevent the possibility of the

core pipe from shifting within the casing pipe, do not stand a length on one

end or raise it vertically. Under no condition shall a pipe be dragged along the

ground. Do not lift fittings or pipe by inserting a bar, pipe, etc., inside of the

core. Damage to the pipe may result. If any pipe is damaged in unloading and

handling, mark the damaged area and set it aside. The manufacturer’s field

representative shall determine whether damaged casing can be repaired on



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 48 of 65


the field and will determine exact method for repair and instruct contractor in

making repair.

4. Cold Weather Handling: As the temperature approaches and drops below

freezing, the flexibility and impact resistance of PVC piping is reduced. PVC

casing becomes hard and brittle in cold weather and will crack more readily if

dropped or hit. Therefore, extra care shall be used in handling during cold

weather. Pipe at the bottom of a stack may become out-of-round due to the

weight of material above it. At normal application temperatures, this corrects

itself soon after the load is removed. Under freezing conditions, this recovery

to full initial roundness may take several hours.

5. Storage: Store pipe on a flat surface so as to support the barrel evenly.

Store random lengths separately where they will be readily available.

Individual lengths of pipe shall be stacked in piles no higher than 5 feet. If pipe

is to be stored outside, the pipe shall be covered to protect it from prolonged

exposure to the sun’s rays. Cover with canvas or other opaque material. Do

not use clear plastic sheets. Provide for natural air circulation under the

sheets.

6. Loading Transfer Trucks: Use trucks with long bodies so that pipe lengths

do not overhang. Make certain truck bed is smooth, without cross-strips, bolt

heads, or other protrusions that could damage the pipe. Short body trucks

may be used if fitted with racks that properly support the pipe in a horizontal

position. The rack shall support the pipe with supports spaced every 3 feet or

less along the pipe lengths. Pad the contact areas to avoid damage to the

pipe.

7. Distributing Pipe Along Trench: Pipe lengths may be strung along the line

of the trench so as to minimize additional handling during installation. Do not



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 49 of 65


remove protection materials from the pipe ends until the pipe is lowered into

the tranch and ready for assembly.

8. Excavation: Excavation shall take into account the need for the thrust

blocks at all fittings which are direct buried in the ground. The trench bottom

shall give uniform support along the entire length of any pipelines. Where

several pipelines are located in a common trench, the trench shall be wide

enough to maintain the specified distances between adjacent lines, generally

a minimum of 6” is sufficient. The excavation shall be in a straight line except

where fittings are located.

9. Trenching: Trenching shall follow the elevations provided by the

construction documents and shop drawings. Keep excavations free of water

during construction. If it is necessary to remove unsuitable material to a depth

greater than specified, refill excavations carried below the depths indicated or

directed with specified bedding material and compact in 6 inch lifts to 95

percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D.

Excavate and replace soil distributed and weakened by the Contractor’s

operations or soils permitted to soften from exposure to weather, with bedding

material and compact with a plate-type vibratory compactor. Provide proper

temporary supports and protection for all piping and conduit under which the

PUPS is installed.

10. Trench Widths: The width of the trench at the top of the pipe shall be held

to the minimum required for efficient and proper installation.

11. Placing Pipe in the Trench: The PUPS pipe shall be hand or mechanically

passed into the trench. The latest state and federal safety regulations shall be

understood and observed. If slings are necessary, use only canvas straps, no

cable or chain slings shall be used. If chilled water PUPS has PVC jacketing,



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 50 of 65


provide and install two-inch thick, two-foot wide foam glass insulation board

between heating water service piping and chilled water service piping. Locate

vertically in trench centered on piping with 6” overlap on ends. Seal at overlap

with mastic. Use stainless steel wire at overlaps to hold in place if required.

This is not required if chilled water PUPS has FRP jacketing.

12. Bedding: The pipe shall be bedded in accordance with basic good

practices shall apply to all buried pressure pipelines.

13. Pipe Assembly: Verify that the correct seal ring is used and that it is

correctly inserted.

a. Make certain that the ring groove in the bell is clean, with no dirt or

foreign material that could interfere with proper seating of the ring.

b. Set ring in groove with color marking facing out. Smooth the ring so

that it sets evenly all around and is free from twists. Ring insertion for

1-1/2” and 2” diameter pipe can be made easier by dipping the ring in

clean water before inserting it. Do not use trench water or any lubricant

for this purpose.

c. Make sure pipe is clean. Wipe with a clean dry cloth around the

entire circumference from the end to one inch beyond the reference

mark.

d. Lubricate the spigot end of the pipe, using only manufacturer’s

lubricant supplied. Be sure to cover the entire circumference. The

coating shall be the equivalent of a brush coat of enamel paint. It shall

be applied by hand, cloth, pad, sponge or glove. Do not lubricate the

rubber ring or the ring groove in the bell because such lubrication could

cause ring displacement.

e. Insert the bevel end into the bell so that it is in contact with the ring.

Hold the pipe lengths being joined close to the ground to keep the

lengths in proper alignment. Brace the bell while the bevel end is



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 51 of 65


pushed in under the ring. If undue resistance to insertion is

encountered, disassemble the joint, and check the position of the ring.

If it is twisted or pushed out of its seat, clean the ring, bell and beveled

end, and repeat the assembly steps. If a spigot or bell end has become

deformed due to a load on the pipe while in the stock pile during hot

weather, it will be necessary to exercise more care in assembling the

joint to prevent fishmouthing of the rubber ring.

14. Thrust Blocks: Provide properly sized and placed thrust blocks at all

fittings as shown on approved shop drawings. Thrust blocks shall bear on and

against undisturbed or properly compacted soil. Provide temporary thrust

blocking for testing at piping end points and other points as required.

15. Testing: After concrete thrust blocks are adequately cured, temporary

thrust blocking is in place, and casing pipe is backfilled and compacted (joints

to be left exposed) to prevent movement under pressure, a hydrostatic test

shall be applied. The PUPS may be tested in sections to facilitate installation

but all joints are to be individually tested. A test pressure of 50 psi above

working pressure shall be maintained for a period of 24 hours. Maximum

leakage shall not exceed one-fifth (1/5) gallon per 24 hours per inch of

diameter of each joint. Submit test reports showing date of test, section

tested, and size and leakage of each joint. Joints exceeding maximum

leakage shall be redone and retested until below maximum. The engineer

shall be notified 48 hours prior to the start of each test.

16. Backfilling: Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as

construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits. Uniformly compact and

grade bottom of trenches. After installation of pipe and bedding material,

place backfill as follows: place initial backfill in layers to a depth of 24 inches

over the top of pipe or casing.

Compact the material to a density equivalent to the surrounding undisturbed



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 52 of 65


soil or to 88 percent of maximum density (ASTM D1557, Method D),

whichever is greater. Backfill remainder of trench in one-foot lifts and compact

to 90 percent maximum density (ASTM D1557, Method D). For trenches

excavated in roads, streets, or located under structures or pipes, place backfill

in 6-inch layers to top of trench and compact each layer to at least 95 percent

maximum density (ASTM D1557, Method D). Place colour coded 6” wide

0.004” thickness polyethylene printed plastic identification tape directly above

all underground piping systems approximately 12” below finished grade.

Tapes shall be continuously printed with “CAUTION” in large bold letters.

Printed second line with type of service below. Yellow tape is to be used for

water (print type of water on tape, i.e., chilled water).

17. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be faced true, provided with gaskets,

and made perfectly square and tight. Provide flanges and blind flanges at all

end points.

18. Field connections shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. Manufacturer’s field representative shall supervise the first five

(5) field connections to assure proper work.

3.4 PLASTIC PIPE JOINTS

A. Use cleaning procedure and solvent cement, as recommended by the pipe

and fitting manufacturers for the particular materials being used.

3.5 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE JOINTS

A. After cutting groove in pipe, remove all cutting residue. Apply joint lubricant

to gasket and pipe ends. Install gasket, align pipe ends and gasket, and

secure fitting housing, as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.6 WATER SYSTEMS

A. Pitch horizontal mains up at 1 inch in 40 feet in the direction of flow. Install



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 53 of 65


manual air vents at all high points where air may collect. If vent is not in an

accessible location, extend air vent piping to the nearest code acceptable

drain location with vent valve located at the drain.

B. Main branches and runouts to terminal equipment may be made at the top,

side, or bottom of the main, provided that there are drain valves suitably

located for complete system drainage and manual air vents are located as

described above.

C. Use top connection to main for upfeed risers, and bottom connection to

main for downfeed risers. Connections at a main may be made with a tee and

a 45-degree elbow.

D. Use a minimum of two elbows in each pipe line to a piece of terminal

equipment to provide flexibility for expansion and contraction of the piping

system.

E. Use eccentric fittings for changes in horizontal pipe sizes with the fittings

installed for proper air venting. Concentric fittings may be used for changes in

vertical pipe sizes.

F. When other specification sections or piping details do not require a strainer

upstream of each control valve, install bottom connections to a main with a

capped dirt leg.

G. Where copper piping is allowed for heating hot water or for solar hot water

systems, secure all joints and fittings with 95-5 tin-antimony solder or brazing

alloys.

3.7 VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES

A. Install vent line and relief valve discharge lines as indicated on the

drawings, as detailed, and as specified for each specific valve or piping

specialty item.

3.8 COOLING COIL CONDENSATE

A. Trap each cooling coil drain pan connection with a trap seal of sufficient

depth to prevent conditioned air from moving through the piping or



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 54 of 65


condensate build-up in the drain pan.

Extend drain piping to nearest code approved drain location. Construct trap

with a plugged tee for cleanout purposes as detailed.

B. At every change in direction provide a plug type cleanout.

C. Where copper piping is allowed, joints and fittings shall be secured with 50-

50 tin-antimony solder, 95-5 tin-antimony solder, or brazing alloys.

3.9 UNDERGROUND PIPE WRAP

A. Remove all dirt and other foreign material from exterior of pipe. Apply

primer as recommended by the manufacturer. Use a spiral wrap process for

applying tape to the pipe. Repair any breaks in the tape coating caused by the

installation process.


A. Install insulating or dielectric unions or flanges at each point in any system

where a copper to steel pipe connection is required in the following systems.

1. Cold Water or Non-Potable Make-Up Water Lines

2. Hot Water System.

3. Chilled Water System.

B. Dielectric Unions shall not be used at terminal heating/cooling

devices.

3.11 UNION AND FLANGES

A. Install a union or flange, as required, at each automatic control valve and at

each piping specialty or piece of equipment which may require removal for

maintenance, repair or replacement. Where a valve is located at a piece of

equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment side of the

valve. Concealed unions or flanges are not acceptable.

3.12 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS

A. Use pipe factory grooved in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 55 of 65


specifications or field grooved pipe in accordance with the same specifications

using specially designed tools available for the application.

B. Lubricate pipe and coupling gasket, align pipe and secure joint in

accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications.

C. Support pipe as indicated in the Mechanical Supporting Devices Section of

these specifications using specially designed tools available for the

application.

D. Lubricate pipe and coupling gasket, align pipe and secure joint in

accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications.

E. Support pipe as indicated in the Mechanical Supporting Devices Section of

these specifications except as modified below. Support each horizontal pipe

section at least once between couplings and whenever a change in direction

of line flow takes place.

Support vertical pipe at every other floor or every other pipe length, whichever

is most frequent. Set the base of the riser or the base fitting, on a pedestal or

foundation.

F. Follow coupling manufacturer's installation recommendations if they are

more stringent than the above requirements.

3.13 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refrigerant piping system shall be installed to meet the requirements of the

latest

ASHRAE and ARI Practices.

B. All solder joints shall be ASTM Grade 4 or 5 and have a melting point of

approximately 1250-degrees-F. Solder impurities shall not exceed 0.15%. All

tubing shall be new and shall be delivered to the job site with the original mill

end caps in place. All joints shall be cleaned and polished before soldering.

Avoid prolonged heating and burning during soldering. Purge all lines with

nitrogen during soldering. Provide manual shut-off and check valves, as



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 56 of 65


required.

C. Leak test the system by charging the system to a pressure of 10 psig with

the same type of refrigerant that will be used in the system.

D. All refrigerant shall be charged into the system through a Sporlan catch-all

filter-drier. Finally increase pressure to 300 psig with oil pumped dry nitrogen.

Rap all joints with a rubber or rawhide mallet and check for leaks with an

electric leak detector having a certified sensitivity of at least one ounce per

year. Seal any leaks that may be found and retest.

E. After completion of the leak test, evacuate the system with a vacuum pump

to 2.5 mm Hg. absolute as measured on an accurate gauge.

F. System ambient temperature shall be above 60-degrees-F during

evacuation, charge refrigerant into the system to 0 psig, then repeat

evacuation to 2.5 mm Hg. absolute. Allow system to stand evacuated for at

least 12 hours. If no noticeable rise in pressure occurs, the system may be

charged.

G. Charge system with new refrigerant through charging valve and filter-drier.

Charging shall continue until bubbles disappear from liquid line sight glass

while compressor is in operation.

H. Refrigeration piping shall be installed by firms who are experienced in the

installation of such piping.

3.14 PIPING SYSTEM LEAK TESTS

A. Conduct pressure test with test medium of air or water unless specifically

indicated. If leaks are found, repair the area with new materials and repeat the

test; caulking will not be acceptable.

B. No systems to be insulated until it has been successfully tested. If required

for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at

expansion joints or isolate them during the test. Minimum test time shall be

four (4) hours plus such additional times as may be necessary to conduct the



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 57 of 65


examination for leakage.

C. For hydrostatic tests, use clean water, and remove all air from piping being

tested by means of air vents or loosening of flanges. Measure and record test

pressure at the high point in the system.

D. For air tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one-half of

the test pressure. Then, increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-

tenth of the test pressure, until the required test pressure is reached. Examine

all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution, or equivalent method.

The piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve

packing, shall show no evidence of leaking.

E. Measure natural gas system test pressure with a water manometer, or an

equivalent device calibrated in increments not greater than 0.1-inch water

column. System will not be approved until it can be demonstrated that there is

no measurable loss of test pressure during the test period.

F. Conduct fuel oil system test so as not to impose a pressure of more than

10 psig on the tank. Instead of a pressure test, suction lines may be tested

under a vacuum of not less than 20 inches of mercury maintained for at least

one hour. System Test Pressure Remarks Chilled water 100 psig -

3.15 PIPE CLEANING

A. Refer to Specification 1-500-600, Article 3.20 “CLEANING”, for pipe

cleaning requirements.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 58 of 65


SPECIFICATION: 5-520 - VALVES




Supplementary Requirements and Division-1 Specification sestions, apply to


1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Refer to Specification 5-530 - Piping

Specialties.

B. Temperature Control Valves: Refer to Specification 5-900 - Control

Systems.



B. All valves must comply with MSS (Manufacturers' Standardization Society)

SP's

(Standard Practices).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for all valves including all data concerning dimensions,

materials of construction and ratings.

B. Mark product data clearly for each system and note with the correct cross-

reference number.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 59 of 65


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS




included herein.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. For gate valves, globe valves, check valves and drain valves, Powell,

Crane, Nibco,

Jenkins, Hammond, Stockham, Red-White Valve Corp., Lunkenheimer,

Milwaukee, Kitz, equal to the manufacturer's Figure No. listed. Valves shall be

of same make for all these services.

B. For other valves, acceptable manufacturers and Fig. No. are listed under

each item.

C. Pre-manufactured valve system for 2” and smaller piping consisting of

shutoff valves, P/T ports, strainers, drains and flow measuring valves as

manufactured by Flow Design, Inc., or Griswold may be utilized in lieu of

individually specified components.

2.3 WATER SYSTEMS VALVES

A. Gate Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - bronze, screwed, solid wedge, rising stem,

Union bonnet, malleable iron hand wheel, 150 psi W.P. steam, Nibco

Fig. T-134.

2. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - iron body, bronze mounted O.S. & Y.,

solid wedge, flanged, 125 psi W.P. steam, Nibco Fig. F-617-0.

B. Globe Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - bronze body, screwed pattern, renewable

composition disc, Union or screw-over bonnet, malleable iron hand

wheel, 150 psi W.P. steam, Nibco Fig. T-235.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 60 of 65


2. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - iron body, bronze mounted O.S. & Y.,

flanged, renewable bronze seat and disc, 125 psi W.P. steam, Nibco

Fig. F-718.

C. Swing Check Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - bronze, regrinding, screwed, 40 to 50

degrees seating angle, renewable disc, 150 psi W.P. steam, Nibco Fig.

T-433.

2. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - iron body, brass trim or bronze mounted,

renewable seat and disc, 125 psi W.P. steam, Nibco Fig. F-918.

D. Spring Loaded Check Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - bronze, screwed, 125 psi W.P. steam, Nibco

Fig. T-480, Mueller Fig. 203-BP or Metraflex No. 900.

2. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - iron body, wafer type, bronze trim,

stainless steel spring, Buna-N seat, Class 125, Nibco Fig. W-960,

Mueller Fig. 101-AP Metraflex No. 900, Mueller Sure Check Model No.

71, or Mission Duo-check 11 12 HMP.

E. Spring Loaded Check Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - bronze, screwed, Mueller Steam Fig. 203-

BP, 300 psi WOG.

2. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - iron or carbon steel body, wafer type,

bronze trim, stainless steel spring, 250 psi W.P. steam, Mueller Steam

Fig. 103-AP, Mueller Sure Check No. 74, or Mission Due-check 11 25

HMP.

F. Balancing Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - Use calibrated balancing valves as specified

in Specification 5-530 under Flow Sensors and Meters.

2. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - Use butterfly valves as specified in this

Section together with flow sensors as specified in Specification 5-530

under Flow Sensors and Meters.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 61 of 65


G. Eccentric Plug Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - semi-steel body, screwed, bronze bearings,

bronze or electroless nickel plated semi-steel plugs, adjustable

memory stop, isobutene-isoprene resilient seat, 175 psi W.O.G. non-

shock. DeZurik Fig. 499.

2. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - Iron body, flanged, stainless steel

bearings, resilient faced plugs, adjustable memory stop, isobutene-

isoprene resilient seat, 175 psi W.O.G. non- shock DeZurik Fig. 118.

3. Provide at least three (3) handles for each valve size through 2".

Provide all valves over 2" with permanent handles. Provide all valves

4" and larger with worm gear operator.

H. Butterfly Valves:

1. Valves 2-1/2" and Larger - iron body, stainless steel shaft, bronze,

aluminum-bronze with welded nickel edge disc, bronze bearings,

bubble tight, resilient seat, adjustable memory stop, 175 psi W.O.G.

non-shock and 250- degrees-F., with lever actuator.

2. Valve necks to be of sufficient length to allow insulation where

specified.

3. Valves used for equipment isolation shall be threaded lug type with a

bidirectional dead end service rating of 175 psi, permitting removal of

down stream piping without removing valve. Provide all valves 4" and

larger with worm gear operators.

4. DeZurik Fig. 632.

5. Nibco Fig. LD-2000 and Stockham are acceptable.

I. Butterfly Valves (High Pressure Application):

1. Valve bodies shall be of carbon steel or cast 316 stainless steel

construction, ANSI Class 150 design.

2. Valves shall be lug body type and shall provide bubble-tight shut off



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 62 of 65


with pressures in either direction to 285 psi.

3. Furnish all valves with upper and lower body bearings and with

thrust bearings to assure disc centering in the seat. Furnish valves with

adjustable v-ring packing of PTFE and an adjustable gland. The one

piece shaft shall be high strength Condition "B" type 316 stainless

steel, and shall be centerless ground and polished to minimize bearing

and packing wear.

4. Valve seats shall be of PTFE capable of service in temperature

ranges of -100 degrees to 300 degrees F.

5. Discs shall be cast 316 stainless steel with concave face to reduce

dynamic torque and decrease turbulence.

6. Furnish valves with totally enclosed, factory lubed, handwheel rotary

actuator with external disc position indication.

7. DeZurik Type HP Fig. 642, Crane Monarch 23 FRB, Xomox

Pilaxseal, Jamesbury, or Posi-Seal High Performance Trunion.

J. Ball Valves:

1. Valves 3/4" and Smaller - bronze body, screwed, brass or stainless

steel ball, full port, teflon seat rings, blowout-proof stem, 150 psi W.P.

steam, Nibco Fig. 585- 70, Apollo No. 77. Provide 3-piece body when

used for sweat connections.

2. Valves 1" through 2" - bronze body, screwed, brass or stainless steel

ball, full port, teflon seat rings, blowout-proof stem, 125 psi W.P. steam,

Nibco Fig. T-580- 70, Apollo No. 70, Stockham S-216. Provide 3-piece

body when used for sweat connections.

3. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be bronze body, screwed, stainless

steel ball, full port, teflon seat rings, blowout-proof stem, three-piece

construction, 150 psi W.P. steam, Nibco T590-Y, Apollo No. 82-100,

Watts B-6800.

4. In lieu of providing ball valves, the following valves may be used.



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 63 of 65


Milwaukee Butterball, bronze body, type 302 stainless steel disc, Viton

seal, 175 psi W.O.G. rated, operating temperature to 350 degrees F,

screwed, series BB-1.

K. Drain Valves:

1. Bronze, screwed, Buna-N seat discs, hose thread adapter, 125 psi

W.O.G. non-shock, Nibco Fig. 74, or ball valve as specified above with

hose thread adapter.

2. Minimum drain valve size - 3/4" except where strainer blowdown

valves are indicated, drain valve same as blowdown connection size.

L. Drain Valves:

1. Use ball valve as specified above. Provide hose thread adapter for

each drain valve. Use 3/4" minimum drain valve size except where

strainer blowdown valves are indicated, drain valve shall be blowdown

connection size.

2.4 GAS SYSTEM VALVES

A. Shut-off Valves:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - cast iron body, screwed, bronze bearings,

bronze plug,

with Hycar resilient plug seal, Buna stem seal packing, lever actuated,

175 psi

W.O.G. non-shock, U.L. listed, DeZurik Fig. 425.

2. Valves 2-1/2" through 4" - cast iron body, flanged, bronze bearings,

electroless

nickel plated cast iron plug, with Hycar resilient plug seal, Buna stem

seal

packing, lever actuator, 175 psi W.O.G. non-shock, U.L. listed, DeZurik

Fig. 425.

3. Valves 5" and Larger - cast iron body, flanged, stainless steel

bearings, resilient faced plugs, totally enclosed handwheel actuators,



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 64 of 65


175 psi W.O.G. non-shock, DeZurik Fig. 118.

B. Gas Pressure Regulators:

1. Valves 2" and Smaller - Cast iron body, aluminum spring and

diaphragm, Nitrile diaphragm, screwed 150 psig, -20 degree F to 150

degree F, Fisher Type S10, S200, or S300.

2. Valves shall be Fisher, Rockwell, or American meeting capacity and

performance as scheduled.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 VALVES IN GENERAL

A. Install valves as shown on plans, details, and according to the valve

manufacturer's installation recommendations.

B. Provide valve boxes or manholes for all valves installed underground.

C. Install all temperature control valves furnished under 5-900 - Control

Systems.

D. Install chain operators for shut-off valves, 4" and larger, located more than

8'-0" above equipment room floor.

E. Provide chained caps at all vent and drain manual valves. Caps are not

required when vent or drain is piped to drain.

3.2 SHUT-OFF VALVES

A. Install shut-off valves at all equipment, at each branch take-off from mains,

and at each automatic valve for servicing.

3.3 BALANCING VALVES

A. Provide balancing valves for complete balancing of water systems.

3.4 DRAIN VALVES

A. Provide drain valves where specified, detailed and at all low points of



21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 65 of 65


piping systems for complete drainage of the systems.

3.5 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. Provide a spring loaded check valve in each pump discharge line.

3.6 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Provide swing check valves where specified, detailed and at steam

condensate lines if lifted at outlet of traps and before gate valves.

3.7 VALVES FOR FUTURE CONNECTION

A. Where valves are installed for a future connection, do not install blind

flange, welded/screwed cap to the valve body. Provide minimum 12” spool

piece between valve and capped connection. At the time of turn over to

Owner, ensure valve is in the open position.

- END OF SECTION -

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(ELECTRICAL)

DOCUMENT NO: 1207-EL-6-000


A 21-SEP-2016 ISSUE FOR TENDER GM TOS

Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL

Document No 1207-EL-6-000

21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 2 of 95


Disclaimer This specification has been prepared on behalf of and for the exclusive and confidential use of our Client, and is subject to and issued in accordance with the agreement between The Client and Moulton Mayers Architects. The opinions, determinations, evaluations, recommendations, appraisals, and advice delivered or given by SYLENG in this specification represent only its informed professional judgment, consistent with professional industry standards, based on data and information reasonably available to it or obtained from The Client Consequently, SYLENG shall not be liable for any cost, expense, loss or damage sustained by The Client as a result of the manner in which such services were in good faith performed by SYLENG, or as a result of the failure of SYLENG in good faith to perform any service, or as result of the reliance by The Client or any other party on any determination, recommendation or projection made or advice given by SYLENG, except to the extent SYLENG is guilty of gross negligence or willful misconduct. Copying this specification without the permission of The Client or SYLENG is not permitted.

REV DESCRIPTION ORIG REVIEW SYLENG

APPROVAL DATE CLIENT

APPROVAL DATE

A

ISSUE FOR TENDER

____________

_____________

_____________

21-SEP-16

___________

_________



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 3 of 95


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATION: 6-020 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 4

SPECIFICATION: 6-111 CONDUIT 10

SPECIFICATION: 6-115 - CONDUIT FITTINGS 17

SPECIFICATION: 6-120 - WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS (600 VOLTS AND LESS) 21

SPECIFICATION: 6-130 - BOXES 27

SPECIFICATION: 6-140 - WIRING DEVICES 34

SPECIFICATION: 6-160 - PANELBOARDS 46

SPECIFICATION: 6-190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES 52

SPECIFICATION: 6-402 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE 59

SPECIFICATION: 6-405 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT 64

SPECIFICATION: 6-450 - GROUNDING 69

SPECIFICATION :6-471 - FEEDER CIRCUITS 74

SPECIFICATION: 6-472 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 77

SPECIFICATION: 6-500 - LIGHTING FIXTURES 81



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 4 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-020 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements, and Architects’ Specifications, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 2. UL Standard 969.

1.2.2 Reference Standards:

1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 2. NEMA Standards Publication / No. WC-1 and WC-2.

1.2.3 National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

1. NECA - Standard of Installation.

1.2.4 ANSI Compliance

1. ANSI Standard A13.1.

1.2.5 Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA)

1. OSHA 1910:145



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 5 of 95


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.1.1 The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic

approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included here.

2.1.2 Provide electrical identification products of one of the following (for each type

marker): 1. Brady, W.H. Company 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. National Band and Tag Company. 4. Panduit Corporation.

2.1.3 Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of

categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application.

2.2 CABLE/CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION BANDS 2.2.1 Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor

markers of wrap-around type; either pre- numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identification.

2.3 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS

2.3.1 Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate with white core plies (letter

colour), in sizes and thickness indicated. Engrave laminate with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, and punch for mechanical fastening.

2.3.2 Thickness:



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 6 of 95


1. 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 square inches or 8 inch length; 1/8 inch for larger units.

2.3.3 Fasteners:

1. Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact type permanent

commercial grade adhesive providing a permanent bond shall be used where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.

2. Two-sided tape and dynamo type adhesives are not acceptable.

2.4 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

2.4.1 Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical

identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC. 3.1.2 Coordination:

1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish,

install identification after completion of painting. 3.1.3 Regulations:

1. Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing

authorities for identification of electrical work.

3.2 UNDERGROUND CABLE IDENTIFICATION



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 7 of 95


3.2.1 During back filling/top soiling of each exterior underground electrical conduit, install a continuous underground type plastic line marker, located directly over buried conduit at 6 inches to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple small conduits are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, install a single line marker.

3.3 CABLE/CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION

3.3.1 Apply cable/conductor identification, at origin and terminus. Match

identification with marking system used in panel boards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project's electrical work.

3.3.2 At each junction box, the covers on junction boxes and pull boxes in areas

that are not to be painted shall be marked with "Indelible Markers" to indicate the circuit number(s) of conductors in the box. In areas where exposed conduit and junction boxes are to be painted, indicate circuit number(s) of conductors in the box on the inside cover of the box.

3.4 OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS 3.4.1 Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and

maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install plastic signs on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers on electrical enclosures.

3.5 DANGER SIGNS 3.5.1 In addition to installation of danger signs required by governing regulations

and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as constituting similar dangers for persons in or about project.

3.6 EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 3.6.1 Install engraved plastic laminate sign on each major unit of electrical

equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/ control/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 8 of 95


indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2 inch high lettering on 1-1/2 inch high sign (2 inch high where 2 lines are required). Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings.

3.6.2 Engraved laminate signs shall have white lettering in a black field. 3.6.3 Where the electrical system is comprised of normal power and emergency

power, the equipment connected to the normal power system shall have engraved laminate signs with white lettering in a black field. Equipment connected to the emergency power system shall have engraved laminate signs with white lettering in a yellow field.

3.6.4 Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:

1. Panel boards, electrical power and signal system cabinets and

enclosures located inside of cover or door in finished areas and outside of cover or door in equipment rooms.

2. Panel board identification shall indicate panel board designation,

voltage and where fed from, i.e., "PANEL 1/A - 277/480V, 3 PHASE, 4W. FED FROM XXXXX”

3. Major electrical switchgear. 4. Motor control centers. 5. Motor starters. 6. Power transfer equipment. 7. Transformers. 8. Disconnect switches. 9. Junction boxes - 6" x 6" and larger for electrical power and all special

systems, i.e., fire alarm, sound, etc. 3.6.5 Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at

location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners.

3.6.6 All junction boxes for the Emergency System and Fire Alarm System shall be

painted as follows: 1. Emergency System - Yellow



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 9 of 95


2. Fire Alarm System - Red

3.6.7 Each feeder disconnect switch or circuit breaker in switchboards, power panel

boards, or motor control centers shall be identified with a laminated plastic nameplate. Inscriptions shall indicate the device served i.e. "Panel LI", "HVAC Unit #1", etc.

3.6.8 Panel boards located in storage rooms shall have floor space per NEC-110

permanently marked and shall be identified as "Electrical Access - Not For Storage."

3.7 COVER PLATES 3.7.1 All wiring device cover plates shall have panel name and circuit number

serving device clearly marked on the back of each faceplate with indelible marker.

3.8 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES 3.8.1 Install in each panel board a typewritten directory accurately indicating rooms

and equipment being served. Verify actual room names and numbers to be used. Also, provide a copy of typewritten panel board directories in Owner’s close-out manuals.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 10 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-111 CONDUIT

PART 1 -GENERAL


1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Electrical Supplemental Requirements, and Architects’ Specifications, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1 Specification 6-020 - Electrical Identification 1.2.2 Specification 6-115 - Conduit Fittings 1.2.3 Specification 6-120 - Wires, Cables, and Connectors 1.2.4 Specification 6-190 - Supporting Devices 1.2.5 Specification 6-405 - Underground Electrical Conduit 1.2.6 Specification 6-450 – Grounding PART 2 -PRODUCTS


2.1.1 The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic

approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included here

2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

2.2.1 Provide rigid steel, hot-dip galvanized, threaded type conforming to ANSI

C80.1 and UL 6. Provide coating to inside and outside walls and threads.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 11 of 95


2.2.2 Manufactured Lengths. 2.2.3 Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2 inch except for conduit homeruns to panel

boards; minimum size shall be 3/4 inch.

2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

2.3.1 FS WW-C-563, ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 2.3.2 Standard Lengths. 2.3.3 Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch except for switch legs and control

circuits which may be ½ inch.

2.4 ELECTRICAL PLASTIC CONDUIT (PVC)

2.4.1 ANSI C33-91, schedule 40, 90C, UL-rated construction of polyvinyl chloride

and conforming to NEMA TC-2, for direct burial, UL-listed and in conformity with NEC Article 347.

2.4.2 Standard Lengths. 2.4.3 Minimum size shall be 3/4 inch.

2.5 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

2.5.1 Provide UL Listed liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: construct of single strip,

flexible continuous, interlocked and double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside; coated with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

2.5.2 Minimum size 1/2 inch.

2.6 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT 2.6.1 UL-1 formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked hot-dip

galvanized steel. 2.6.2 Minimum size 1/2 inch, except flexible connections to lighting fixtures may be

3/8 inch not to exceed 6 feet in length.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 12 of 95


2.7 LIQUID-TIGHT NON-METALLIC FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 2.7.1 Smooth black PVC, non-metallic type ‘B’ liquid tight conduit. Equal to Thomas

& Betts “XTRAFLEX” LTC series conduit. 2.7.2 Minimum size 1/2 inch. PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

3.1.1 Install conduit and tubing products in accordance with NEC, manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized NECA practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

3.1.2 Complete conduit installation prior to installing conductors. 3.1.3 All conduits installed in poured concrete construction shall be PVC conduit. 3.1.4 PVC conduit shall be used when conduit is run below slabs on grade or run in

earth, unless otherwise noted on drawings. Where PVC conduit is run below floor slabs and conduit is stubbed above slab, EMT or galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be provided for conduit above floor slab. PVC conduit shall be provided where conduit is run in concrete and/or block walls.

3.1.5 Use galvanized rigid steel conduit when conduit is exposed to the exterior. 3.1.6 EMT shall be used for branch circuit wiring and feeders only in trade size

through 4 inch, where it can be concealed in hollow spaces of walls, above suspended ceilings, or exposed on interior ceilings in non-hazardous, non-corrosive, dry areas. EMT conduit shall not be installed in contact with grade or in concrete slabs/walls.

3.1.7 Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets,

junction, or pull boxes, and shall enter and be secured to boxes in such a manner that each system shall be electrically continuous from point of service to outlets.

3.1.8 Cut joints shall be square, reamed smooth, and drawn up tight. 3.1.9 Install conduit with adequate drainage.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 13 of 95


3.1.10 Keep conduits plugged, clean, and dry during construction. 3.1.11 Install a polypropylene pull cord in empty conduit. 3.1.12 Cap spare conduit. 3.1.13 Provide watertight conduit system where installed exposed outdoors or in

wash down area.

3.2 PROCEDURES AND PRACTICES 3.2.1 Conceal conduit except in mechanical and utility areas and where noted

exposed. 3.1.2 Conduit run concealed above suspended ceilings shall be routed parallel or

perpendicular (at right angles to construction using as long as possible bends) and shall be grouped.

3.1.3 Run exposed conduit parallel to or at right angles with lines of building. 3.1.4 Coordinate routing (location) of conduit with HVAC ducts, plumbing piping,

and sprinkler piping. 3.1.5 Make bends and offsets without kinking or destroying smooth bore of conduit. 3.1.6 Negotiate beams and changes in ceiling heights with LB conduit fittings on

outside corners and ells on inside corners. Arrange bends and offsets in parallel conduit to present a neat symmetrical appearance.

3.1.7 Route conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings so as not to interfere

with tile panel removals. Conduit shall be supported independently and not part of the ceiling support system.

3.1.8 Where conduit penetrates rated walls; conduit shall be routed perpendicular

(90 degrees) to wall. No angle penetrations will be allowed. Provide proper sleeves and fire safing and sealants. See Specification 16190.

3.1.9 Install 4 to 6-foot flexible steel conduit drops from an independent junction box

mounted above ceiling and accessible from below ceiling to recessed ceiling mounted equipment. Allow for positioning of equipment to tile increments.

3.1.8 Flexible conduit shall not be run from device to device or light fixture to light

fixture. 3.1.9 Secure conduit in place with corrosion-proof alloy straps at spacing as



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 14 of 95


required by NEC. Conduit shall be secured to building structure. 3.1.11 Do not use perforated strapping or tie wire to support conduit. 3.1.12 Contractor shall be responsible for necessary chases in masonry walls,

required to assure conduit will be concealed beneath finished surfaces. 3.1.13 Run conduit within concrete structures parallel to each other and spaced on

center of at least three times conduit trade diameter with minimum 2 inch concrete covering. Conduit over 1 inch may not be installed in slab without approval of the Architect. Conduit embedded in a structural frame slab shall comply with applicable provisions of American Concrete Institute (ACI), Standard 318.

3.1.14 Conduit runs that extend through areas of different temperature or

atmospheric conditions or that are partly indoors and partly outdoors shall be sealed, drained, and installed in a manner that will prevent drainage of condensed or entrapped moisture into cabinets, motors, or equipment enclosures.

3.1.15 Install conduit expansion fittings for conduit crossing expansion joints. 3.1.16 Connections to Motors and Equipment Subject to Vibration:

1. Flexible steel conduit not over 3 feet long where concealed in cabinet, or where exposed in mechanical and utility areas and not subjected to moisture, dirt, and fumes.

2. Liquid-tight flexible conduit not over 3 feet long where exposed in

finished areas or where subject to moisture, dirt, fumes, oil, corrosive atmosphere, exposed or concealed, with connectors to assure a liquid-tight, permanently grounded connection. Locate so it is least subject to physical abuse.

3.1.17 Use double locknuts and insulated bushings with threads fully engaged for

galvanized rigid steel conduit. 3.1.18 Install bushings with ground lugs and integral plastic linings at equipment with

open-bottom conduit entrances. 3.1.19 In pre-cast areas, run conduit in insulation space or in floor topping without

crossing conduit, using 3/4 inch maximum conduit size. 3.1.20 Provide vacant conduit to future panel board and equipment locations and for

future building extensions as indicated on drawings.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 15 of 95


3.1.21 Each feeder conduit, including spares, shall have a plain tag permanently

attached at each end and at intermediate pull boxes. Conduit number, as determined by Contractor's conduit layout, shall be stamped and tag.

3.3 HAZARDOUS AREAS

3.3.1 All conduit to fuel dispensing equipment and tanks shall be black mastic

coated galvanized rigid steel. 3.3.2 Conduit seals shall be installed in each conduit entering or leaving a fuel

dispenser or passing through a hazardous area.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

3.4.1 Provisions for openings, holes, and clearances through walls, floors, ceilings,

and partitions shall be made in advance of construction. 3.4.2 Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching necessary for

electrical work and cutting and patching shall be done subject to the approval of the Architect.

3.4.3 Core drill through reinforced concrete only with approval of Engineer. 3.4.4 Install steel pipe sleeves, 1 inch larger in diameter than conduit, through

concrete or masonry construction.

3.5 RESTRICTIONS

3.5.1 Split, crushed, or scarred conduit not acceptable. 3.5.2 Do not weld conduit. 3.5.3 Install horizontal conduit runs above hot water pipes, flues, high temperature

piping or ducts with 12 inch clearance. 3.5.4 Do not route over boiler, incinerator, or other high temperature equipment. 3.5.5 Do not use aluminum conduit. 3.5.6 Conduit shall not be mounted on ductwork or other mechanical equipment

except where necessary to make connections to electrical devices which are



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 16 of 95


part of or mounted on such equipment. Where conduit must be installed on equipment, do not cover access doors, controls, removable panels, etc. or otherwise hinder normal maintenance and repair of the equipment.

3.6 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING 3.6.1 Pull cleaning plug through conduit to clear of dirt, oil, and moisture.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 17 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-115 - CONDUIT FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements and Architects’ Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.


1.2.1 Specification 6-111 - Conduit

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1.3.1 Submit manufacturer’s product data for all items listed below. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 GENERAL 2.2.1 Use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for purpose of

establishing standard of quality and configuration desired.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 18 of 95


2.3 CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS 2.3.1 Rigid Metal Conduit:

1. Cast malleable iron, galvanized, conforming to ANSI C80.4. 2. Threaded. 3. Liquid tight. 4. Insulated throat.

2.3.2 EMT:

1. ANSI C80.4, steel fittings. 2. Insulated throat. 3. Gland compression type or set screw type. 4. Rain and concrete tight. 5. Diecast fittings are not acceptable.

2.3.3 Flexible Steel Conduit:

1. Provide squeeze type, malleable iron zinc plated conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of threadless hinge type.

2. Threaded. 3. Grounding type. 4. Insulated throat.

2.3.4 Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit:

1. Provide zinc plated malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings.

2. Liquid tight.

2.3.5 PVC:

1. Schedule 40 to match conduit, as noted on drawings or as required by NEC.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 19 of 95


2.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS 2.4.1 Expansion fittings: Copper bonding jumper, Crouse-Hinds Type XJ or

equivalent by O.Z. 2.4.2 Expansion/deflection fittings: Copper bonding jumper, Crouse-Hinds Type XD

or equivalent by O.Z.

2.5 CONDUIT BODIES 2.5.1 Galvanized or cadmium plated. 2.5.2 Threaded hubs. 2.5.3 Removable cover. 2.5.4 Corrosion-resistant screws.

2.6 SEALS

2.6.1 Wall entrance seals, O-Z/Gedney Type FSK, WSK or FSC.

2.7 DRAIN FITTINGS

2.7.1 Conduit outlet body, Type "T". 2.7.2 Threaded, galvanized plug with 3/16 inch drilled hole through plug.

2.8 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

2.8.1 Grounding bushings shall be equal to O.Z. type BLG.

2.9 EXPLOSION PROOF FITTINGS



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 20 of 95


2.9.1 Hot dip galvanized malleable iron equal to O.Z. type EY or EYA. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Install electrical fittings as indicated, in compliance with NEC requirements, in

accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that fittings serve intended purposes.

3.1.2 Rigidly secure connectors at cabinets and boxes with galvanized lock nut and

bushing. 3.1.3 Install conduit expansion fittings complete with bonding jumper in following

locations: 1. Conduit runs which cross a structural expansion joint. 2. Conduit runs attached to two separate structures. 3. Conduit runs where movement perpendicular to axis of conduit may be

encountered. 3.1.4 Locate conduit bodies so as to assure accessibility of electrical wiring. 3.1.5 Install automatic drain fittings at low points and at vertical seals in accordance

with NEC. 3.1.6 Install condensate drain below field instruments at junction of flexible and rigid

conduits. 3.1.7 Install fittings designed for use with flexible liquid-tight conduit to ensure

continuity of ground throughout the fittings and conduit and prevent entrance of moisture.

3.1.8 Install wall entrance seals on all conduit penetrating walls below grade. 3.1.9 Install explosion proof fittings on each conduit entering or leaving a fuel

dispenser or storage tank or passing into or through a hazardous area.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 21 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-120 - WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS (600 VOLTS

AND LESS)

PART 1 - GENERAL



Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Electrical Supplemental Requirements, and Architects’ Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.


1.2.1 Specification 6-020 - Electrical Identification 1.2.2 Specification 6-111 – Conduit 1.2.3 Specification 6-140 - Wiring Devices 1.2.4 Specification 6-450 - Grounding 1.2.5 Specification 6-471 - Feeder Circuits 1.2.6 Specification 6-472 - Branch Circuits


1. IEEE Compliance a. IEEE Standards 82 and 241.

2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

a. UL Standards 62, 83, and 486A. 1.3.2 Reference Standards:

1. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA): a. NECA - Standard of Installation.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 22 of 95


2. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): a. WC-5 and WC-30

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1.3 Wire and Cable:

1. Rome Cable Corporation 2. Southwire Company 3. Okonite 4. Cablec 5. Triangle 6. American Insulated Wire 7. AFC Cable Systems– Type MCTUFF®.

2.1.4 Connectors:

1. AMP, Inc. 2. Burndy Corporation 3. Square D Company 4. Thomas and Betts Company

2.1.5 Electrical Shielding Tape:

1. 3M Scotch Brand.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 23 of 95


2. Plymouth. 3. Or equal.

2.2 WIRE AND CABLE 2.2.1 All conductor and conduit sizes are based on the use of copper conductors.

All conductors shall be copper. 2.2.2 Insulation shall be 600 V (ASTM Standard Compounds), unless otherwise

noted, and colour code conductors for low voltage (secondary feeders and branch circuits) as required by code.

2.2.3 Type THHN/THWN, single conductor, size as indicated on drawings.

2.3 JOINTS, TAPS, AND SPLICES

2.3.1 Provide UL-type, factory-fabricated, metal connector taps or splices of sizes,

ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. Select from the following, those types, classes, kinds and styles to fulfill project requirements:

1. Type: Compression 2. Type: Mechanical 3. Class: Insulated 4. Kind: Copper (for Cu to Cu connection) 5. Style: Butt connection 6. Style: Elbow connection 7. Style: Combined "T" and straight connection 8. Style: "T" connection 9. Style: Split-bolt parallel connection 10. Style: Tap connection



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 24 of 95


11. Style: Pig tail connection 12. Style: Wire nut connection

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable

requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

1. Use solid conductor, single conductor, No. 10 AWG and smaller, No.

12 minimum, for general use wiring. 2. Use stranded conductor, single conductor, No. 8 AWG and larger, for

general use wiring. 3. Use stranded conductor, single conductor, No. 12 and larger, for

motors and other installations where vibration is generated and for wiring to manufactured equipment.

4. Use stranded conductor, single conductor, No. 14 minimum for control

wiring. 5. Flexible Cords and Cables:

a. For connection of special equipment as indicated; maximum

length 180 cm. 3.1.2 Run wire and cable in conduit, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

3.2 JOINTS, TAPS, AND SPLICES

3.2.1 Each tap, joint, or splice in conductors No. 4 AWG and larger shall be taped

with a minimum of two layers of rubber compound tape and three layers of vinyl plastic electrical tape and a finish wrap of colour coding tape, where required by code. Insulation of splice shall match or exceed insulation level of conductors.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 25 of 95


3.2.2 Cable splices shall be made only in distribution and junction boxes. 3.2.3 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening requirements. If not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B.

3.2.4 Splices shall not be made in feeders.

3.3 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

3.3.1 Colour Code Conductor Insulation as follows or as required by local building

codes:

SYSTEM VOLTAGE CONDUCTOR 230V 400Y/230 Phase A Brown Brown Phase B Black Black Phase C --- Blue Neutral Grey Grey Ground* Green Green * Separate isolated ground conductor shall be green with yellow tracer.

3.3.2 For grounded conductors and grounding conductors 25mm or larger,

permanent plastic coloured tape may be used to mark conductor end in lieu of coded insulation. Tape shall cover not less than 50mm of conductor insulation within enclosure.

3.3.3 Install label tags on wire and cable in junction boxes, pull boxes, wire-ways,

and wiring gutters of panels. Tags shall identify wire or cable number and/or equipment served as shown on drawings.

3.4 FIXTURE OUTLETS 3.4.1 Use conductor with insulation suitable for current, voltage, and temperature to

which conductor will be subjected. 3.4.2 2.5mm wire size minimum for conductors supplying power to a single fixture.

600V insulation minimum for circuits and for wiring between ballasts and lamp holders.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 26 of 95


3.4.2 Insulation suitable for operation at 90 degrees C. minimum for lighting fixtures with integral ballast, mogul base sockets, quartz lamps, or otherwise where subject to excessive temperatures.

3.4.3 Fixture wiring shall be continuous wiring system to lamp holder or to ballast

and from ballast to lamp holder.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 27 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-130 - BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Specification 6-111 - Conduit 1.2.2 Specification 6-115 - Conduit Fittings 1.2.3 Specification 6-450 - Grounding


1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:


a. UL Standard Number 50. 514 Series and 886


1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

a. NEMA Standards, Publication No. OS1, OS2 and Publication

250. 2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

a. NECA - "Standard of Installation".



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 28 of 95


PART 2 - PRODUCTS




2.1.2 Interior Outlet Boxes:

1. Appleton Electric Company; Emerson Electric Company 2. Raco Division of Harvey Hubbell 3. Steel City, Midland-Ross Corp. 4. Thomas and Betts Company

2.1.3 Weatherproof Outlet Boxes:

1. Appleton Electric Company; Emerson Electric Company 2. Arrow-Hart Division; Crouse-Hinds Company 3. O. Z./Gedney; General Signal Company 4. Pass and Seymour, Inc.

2.1.4 Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Appleton Electric; Emerson Electric Company 2. Keystone Columbia, Inc. 3. O. Z./Gedney Company; General Signal Company 4. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company

2.1.5 Floor Boxes:

1. Walker Manufacturing



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 29 of 95


2. Pre approved equal

2.2 OUTLET BOXES - FLUSH MOUNTED 2.2.1 Wall Outlet Boxes:

1. Switch boxes, receptacle boxes, and other outlet boxes shall be 4 inch square galvanized pressed steel with plaster rings or gang cover as required.

2.2.2 Concrete Construction Lighting Fixture Outlet Boxes:

1. 4 inch octagonal, galvanized concrete boxes, having a minimum depth

of 3 inch. 2. Contractor to coordinate size of concrete outlet box with approved light

fixture submittal. Some fixtures might require specific box.

2.3 OUTLET BOXES - SURFACE MOUNTED

2.3.1 General Use Outlet Boxes:

1. Single or multiple ganged cadmium plated malleable iron or ferroalloy type FS or FD cast boxes with threaded hubs, or 100mm square pressed steel boxes.

2.3.2 Weatherproof Outlets with While-In-Use cover:

1. All while-in-use weatherproof outlets shall be recessed in wall with cover extending out not more than 12mm from wall. Interior assembly shall consist of a metal box with optional metal extension ring. Outlet shall be UL listed Type 3R and shall meet NEC requirements. a. Approved manufacturers

1) TayMac Multi-Mac Series 2) Intermatic

2.3.3 Special Purpose Outlets:

1. Provide special boxes with fixtures and devices where standard outlets



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 30 of 95


are not applicable.

2.4 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

2.4.1 General Purpose Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Fabricate from code gauge galvanized steel, with covers held in place by corrosion resistant machine screws.

2. Size as required by code for number of conduits and conductors

entering and leaving box. 3. Provide with welded seams, where applicable, and equip with

corrosion-resistant nuts, bolts, screws, and washers.

2.4.2 Weatherproof Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Stainless steel or cadmium plated malleable iron cast type with threaded hubs, cast cover, and neoprene gasket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Install electrical boxes as indicated, in compliance with NEC requirements, in

accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that the boxes serve the intended purposes.

3.1.2 Weatherproof cast boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to

weather or moisture. Seal conduit at entrance to box. 3.1.3 Install knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have

been removed. 3.1.4 Locate boxes so as to assure accessibility of electrical wiring. 3.1.5 Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or

solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. Do not support from conduit.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 31 of 95


3.1.6 Set boxes, in concealed conduit runs, flush with wall surfaces, with or without covers, as required.

3.1.7 Set outlet boxes parallel to construction, securely mounted and adjusted to

set true and flush with the finished surface. 3.1.8 Where more than two switches or devices are located at one point use

ganged boxes and covers, unless devices do not allow for ganging. Contractor to verify suitability of devices for gang mounting. Provide permanently installed barrier (U.L. Listed) between adjacent switches where required per N.E.C. Article 380-8 or Article 700-9.

3.1.9 Do not burn holes, use knock-out punches, or saw. 3.1.10 Use "no-bolt" studs where required. 3.1.11 Use handy boxes only where specifically indicated. 3.1.12 Paint exposed ferrous surfaces with two coats rust resisting paint.

3.2 EXPOSED OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES

3.2.1 Cast boxes up to 1.2M above floor for exposed conduit runs. 3.2.2 Pressed steel boxes acceptable above 1.2M. 3.2.3 Install weatherproof outlet and junction boxes outdoors and in any area where

drawings show weatherproof (WP) wiring devices.

3.3 INTERIOR OUTLET BOX ACCESSORIES 3.3.1 Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, such as

mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations.

3.4 OUTLET BOX LOCATIONS 3.4.1 Location of outlets and equipment as shown on electrical drawings is

approximate, and exact location shall be verified with interior drawings and elevations and shall be determined by:



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 32 of 95


1. Construction or code requirements. 2. Conflict with equipment of other trades. 3. Equipment manufacturer's drawings. 4. Conflict with millwork, tack boards, etc. Contractor shall review

architectural elevations and millwork drawings before roughing-in boxes and conduit. Any conflicts shall be noted and addressed by an RFI. Adjusting box locations due to such conflicts shall be at no additional compensation.

3.4.2 Minor modification in the location of outlets and equipment is considered

incidental up to a distance of 250mm with no additional compensation, providing necessary instructions are given prior to roughing in of outlet.

3.4.3 Mounting heights for devices and equipment to be measured from finished

floor to center line of device and unless otherwise noted on drawings as follows: 1. Switches:

a. 1.2M above floor. 2. AC Receptacles and Telephone Outlets:

a. Refer to interior drawings and elevations. If not noted on interior

drawings then follow directions below. b. Horizontally mounted 250mm above floor or mounted 100mm

above counters and counter backsplashes in finished areas – 1.2M above floor in unfinished areas.

3. Weatherproof receptacles shall be flush mounted vertically, 450mm

above floor or finished grade. 4. Pushbuttons:

a. 1.2M inches above floor. 5. Motor Starters and Disconnect Switches:

a. 1.2M above floor.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 33 of 95


- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 34 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Specification 6-020 – Electrical Identification 1.2.2 Specification 6-130 - Boxes 1.2.3 Specification 6-190 - Supporting Devices


1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. IEEE Compliance:

a. IEEE Standard 241.


a. UL 20, 486A, 498, 508 and 943


1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

a. NEMA Standards Publication / No. WD 1, WD 2, WD 5.

2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

a. NECA - Standard of Installation.

1.3.3 Material and equipment shall be new and conform to grade, quality and



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 35 of 95


standards specified. Equipment or materials of the same type shall be the product of same manufacturer throughout.

1.3.4 The manufacturer’s catalog numbers specified represent the minimum

standards required. If products of alternative manufacturers are selected from the approved manufacturer’s list, they must be equal to or exceed the standards and performance criteria set forth.

1.3.5 All supplied wiring devices shall be by a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Catalog cut sheets of specified devices. 1.4.2 Electrical ratings of submitted devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included here. 1. Leviton 2. Pass and Seymour 3. Lutron

2.2 GENERAL 2.2.1 Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices in type, colour, and electrical rating

for service indicated. 2.2.2 See Symbol Schedule on drawings for identification of device type.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 36 of 95


2.3 DEVICE COLOURS 2.3.1 Devices shall be White in colour.

2.4 GENERAL 2.4.2 Terminal screws shall be back and side wired and accept 2.5mm and 4.0mm

stranded or solid wire. 2.4.2 A full wrap-around bridge strap shall be provided with locking tabs to secure

receptacle face. 2.4.3 Receptacle face shall be impact resistant nylon.

2.5 RECEPTACLES – Heavy Duty 2.5.1 Heavy-Duty, Simplex:

1. Provide single heavy duty type receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, 20 ampere, 125 volts, with NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.

Pass & Seymour Leviton 26361 16351

2.5.2 Heavy-Duty Duplex:

1. Provide heavy duty duplex receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, 20 ampere, 125 volts, with NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.


2.5.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters:

1. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter, with heavy duty duplex receptacles, capable of being installed in a 63.5mm deep outlet box without adapter. Shall be grounding type UL-rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20 amperes, 120 volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground fault



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 37 of 95


sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground fault trip level. Equip with NEMA configuration 5-20R receptacle. a. Test and reset buttons shall match colour of face. b. GFCI receptacles shall meet 2003 UL requirements. c. If critical components within receptacle are damaged and the

ground fault protection is lost, power to receptacle shall be automatically disconnected within the device.

Pass & Seymour Leviton 2094 8899 2.5.4 Duplex Convenience Isolated Ground Receptacles:

1. Provide single heavy duty type receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, 20 ampere, 125 volts, with NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.

a. Device colour shall match non isolated ground receptacles and

have an orange triangle on the device.

Pass & Seymour Leviton IG6300 5362IG

2.6 RECEPTACLES – Light Duty

2.6.1 Duplex:

1. Provide residential grade receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, 15 ampere, 125 volts, with NEMA configuration 5-15R unless otherwise indicated.


2.6.2 Duplex – Half Dimmed:

1. Provide half dimmed receptacle , 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, 15 ampere, 125 volts, with NEMA configuration 5-15R unless otherwise indicated. Receptacle has insert that prevents a standard plug from



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 38 of 95


being inserted into dimmed half of receptacle. 2. Where required, provide matching/mating plug for each device to be

dimmed.

Lutron Receptacle Lutron Plug NTR-15-HFDU RP-FDU-10 2.6.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters:

1. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter, duplex receptacles, capable of being installed in a 2-1/2 inch deep outlet box without adapter. Shall be grounding type UL-rated Class A, Group 1, rated 15 amperes, 120 volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground fault sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground fault trip level. Equip with NEMA configuration 5-15R receptacle.

a. Test and reset buttons shall match colour of face. b. GFCI receptacles shall meet 2003 UL requirements. c. If critical components within receptacle are damaged and the

ground fault protection is lost, power to receptacle shall be automatically disconnected within the device.


2.7 SWITCHES

2.7.1 General:

1. Switches shall be rated for 20 amperes (15 amperes for rooms), 230 volts AC, and shall be manufacturer’s specification grade toggle switch with thermoplastic abuse resistant toggle, quiet action, and heavy duty contact arm.

2. Switches shall have quiet action mechanism with silver alloy contacts

for longevity. 3. Terminal screws shall be back and side wire and accept 2.5, 4.0mm

stranded or solid wire. 4. Switches shall have a back-wire pressure plate ground screw

mechanism accepting 2.5mm stranded or solid wire.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 39 of 95


2.7.2 Single Pole Pass & Seymour Leviton 2621 5621-2

2.7.3 Single Pole – Rooms Pass & Seymour Leviton TM870 5601 2.7.4 Double Pole Single Throw: Pass & Seymour Leviton 2622 5622-2 2.7.5 Three Way: Pass & Seymour Leviton 2623 5623-2 2.7.8 Three Way – Rooms Pass & Seymour Leviton TM873 5603 2.7.9 Four Way: Pass & Seymour Leviton TM874 5604 2.7.10 Key Switch – add suffix ‘KL’ to above part numbers

2.8 DIMMERS - WALL BOX

2.8.1 General

1. Dimmers shall provide full-range, continuously variable control of light intensity.

2. Wall controls shall fit a decorator wall plate opening with a paddle

switch aesthetically compatible to other decorator-style, mechanical switches used in the building. Controls shall have a small and discrete



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 40 of 95


slide, located to the right of the paddle switch. The paddle switch shall act as a preset, turning the control on to the level set by the slider, or off. Controls shall have a gloss finish.

3. When on, the slider shall change the light level/fan speed. When off,

the slider shall pre-select the light level/fan speed that the control will turn on to. Paddle switch shall turn lights/fan on to the pre-selected level, or off.

4. Paddle switch and slider shall be captured internal to the control. 5. 3-Way controls shall be capable of multi-location on and mechanical

air-gap off using standard 3-way and 4-way switches. 6. Dimmer shall not be backlit with soft glow locator light. 7. Within rated capacity, dimmers shall be available for direct control of

incandescent, magnetic low voltage, electronic low voltage, and fluorescent lighting fixtures. Matching fan-speed controls shall also be available.

8. Dimmer shall provide smooth and continuous Square Law dimming

curve, for the full slider travel, on their rated load per The IESNA Lighting Handbook, 9th edition, p. 27-4.

9. Controls shall meet the applicable requirements of UL 20 and UL 1472

referring to the inclusion of a visible, accessible air-gap off switch and the limited short circuit test.

10. Controls shall meet ANSI/IEEE Std. C62.41-1980, tested to withstand voltage surges of up to 6000V and current surges of up to 200A without damage.

11. Dimmers shall be designed to reduce interference with radio, audio,

and video equipment. 12. Controls shall incorporate power-failure memory. Should power be

interrupted and subsequently returned, the lights or fans will come back on to the same levels set prior to the power interruption. Restoration to some other default level is not acceptable.

13. Controls shall not be susceptible to damage or loss of memory due to

static discharge. 14. Controls shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F)

to 40°C (104°F).



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 41 of 95


15. Wire 3-Way controls using conventional 3-way and 4-way wire runs. 16. Contractors shall install all back boxes with a minimum wall box depth

of 2.5 inches. 2.8.2 Incandescent Dimmers

1. Provide single-pole and 3-way incandescent dimmers in 600 Watts and 1000 Watts capacities.

2. Dimmer shall be capable of operating in either 3-way switch location. 3. Dimmer shall Be Lutron Diva DV series with no soft glow light.

2.8.3 Electronic (Solid State) Low Voltage (ELV) Transformer Dimmers

1. Provide ELV dimmers for direct control of up to 300 watts of electronic low voltage load.

2. Dimmers shall contain circuitry specifically designed to control the input

of electronic (solid state) low voltage transformers. Dimmers using standard phase control shall not be acceptable.

3. Dimmers shall have a resettable overload protection that automatically

shuts off when dimmer capacity is exceeded. Protection methods that are non-resettable or require the device to be removed from the wall to reset shall not be acceptable.

4. Dimmers shall be designed to withstand a short, per UL 1472 section

5.10, between load hot and either neutral or ground without damage to the dimmer.

5. Dimmer shall Be Lutron Diva DVELV series with no soft glow light.

2.8.4 Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformer Dimmers

1. Provide MLV dimmers for direct control of up to 1000 volt amps of electronic low voltage load.

2. Dimmers shall contain circuitry specifically designed to control and

provide a symmetrical AC waveform to the input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL1472 section 5.11.

3. Dimmers shall not cause a magnetic low voltage transformer to operate



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 42 of 95


above the transformers rated operating current or temperature. 4. Dimmer shall be capable of operating in either 3-way switch location. 5. Dimmer shall Be Lutron Diva DVLV series with no soft glow light.

2.8.5 High Power Modules

1. Where lighting loads exceed the full rated capacity of single dimmers, provide a Diva incandescent dimmer driving high power modules. High power module and dimmer shall be from the same manufacturer to ensure compatibility.

2. High power modules shall be remotely mounted. 3. High power modules shall be rated and UL listed for control of

incandescent, magnetic low voltage, electronic low voltage, fluorescent, and neon/cold cathode loads in increments of 2,000 Watts up to 30,000 Watts.

4. High Power Modules shall be Lutron HP series.

2.8.6 Fan-Speed Controls:

1. Fan-speed controls shall be UL Listed, CSA and NOM approved Lutron Diva style.

2. Quiet fan-speed model shall provide three speed settings with paddle

providing preset on and off. 3. Quiet fan-speed control shall provide single-pole/3-way control of one

paddle fan (1.5A max.). 4. Fan speed control shall Be Lutron Diva DVFSQ series with no soft glow

light.

2.9 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

2.9.1 Wall Plates:

1. Provide wall plates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which they are attached. Use metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads coloured to match



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 43 of 95


finish of plates; wall plates coloured to match wiring devices. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

2. Material and Finish:

1) Interior spaces Buildings. a) Screwless cover plates, Gloss Finish b) Shall be Lutron CW series (No Substitutions)

2) Interior within public view – All Buildings a) Screwless cover plates, Gloss Finish b) Shall be Lutron CW series (No Substitutions)

3) Back of house spaces (Not in Public View)

a) Stainless Steel

3. Device plates for surface mounted Type FS or FD boxes: Type FSK

galvanized steel covers. 4. Device plates for surface mounted, 3 in. square boxes: 1/2 in. raised

galvanized steel covers.

2.9.2 Weatherproof Covers:

1. Refer to specification 16130 for weatherproof while in use covers. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed

and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

3.1.2 Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 44 of 95


3.2.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable


3.2.2 Do not install devices until wiring is complete. 3.2.3 Before installing receptacles and switches, clean electrical boxes of dirt and

debris. 3.2.4 Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through

connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections via wire connectors and pigtails.

3.2.5 Install wall plates after painting work is completed. 3.2.6 Mount switches and receptacles in vertical position in building interiors. 3.2.7 All exterior receptacles shall be GFI type mounted in weatherproof boxes. 3.2.8 Mount receptacles with weatherproof plates in horizontal position. 3.2.9 Mount switches and dimmers at 1.2M inches AFF to centerline of device.

(Refer to interior elevations for additional information, dimensions and orientations on interior elevations take precedence over this requirement).

3.2.10 Mount receptacles at 450mm AFF to centerline of device, unless otherwise

specified. (Refer to interior elevations for additional information. Dimensions and orientations on interior elevations take precedence over this requirement).

3.2.11 Install gasket plates for devices or system components having light emitting

features, such as switch with pilot light and dome lights. Where installed on rough textured surfaces, seal with black self adhesive poly-foam.

3.2.12 Ground receptacles with the insulated green ground wire from device ground

screw to a bolted outlet box connection. Isolated ground receptacles shall have the second ground wire (green with yellow tracer) ground the receptacle.

3.2.13 This Contractor shall check the switch location against the Architectural plans

and shop drawings to be certain that switches are on the strike side of the door, regardless of swing shown on drawings. Edge of plate shall be not more than 300mm from door frame.

3.2.14 Provide wiring device cover plates identifying device circuit numbers as

outlined in specification 16020.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 45 of 95


3.2.15 Ground-fault circuit interrupter type receptacles may provide GFI protection

for downstream receptacles on same circuit only where located in same room as other receptacles.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.3.1 Provide operational testing for devices. 3.3.2 Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750, or equal, for correct

polarity, proper ground connection, and wiring faults.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 46 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-160 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2.1 Specification 6-020 - Electrical Identification 1.2.2 Specification 6-180 – Over-current Protective Devices


1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). a. UL Standard Number 50, 67, 869 and 486A.

2. Provide panel boards constructed for special use with appropriate UL

marks which indicates that special type of use/application. 1.3.2 Reference Standards:

1. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).

a. NEMA Standards Publication Number 250, PB1.1 and PB1.2 2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

a. NECA - Standard of Installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Shop drawings.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 47 of 95


1.4.2 Cabinet dimensions, nameplate nomenclature, electrical ratings, and breaker

type listing. 1.4.3 Product data sheets with installation instructions. 1.4.4 Field quality control test results. 1.4.5 Operating and maintenance data.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.5.1 Do not store panel boards exposed to weather. 1.5.2 Protect panel boards against damage from work of other trades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS




1. Siemens 2. Square D Company 3. Cutler-Hammer

2.2 GENERAL

2.2.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide panel boards, enclosures and ancillary

components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper number of unit panel board devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated. Provide circuit directory in clear



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 48 of 95


plastic cover. Provide panel boards with lugs suitable for termination of feeder sizes indicated on drawings.

2.2.2 Each panel board, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating

equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the over-current devices mounted in the panelboard. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage.

2.3 PANELBOARDS

2.3.1 Service Entrance Panelboards:

1. Provide dead front safety constructed factory assembled service entrance circuit breaker type panelboards in sizes and ratings as indicated. Equip with panelboard unit devices, of types, ratings and characteristics indicated. Construct with rectangular shaped copper bus bars which are securely mounted and braced and with solderless lugs bolted to main bus bars suitable for service indicated on drawings. Provide branch circuits with bolt-on moulded case type circuit breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Provide panelboards with UL markings indicating "suitable for use as service entrance equipment”.

2.3.2 Power Distribution Panelboards:

1. Provide dead front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and main lug connectors approved for copper or aluminum conductors. Equip with copper bus bars and with full sized copper neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide bolt-on moulded case main and branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Provide panelboards with bare non-insulated copper grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures.

2.3.3 Load Centers:

1. Provide dead front safety type constructed factory assembled load center in sizes and rating indicated, equip load centers with unit devices, of types, ratings and characteristics indicate. Construct with rectangular shaped bus bars mounted and braced, and with solderless



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 49 of 95


lugs bolted to main bus. Provide branch circuits with plug-on molded case type circuit breakers. Provide adequate neutral and grounding bars. Shall be Square ‘D’ QO series or equal.

2.3.4 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards:

1. Provide dead front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars, full sized neutral bar, with bolt-on type heavy duty, quick make, quick break circuit breakers. Provide copper neutral and ground bars.

2. Provide non-linear rated panelboards as indicated on the drawings.

Panelboards shall be UL Listed for use with non-linear loads and have neutral rated for 200% of panelboard phase current.

2.3.5 Panelboard Enclosures:

1. Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code-gauge, minimum 16 gauge thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Except for load centers, provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicted. Equip with interior circuit directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosure for recessed mounting. Provide enclosures, which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed. Panelboard enclosure shall have a minimum width of 500mm and a depth of 15mm.

2.3.6 Panelboard Accessories:

1. Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to isolated ground bus bar, ground fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 50 of 95


3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Examine area to receive panelboard to assure adequate clearance for

panelboard installation.

3.1.2 Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable


3.2.2 Flush mount and surface mount as specified on drawings and schedules. 3.2.3 Support panel cabinets independently to structure with no weight bearing on

conduits. 3.2.4 Install recessed panelboards to allow cover to be drawn tight against wall to

provide neat appearance. 3.2.5 Install panelboards so top breaker is not higher than 6'-0" above floor.

3.2.6 Adjacent panel cabinets shall be of same size and mounted in horizontal

alignment.

3.2.7 Provide lugs in panelboards of adequate size to accept feeders as indicated on drawings.

3.2.8 Install in each panelboard a typewritten directory accurately indicating rooms

and equipment being served. Verify actual room names and numbers to be used. Also, provide a copy of typewritten panelboard directories in Owner’s close-out manuals. I. Attach nameplate per panelboard schedule.

3.2.9 Use load centers in living units only.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.3.1 Conduct Field tests prior to energisation:



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 51 of 95


1. Megger check of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation levels.

2. Balance load among feeder conductors. 3. Unbalance shall not exceed 10%. 4. Energize each circuit and check for complete and correct function. 5. Do not megger solid state equipment.

6. Permanently record test data.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

3.4.2 Tighten lugs and bus connections. 3.4.3 Clean interior of panel board. 3.4.3 Touch up paint scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 52 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Electrical Supplemental Requirements, and Architects’ sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 Reference Standards:

1. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

a. NECA - Standard of Installation. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Submit manufacturer’s product data for all items listed below. 1.3.2 Submit UL Listed Through-Penetration Firestop Systems details proposed for

use on project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.1.1 The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic


2.2 SUPPORTS 2.2.1 Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials required:

1. C-Clamps:



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 53 of 95


a. Black malleable iron. 2. I-Beam Clamps:

a. Black steel.

3. One Hole Conduit Straps:

a. For supporting 1 inch and smaller EMT or rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel.

4. Two Hole Conduit Straps:

a. For supporting 1-1/4 inch and larger EMT or rigid metal conduit;

galvanized steel; 3/4 inch strap width. 5. Hexagon Nuts:

a. Galvanized steel. 6. Round Steel Rod:

a. Galvanized steel; minimum 1/4 inch diameter. 2.3 ANCHORS 2.3.1 Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials required:

1. Lead expansion anchors. 2. Tap connectors 1/4 inch minimum.

2.4 SLEEVES AND SEALS 2.4.1 Provide sleeves and seals, including armored cable seals, of types, sizes and

materials indicated, with the following construction features:

1. Wall and Floor Seals: provide factory assembled water tight wall and floor seals, of types, and sizes required; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 54 of 95


2.5 CONDUIT CABLE SUPPORTS 2.5.1 Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non- armored type

electrical cables in risers. 2.6 U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEMS 2.6.1 Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 12 gauge

hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes as required. Construct with 9/16 inch diameter holes, 8 inch o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with fittings which mate and match with U-channel.

2.6.2 Manufacturers:

1. Provide U-channel strut systems of one of the following:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Midland-Ross Corporation. c. OZ/Gedney Division; General Signal Corporation. d. Power-Strut Division; Van Huffel Tube Corporation.

2.7 PIPE SLEEVES 2.7.1 Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet Metal: a. Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with

snap-lock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gauge metal:

1) 3 inch and smaller - 20 gauge. 2) 4 inch to 6 inch - 16 gauge. 3) Over 6 inch - 14 gauge.

2. Steel Pipe:

a. Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.

3. Iron Pipe:



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 55 of 95


a. Fabricate from cast iron or ductile iron pipe; remove burrs. 4. Plastic Pipe:

a. Fabricate from schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. 2.8 SLEEVE SEALS 2.8.1 Provide sleeves for piping which penetrates foundation walls below grade, or

exterior walls. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with non-toxic, UL classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal.

2.9 ALTERNATE SLEEVE SEALS 2.9.1 Provide modular mechanical type seals, consisting of interlocking synthetic

rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 Install hangers, supports, and anchors only after structural work, where work

is to be installed, has been completed. Correct inadequacies such as proper placement of inserts, anchors, and other building structural attachments.

3.1.2 Examine areas and conditions under which equipment and associated

components are to be installed and notify Engineer in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.1.3 Determine that ceiling channel system is adequately supported to receive and

stabilize lighting fixtures. Where deemed inadequate, do not install fixtures until additional support is provided.

3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES 3.2.1 Install channel supports across main grid runners or grid supports, securely

tied down or anchored for fixtures and devices mounted in suspended ceiling systems so as not to cause tile to sag and so that fixture or device cannot be lifted, rotated, or displaced.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 56 of 95


3.2.2 Lighting fixtures shall be supported to building structure independent of ceiling support system. Fixture support wires shall be same size and material used to support ceiling system. Provide adequate support so that fixture cannot be rotated or displaced. Contractor shall submit proposed method of fixture support to Engineer for review prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS 3.3.1 Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on to

structural steel or raceway and equipment support. 3.3.2 Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional

concentrated loads. 3.3.3 Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS 3.4.1 Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those

permitted by ANSI B31 and to prevent the transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

3.4.2 Installation methods shall be in conformity with the manufacturer's

recommendations for maximum holding power, but in no case shall the depth of hole be less than four bolt diameters. Minimum distance between the center of any expansion anchor and an edge of exterior corner of concrete shall be not less than 4-1/2 times the diameter of the hole in which it is installed.

3.5 SUPPORT OF CONDUIT 3.5.1 Fasten conduit to structural parts of building in a manner acceptable to

Engineer. 3.5.2 Do not use perforated hanger iron or tie wire. 3.5.3 Install concrete insert channel as required, with spacing as recommended by

manufacturer. Install with anchor and caps, insert joiner clips and closer seals as required.

3.5.4 Support conduit as follows:

1. Single Conduit Runs:

a. Vertical Surfaces:



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 57 of 95


1) Galvanized, heavy duty, sheet steel straps; provide back

straps for all exposed conduit and conduit on exterior walls.

b. Horizontal Surfaces:

1) Galvanized, heavy duty, 2-hole steel pipe straps. 2. Multiple Conduit Runs:

a. Vertical Surfaces:

1) Horizontal or vertical rack channel with conduit straps as required.

b. Horizontal Surfaces:

1) Single or double rack channel trapeze, complete with conduit straps as required; all supported with threaded hanger rods.

3. 1-1/4 inch and larger conduit runs passing through floors shall be

supported at each floor with riser pipe clamps. 4. Conduit extending through roof shall pass through a ceiling box at roof

lines. 5. Provide 14 gauge minimum copper box complete with watertight

soldered seams and flanged to serve as pitch pocket for each conduit. 6. Conduit and pitch pocket shall be installed in advance of roofing work.

3.6 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORT 3.6.1 Conductors in vertical raceways shall be supported using suitable cable

supports. Locate supports so that each conductor in a vertical raceway will be complete with such support. Provide supports spaced in accordance with N.E.C. Article 300-19.

3.7 TRANSFORMER SUPPORTS 3.7.1 Install auxiliary transformer wall mounting brackets where wall mounted

transformers are indicated on drawings. Utilize commercial and manufactured supports if available.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 58 of 95


3.8 FLOOR AND WALL PENETRATIONS 3.8.1 Conduit and cable penetrations through fire rated walls and floors and

fire/smoke walls shall be made using UL Listed Through-Penetration Firestop Systems. Contractor shall submit UL Listed Through-Penetration Firestop System details proposed for use on project. Acceptable manufacturers are 3M or Hilti.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 59 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-402 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE



1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Specification 6-020 - Electrical Identification 1.2.2 Specification 6-111 - Conduit 1.2.3 Specification 6-120 - Wires, Cables and Connectors 1.2.4 Specification 6-170 - Motor and Circuit Disconnects 1.2.5 Specification 6-405 - Underground Electrical Conduit 1.2.6 Specification 6-425 - Service Entrance Switchboard 1.2.7 Specification 6-450 - Grounding 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1.3.2 Standard Publication Number:

1. AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 2. FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. PB1.2 - Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for

Equipment. 4. PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 60 of 95


5. SG 3 - Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers. 6. SG 5 - Power Switchgear Assemblies.

1.3.3 Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1. UL 50 - Electrical Cabinets and Boxes. 2. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures. 3. UL 854 - Service Entrance Cables. 4. UL 869 - Electrical Service Equipment. 5. Provide service entrance equipment and accessories which are UL

listed and labeled, and marked, "Suitable For Use As Service Equipment".

1.3.4 IEEE Compliance

1. IEEE Standard 241. 1.3.5 Local Codes and Ordinances. 1.4 GENERAL 1.4.1 Provide electrical service as indicated on drawings and specified herein. 1.4.2 Coordinate with Electrical Utility. 1.4.3 This Contractor shall include in his bid all costs from the Electrical Utility for

installation of the electrical service. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate with the Electrical Utility and include all work required by the Utility to be provided by the Contractor and include all costs from the Utility that are assessed the Owner for installation of the electrical service in his Bid.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.1.1 The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic




21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 61 of 95


submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included here.

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES 2.2.1 Provide service entrance equipment and accessories; of types, sizes, ratings

and electrical characteristics indicated; which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation; and as herein specified. Equipment for complete assembly shall be supplied by one manufacturer.

2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2.3.1 Provide overcurrent protective devices complying with Specification 6-060 -

Overcurrent Coordination Study and Specification 6-180 - Overcurrent Protective Devices, in accordance with the following listing:

2.3.2 Circuit Breakers. See Specification 6-180. 2.4 METER SOCKETS 2.4.1 Provide meter sockets which comply with requirements of local utility

company supplying electrical power to service entrance equipment of building project. The development is primary metered requiring only one meter at the entrance to the development.

2.4.2 Manufacturers:

1. Provide meter sockets of one of the following (for each type meter):

a. Crouse-Hinds Company. b. GTE Sylvania Inc.

2.5 SWITCHES 2.5.1 Provide safety switches complying with Specification 6-170 - Motor and Circuit

Disconnects, in accordance with the following listing:

1. Heavy Duty Safety switches, with NEMA Type enclosures as indicated. 2.6 RACEWAYS 2.6.1 Provide raceways complying with Specification 6-111 - Conduit.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 62 of 95


2.7 WALL AND FLOOR SEALS 2.7.1 Provide wall and floor seals complying with Specification 6-190. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Install service entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service entrance equipment fulfills requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC and NEMA standards.

3.1.2 See Specification 6-405 for underground installation. 3.1.3 Coordinate with other electrical work, including utility company wiring, as

necessary to interface installation of service entrance equipment work with other work.

3.1.4 Provide CT cabinet and meter socket(s) in accordance with utility

requirements. 3.1.5 Provide concrete pad for utility transformer in accordance with utility

requirements. 3.1.6 Provide underground conduit and pull boxes for utility primary cables per

utility requirements. Contractor shall include all work required for installation of primary cables.

3.1.7 Provide underground secondary conduit and wire from utility transformer to

service entrance switchgear. 3.1.8 Install fuses, if any, in service entrance equipment.

I. Provide equipment bonding and grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground, for service entrance equipment and wiring/cabling as indicated.

3.1.9 Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. 3.1.10 Touch-up paint scratched or marred enclosure surfaces to match original

finishes.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 63 of 95


3.1.10 Test service entrance equipment and electrical circuitry upon completion of installation work and after energizing circuitry; and demonstrate its capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and retest.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 64 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-405 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT


Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and Architects’ Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Specification 6-111 - Conduit 1.3 DESCRIPTION 1.3.1 Watertight underground conduit system for electrical power distribution,

branch circuits, feeders, communication and control cables. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Submit manufacturer’s product data for all items listed below. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.1.1 The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic


2.2 CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES 2.2.1 Conduit:

1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), schedule 40, rated for direct burial. 2.2.2 Elbows:

1. Elbows and bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches for 5 inches and larger duct, and 36 inches for smaller ducts.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 65 of 95


2.2.3 Spacers:

1. Spacers to space and support conduits. 2.2.4 Bell Ends, Bushings and Plugs:

1. Bell ends of appropriate sizes. 2. Bushing of appropriate sizes. 3. Closure caps or plugs of same material as conduit.

2.2.5 Pull Wire:

1. Provide poly cord in each duct. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATIONS 3.1.1 Excavate trenches for conduit to adequate width, depth, and proper slope. 3.2 PLACEMENT OF CONDUITS 3.2.1 Top of conduit shall be a minimum of 30 inches below finished grade (36”

under roadways) for direct buried conduit. 3.2.2 Direct buried conduits shall be run parallel to each other and space shall be

maintained between conduits (spaced on center of at least three times conduit trade diameter). Conduit crossovers shall be avoided as much as possible. Where conduits cross each other, conduits shall not be in direct contact with each other.

3.2.3 Install spacers as recommended by conduit manufacturer but not to exceed a

maximum of 6 foot – 0 inches on center. 3.2.4 Direct buried conduit that stub-up into equipment at both ends shall be

straight to within ½ inch per 20 feet in both vertical and horizontal directions. 3.2.5 Provide accurate locations of conduit on record drawings. 3.2.6 Install not more than three 90 degrees bends or equivalent between pull-

points.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 66 of 95


3.2.7 Install bushings on duct ends in equipment enclosure. 3.2.8 Provide water tight conduit systems. 3.2.9 Plug or cap empty conduits. 3.2.10 Pull a mandrel, one size smaller than conduit, through all PVC conduit after

installation and/or after concrete pour. 3.2.11 In manholes and pull boxes center cables at entrance of conduit and seal with

waterproof non-hardening mastic compound. 3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 3.3.1 General:

1. This Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description required for his work, and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise specified. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. All excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be removed and wasted as indicated on the Drawings or as requested by the Architect.

2. Such grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface

water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or other approved methods.

3. Such sheeting and shoring shall be done as may be necessary for the

protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that

short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the Architect, the pipe or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly tamped in such tunnel sections. Each excavation shall comprise all materials, and shall include clay, silt, sand, rock, muck, gravel, hardpan, loose shale, and loose stone.

5. Open trench sufficiently ahead of pipe laying to reveal obstructions. 6. Provide trench crossing as necessary to accommodate public travel. 7. Contractor shall file written "notification of excavation" with all utility



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 67 of 95


companies at least three (3) days prior to excavation. 8. Backfill trenches only after piping has been inspected, and locations of

pipe lines and appurtenances have been recorded. 9. For a depth of 12 inches above the top of the duct bank or conduit

backfill by hand with material specified for Compacted Backfill. Tamp this backfill thoroughly in layers not exceeding 6" in thickness, taking care not to disturb the duct bank or conduit.

10. For the remaining trench depth backfill and compact with material as

specified in the following paragraphs. 11. Jetting the backfill with water will not be permitted unless approved in

writing by the Architect. 3.4 TRENCH EXCAVATING 3.4.1 Trenches shall be of necessary width of the proper laying of the pipe but not

more than 16" wider than the duct bank or conduit diameter, and the banks shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of conduit or duct bank on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, care shall be taken not to excavate below the depths indicated.

3.4.2 Where rock excavations are required, the rock shall be excavated to a

minimum over-depth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the Drawings or specified. Over-depths in the rock excavations and authorized over-depths shall be backfilled with loose granular material properly compacted.

3.4.3 Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly

supporting the duct bank or conduit, as determined by the Architect, is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such soil shall be removed to the depth required and the trench backfilled to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material, as hereinafter specified.

3.4.4 Keep trenches free from water while construction therein is in progress. Under

no circumstances lay conduit or install duct bank or appurtenances in water. Pump or bail water from bell holes to permit proper jointing of pipes. Conduct the discharge from trench dewatering to drains or natural drainage channels.

3.5 GRADING TRENCH BOTTOM



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 68 of 95


3.5.1 Shape bottom of trench for Class C bedding, except as otherwise noted. Perform final grading of trench bottoms by hand tools. Grade the bottom of trenches evenly to ensure bearings for all conduits or duct banks. Cut holes as necessary for joints and joint making.

3.6 DEPTH OF COVER 3.6.1 Trenches for utilities shall be of a depth that will provide the following

minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finish grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise specifically shown:

1. 30” minimum cover: Secondary Circuits, 36” under roadways 2. 30” minimum cover: Communication Systems

3.6.2 All underground raceways shall have a minimum of 3" of clean sand on sides

and orange plastic marker ribbon on top of sand fill. 3.7 NORMAL BACKFILL 3.7.1 Where compacted backfill is not specified the trenches shall be carefully

backfilled with the excavated materials for backfilling of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones over 2-1/2" maximum dimension, deposited in 12" layers and compacted.

3.7.2 The surfaces shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding

over trenches left in a uniform and neat condition as approved by Architect.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 69 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-450 - GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Electrical Supplemental Requirements 16000, and Architects’ Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.


1. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL)

a. UL Standards 467, 869, 586. 2. IEEE Compliance

a. IEEE Standards 142, 241. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Submit manufacturer’s product data for all items listed below. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.2 GENERAL 2.2.1 Provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials,

including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 70 of 95


materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated.

2.3 CONDUCTORS 2.3.1 Provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching

power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. Conductors shall be copper.

2.4 GROUND RODS 2.4.1 Solid copper, 3/4 inch diameter x 10 feet. Ground rods shall be coupled

together to achieve required length as indicated on drawings or herein. 2.5 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONNECTION ACCESSORIES 2.5.1 Provide electrical insulating tape, heat shrinkable insulating tubing, bonding

straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

2.6 GROUNDING ENHANCEMENT 2.9.1 Exterior ground system shall be enhanced with Conducrete DM100

(conductive concrete) as described in Paragraph 3.1.4.11. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 General:

1. Ground electrical systems and equipment as required by NEC. 2. Install separate code rated grounding conductors to special equipment

and activity areas as required by code. 3. Bond all metallic piping systems and service equipment as required by

NEC. 3.1.2 System Ground:

1. Attach ground wire to point ahead of water meter or service shut-off valve.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 71 of 95


2. Piping system ground shall be augmented by a minimum of 3 ground

rods, 30 feet long, spaced a minimum of 30 feet apart so as to achieve an effective ground resistance. Bond to building steel where available.

3.1.3 Main Grounding Conductor:

1. Continuous without splice from water service ground to service equipment.

2. Install jumper or shunt around water meter. 3. Install in rigid metal conduit securely fastened to pipe. 4. Attach non-ferrous metal tag to warn against removal.

3.1.4 Grounding Requirements:

1. Provide ¼” thick copper ground bus bar in all electrical and communication rooms. Copper bus bars shall be Chatsworth Model 10622-010 (10” x 4”) located in small electrical rooms and communication rooms and Model 10622-020 (20” x 4”) located in main electrical room. Bus bars shall be connected with copper ground wires as indicated on drawings. Each ground wire attached to a bus bar shall be identified as to origination, i.e., building steel, etc.

2. Bond metallic conduits, supports, cabinets, and other equipment so

ground will be electrically continuous from service to outlet boxes. 3. Install grounding conductor in nonmetallic or flexible conduit to

complete equipment ground continuity. 4. Install grounding conductors to permit shortest and most direct path

from equipment to ground. When grounding conductor runs through metallic conduit, bond to conduit at entrance and exit with a bolted clamp.

5. Ground neutral at service only except for separately derived systems. 6. Install a separate equipment grounding conductor sized per NEC Table

250-122 in all raceways. 7. Green ground bar in panelboards to be similar to neutral bar, except

tinted green and bonded to panel tub.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 72 of 95


8. Connections shall be accessible for inspection and checking. No insulation shall be installed over ground connections.

9. Ground connection surfaces shall be cleaned and all connections shall

be made so that it is impossible to move them. 10. Drive ground rods to a depth 12 inches below finished grade. 11. Dig a trench between the ground rods that is twenty-four (24) inches

deep and twenty (20) inches wide. Cover the conductor bonding the ground rods together in a three (3) inch layer of Conducrete. The layer of Conducrete should spread the entire width of the trench. One (1) bag of Conducrete should provide approximately eight (8) feet of trench coverage. Lightly replace a couple of inches of backfill on top of the Conducrete so as not to disperse. After the initial layer of backfill has been placed, continue to fill in trench with remaining fill.

12. Except for connections to ground bus bars, all grounding conductor to

conductor, conductor to ground rod and conductor to structure connections of #6 AWG and larger copper conductors shall be permanent CADWELD exothermically welded connections. Copper grounding conductors spliced with CADWELD exothermic connections shall be considered as a continuous conductor, as stated in NEC 250-64(c).

All connections shall meet the applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 80-1986. Welding material for copper-to-copper and copper-to-steel connections shall contain copper oxide, aluminum and not less than 3 percent tin as a wetting agent.

13. Attach grounds to ground bus bars before permanent building service

is energized. 14. Ground metal lighting poles, as shown on drawings and as required by

NEC. 15. When installing exposed runs, attach ground wire neatly and firmly to

walls. 16. Step-down transformer secondaries shall be grounded to the nearest

electrical room ground bus bar. Also, bond the grounded conductor of the transformer to the nearest available point of the interior metal water piping system in the area served by the transformer in accordance with NEC Article 250-104.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 73 of 95


17. Feeders to remote buildings shall have their equipment grounding conductors bonded in accordance with N.E.C. Article 250-32.

18. Bond fuel storage tanks and associated metallic piping systems to

building ground system. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.2.1 Perform fall-of-potential test in accordance with IEEE Standard 81 on the

main grounding electrode or system. Grounding system shall be disconnected from utility neutral when testing.

3.2.2 Resistance Measurements:

1. Measure at each service ground connection. 2. Measure in normally dry conditions. 3. Not less than 48 hours after rainfall. 4. Isolate ground under test from other grounds. 5. Record resistance measurements and include in closeout documents.

Indicate type of instrumentation used in test and its most recent date of calibration.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 74 of 95


SPECIFICATION :6-471 - FEEDER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Electrical Supplemental Requirements 16000, and Architects’ Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2.2 Specification 6-111 - Conduit 1.2.2 Specification 6-120 - Wires, Cables and Connectors 1.2.3 Specification 6-450 - Grounding PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FEEDERS 2.1.1 Materials shall comply with other sections of the specifications. 2.1.1 Size and protect in accordance with NEC Article 215. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Examine areas and conditions under which feeders are to be installed and

notify Engineer, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

3.1.2 Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 75 of 95


3.2.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

3.2.2 Extend feeders at full capacity from origin to termination. 3.2.3 Each conduit raceway shall contain only those conductors constituting a

single feeder circuit. 3.2.4 Where multiple raceways are used for a single feeder, each raceway shall

contain a conductor of each phase and neutral, if used, and a grounding conductor.

3.2.5 Where feeder conductors are run in parallel, conductors shall be of same

length, same material, circular-mil area, insulation type, and terminated in same manner.

3.2.6 Where parallel feeder conductors are run in separate raceways, raceways

shall have same physical characteristics. 3.2.7 Feeders shall follow most accessible routes, concealed in construction in

finished areas, exposed to the minimum temperature gradient and to minimum temperature fluctuation.

3.2.8 Confine feeders to insulated portions of building, unless otherwise shown. 3.2.9 Trapped runs without facilities for continuous drainage are not acceptable. 3.2.10 Do not draw conductors into conduits until building is enclosed and watertight

and until work which may cause cable damage has been completed. 3.2.11 Identify feeders with heavy tags at origin and terminus. 3.2.12 On network systems, neutral shall be run with phase wires. 3.2.13 Unbalanced neutral current shall not exceed normal or derated conductor

capacity. 3.2.14 Contractor shall provide lugs, compression fittings, auxiliary wireways, etc., of

adequate size for termination of feeder sizes as indicated on drawings. Feeder sizes indicated may be oversized for voltage drop in some cases. Contractor shall coordinate with equipment manufacturer for proper lug sizes.

3.2.15 Feeders shall be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 2%.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 76 of 95


- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 77 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-472 - BRANCH CIRCUITS

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Specification 6-020 - Electrical Identification 1.2.2 Specification 6-111 - Conduit 1.2.3 Specification 6-120 - Wires, Cables and Connectors 1.2.4 Specification 6-450 - Grounding 1.3 GENERAL 1.3.1 Circuit numbers as shown on drawings are for Contractor to plan his wiring

and for estimating purposes. 1.3.2 Numbers shown are not necessarily consecutive numbers of panelboard

breakers. 1.3.3 Panelboard loading shall be balanced to +/-10%.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 BRANCH CIRCUITS 2.1.1 Do not use wire smaller than No. 12 AWG (unless otherwise noted) for branch

circuit wiring, including motor circuits. All 20 amps, 230-volt branch circuit homeruns (to panelboard) serving receptacles, equipment, and lighting shall be No. 10 AWG minimum to first outlet or light fixture.

2.1.2 Size 230V branch circuits for length of run on the following basis:



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 78 of 95


1. 0 to 100 ft. run from panelboard to first outlet: No. 10 AWG minimum. 2. 101 to 150 ft. run: increase one wire size, i.e.; No. 10 AWG becomes

No. 8 AWG to first outlet. 3. 151 to 250 ft. run: wiring shall be No. 6 AWG minimum size to first

outlet. 2.1.3 For other branch circuits, size conductors so that voltage drop does not

exceed 3%. 2.1.4 Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter circuits shall have dedicated neutrals for each

circuit, sharing of neutrals will cause nuisance tripping and is not allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Examine areas and conditions under which branch circuits are to be installed


3.1.2 Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable

requirements of NEC and NECA and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

3.2.2 Install branch circuit and control wiring system as indicated in drawings. 3.2.3 The plans show a circuit number for each device or light. This is done for

clarity. Combine circuit families into a single home run. No more than three 240V circuits shall be allowed in a single home run.

3.2.4 Final routing of branch circuits and switch legs as dictated by field conditions,

these specifications, or instruction from Engineer. 3.2.5 Size conduit, outlet boxes, and other raceway system components in

accordance with NEC requirements as minimum.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 79 of 95


3.2.6 Do not draw conductor into conduits until building is enclosed and watertight

and work which may cause cable damage has been completed. 3.3 MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT WIRING 3.3.1 Furnish and install motor circuits in accordance with schedules on drawings

and code requirements, from source of supply to associated motor starter, and from starter to motor terminal box, including necessary and required intermediate connections.

3.3.2 Conductor and conduit size for motor branch circuits, if shown on drawings,

are sized for motor requirement only. Contractor may, at his option, include associated control conductors in same conduit providing the conduit size is adjusted to meet code requirements for percentage of fill.

3.3.3 Motors shall have proper size wire as per NEC and nameplate ratings. Verify

ratings of motors before installing wiring. 3.3.4 Obtain manufacturer's wiring diagrams of electrical equipment furnished with

equipment and do not proceed to wire equipment without this information. 3.3.5 Verify all motor feeder sizes, fuse sizes, etc. recommended by equipment

manufacturer before installing. Make equipment connections with flexible conduit or liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit. Properly ground non-current carrying metal parts of equipment. Where cord connections or receptacles are required, provide type "S" rubber jacketed cord, 600 volt, heavy duty service of sizes and lengths required, and receptacle as applicable.

3.3.6 Coordinate work with the other trades such that the operation of mechanical

equipment will be as described in mechanical specifications. 3.3.7 Check drawings and specifications of other divisions of work such as heating,

ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, mechanical equipment, alarm systems, and instrumentation for equipment and work which must be included whether or not shown on electrical drawings, in order to provide a complete electrical installation.

3.3.8 Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or in specifications, motors shall be

furnished, set in place, and connected to driven equipment and prepared for operation as specified in other sections. Provide final connection and proper phase relationship to achieve proper motor rotation.

3.3.9 Motor connections shall be made by split-bolt type connectors using proper



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 80 of 95


tools and fittings to assure good electrical continuity and low resistance joint.

- END OF SECTION -



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 81 of 95


SPECIFICATION: 6-500 - LIGHTING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Specification 6-120 - Wires, Cables and Connectors 1.2.2 Specification 6-190 - Supporting Devices 1.2.3 Specification 6-450 - Grounding 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Fixtures as specified in "Lighting Fixture Schedule" establish a standard of

quality for project as determined by Engineer. 1.3.2 Equivalency of fixtures is determined by Engineer and includes the following

data for comparative purposes:

1. Efficiency. 2. Efficacy. 3. Distribution. 4. Construction. 5. Design compatibility. 6. Manufacturer reliability based upon past performances.

1.3.3 Fixtures shall conform to UL requirements and bear UL label and

manufacturer's name.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 82 of 95


1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Submit catalogue literature for each fixture specified in booklet form with index

and a separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in fixture "type" alphabetical order, with specified fixture manufacturer's printed data. Each submittal shall clearly describe materials, type of diffuser, hardware, gasketing, reflector and chassis, finish, ballast and lamp to be used.

1.4.2 Contractor shall provide submittals for light fixtures as indicated in the Lighting

Fixture Schedule. No substitutions are allowed. Where an alternate manufacturer is indicated for a specific fixture with no catalogue number indicated for the alternate manufacturer, provide alternate fixture that is equal in all characteristics as the cataloged fixture.

1.4.3 Excessive delivery times shall not be an acceptable cause for substitution of

specified fixtures. Notify Architect/Engineer of any long lead fixtures that may impact project schedule within two weeks of contract award. Beyond two weeks the contractor is responsible for any costs associated with expediting the manufacturing process of the specified fixture and/or cost associated with an approved substitute fixture if allowed by Architect/Engineer.

1.4.5 Submit ballast catalog data indicating lamp wattage, input watts, sound rating,

power factor, ballast factor, and type of ballast for each similar fixture type. 1.4.6 Submit manufacturer’s printed data for lamps indicating lamp life, CRI,

degrees Kelvin, etc. for each similar fixture type. 1.4.7 Submit photometric data if different than that specified and requested by

Engineer. 1.4.8 Submit a sample fixture if different than that specified and requested by

Engineer. 1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, denting, and scoring

finish. 1.5.2 Do not install damaged lighting fixtures. 1.5.3 Do not repair damaged fixtures; replace and return damaged units to

equipment manufacturer for replacement. 1.5.4 Store lighting fixtures in a clean, dry space. Store in original cartons and

protect from dirt, physical damage, weather, and construction traffic.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 83 of 95


1.6 JOB CONDITIONS 1.6.1 Contractor shall determine that ceiling channel system is adequately

supported to receive and support his lighting fixtures. Where deemed inadequate, do not install fixtures until additional support has been provided.

1.7.1 Verify local codes and ordinances that may pertain to fixture limitations,

installation and aiming of exterior fixtures. Notify Engineer prior to Bid time if problems are encountered.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included herein and listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.2.1 Provide lighting fixtures of the size, type, and rating indicated in "Lighting

Fixture Schedule," complete with, but not necessarily limited to, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, wiring and any other accessories required for a complete working installation.

2.2.2 Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule on drawings. 2.2.3 Fixture catalog numbers do not necessarily include all accessories and are

intended to serve as a guide in defining types and manufacturers of unit only. 2.2.4 Fixtures shall meet UL 1598 requirements. The appropriate UL label or listing

will be acceptable as evidence of compliance with UL requirements. 2.2.5 The contractor shall ensure that the fixture is UL listed for the ambient

conditions where installed. Extra compensation will not be permitted for failure to coordinate fixtures with their ambient conditions.

1. Fixtures located exterior to the building and/or in unconditioned damp

spaces and under cover from direct weather exposure shall be UL



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 84 of 95


listed as “Suitable for Damp Locations” unless noted otherwise. 2. Fixtures located exterior to the building and/or in unconditioned wet

spaces and in direct contact with the weather or in washdown areas shall be UL listed as “Suitable for Wet Locations” unless noted otherwise.

2.2.6 Fixtures installed with direct contact with insulation shall have an ‘IC’ rating for

direct contact with insulation. Verify if fixtures will be in contact with insulation prior to installation. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts.

2.2.7 Gasketing material shall be vinyl or other non-aging type material as approved

by Engineer. 2.2.8 Verify ceiling system compatibility with recessed fixture mounting before

placing order. 2.2.9 Provide proper trim for each fixture as required for various types of ceiling

being installed throughout project; plaster rings, fixture ends or caps, suspension units, mounting brackets, and/or other auxiliary parts necessary to make a complete fixture.

2.2.10 Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in "Remarks" on

"Lighting Fixture Schedule" and "Notes" on drawings. 2.2.11 Provide fixture stems as indicated on drawings. 2.2.12 Where stems are furnished by fixture manufacturer, verify length prior to

releasing for shipment. 2.2.13 Where stems are furnished by Contractor, verify length prior to installation. 2.2.14 Suspended fixtures shall have swivel type aligner hangers in ceiling outlet

boxes to ensure plumb suspension. 2.2.15 Exit fixtures shall be installed so that line of sight is not obstructed. 2.1.16 Provide recessed fixtures with thermal protectors. 2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES 2.3.1 Fabricate of sheet steel, die-formed to provide structural strength. 2.3.2 Treat fixtures for acceptance of baked white high reflectance enamel or

porcelain enamel finish coat.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 85 of 95


2.3.3 Colour shall be as indicated on Lighting Fixture Schedule or as selected by

Architect. 2.3.4 Lens panels for surface box type fixtures and for recessed troffers shall be

framed and be equipped with hinge and latch. Equip frames and louvers with retaining means to support frame during re-lamping.

2.3.5 Design fluorescent rapid start fixtures, 40W and smaller, to incorporate a

grounded metal starting aid such as reflector, ballast channel strip, at least 1 inch wide over full length of lamp and within maximum 1/2 inch distance from lamp per ANSI C82.1.

2.3.6 Design fixtures such that case temperature of ballast does not exceed 90

degrees C. 2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES 2.4.1 Include a pre-wired integral ballast and optical assembly. 2.4.2 Suitable for continuous service at location shown in an ambient temperature

at 40 degrees C. 2.4.3 Ballast housing and structural parts including mounting devices shall be cast

aluminum and include a provision for field mounting of safety chains. 2.5 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES 2.5.1 Porcelain lamp holders in commercial or industrial fixtures. 2.6 RECESSED HID AND INCANDESCENT FIXTURES 2.6.1 Thermal protection per NEC Section 410-65(C). 2.7 BALLASTS 2.7.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Advance 2. Universal Lighting Technologies 3. Sylvania 4. Lutron



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 86 of 95


2.7.2 Fluorescent Ballast - Electronic Type:

1. Fluorescent lamp ballasts for T8 and biax lamps shall be high frequency electronic type, operating lamps at a frequency of 20 KHZ or higher with no detectable flicker.

2. Ballasts shall be instant start. 3. Ballast manufacturers shall have been producing electronic ballasts in

the U.S. for more than 10 years with a low failure rate. 4. Ballasts shall be approved and listed by Underwriters laboratories, Inc. 5. Ballasts shall comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency

standards. 6. Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing

electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall not interfere with operation of other normal electrical equipment.

7. Ballasts shall meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding

harmonic distortion and surge protection. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 20% and input current third harmonic content shall not exceed 10%. Ballasts to be surge and transient protected to 600 volts.

8. Ballasts shall be a high frequency electronic type and operate lamps at

a frequency above 42 kHz to avoid interference with infrared devices. 9. Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall yield normal

lamp life. 10. Ballasts shall provide transient immunity as recommended by ANSI

C62.41. 11. Ballasts shall operate lamps with no visible flicker (<3% flicker index). 12. Ballasts shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output

conditions without damage. 13. Lamp current crest factor (ratio of peak to RMS current) shall not

exceed 1.6 and ballast factor shall be not less than 0.87. 14. Ballasts shall operate at an input frequency of 50 HZ and an input

voltage of 239 to 305 (230V models).



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 87 of 95


15. Ballasts shall have power factor above 97%, sound rated "A" or better,

and contain no PCB's. 16. Ballasts shall operate as a parallel circuit to allow remaining lamp(s) to

maintain full output if companion lamp(s) fail. 17. Ballasts shall be provided with integral leads, colour coded to ANSI

standard C82.11. 18. Ballasts shall be capable of being tandem wired up to a maximum

distance of 20 feet of lead length. 19. Ballasts shall provide for instant start of lamps at 0 Degrees F where

fixtures are located outside. 20. Use one lamp and two lamp ballasts where dual level switching is

required. Refer to Fluorescent Fixture Wiring requirements in this specification section for limitations.

21. Ballast shall carry five year warranty, including labour allowance.

2.7.3 Compact Fluorescent Ballast – Electronic Type:

1. Ballasts shall be meet requirements of paragraph B. above with the

following exceptions noted below:

a. Ballasts shall be programmed rapid start. b. Ballasts shall be multi-voltage and shall operate with an input

source of 108 volts through 305 volts and sustained variations +/- 10% with no damage to the ballasts.

c. Ballasts shall have a minimum ballast factor of 0.93 for 13 watt

through 42 watt T4 and T5 compact fluorescent lamps. d. Input current Total Harmonic Distortion shall not exceed 10%. e. Ballasts shall have a power factor greater than 0.96. f. Ballasts shall incorporate lamp shutdown circuitry for end of

lamp life protection. g. Ballasts shall allow for re-lamping without the need to cycle

power.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 88 of 95


h. Ballasts shall be furnished with poke-in wire tap connectors or

integral leads colour-coded to ANSI C82.11 where applicable. 2.7.4 Fluorescent Ballast - Dimming Type:

1. 1% Fluorescent dimming ballast shall be Lutron type Hi-lume® series. 2.7.5 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballast:

1. Pulse start type - metal halide. 2. Ballasts shall have a ballast factor of 1.0 and a power factor of .90

minimum. 3. Ballasts shall have no exposed live parts. 4. Line current during starting shall be less than normal operating current. 5. Allowable line voltage range +/- 5%. 6. Outdoor ballast shall operate to 0 degrees F. 7. All H.I.D. ballasts for indoor use shall be magnetically isolated from all

steel fixture parts and vibration isolated from mounting surfaces. 8. Extra quiet ballast shall be furnished wherever H.I.D. fixtures are

specified. All ballasts for lamps less than 400 watt shall be "B" sound rated. Any noisy ballast shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Acceptable noise levels will be judged by the Architect and/or Engineer.

2.8 LENSES / LOUVERS / TRIM 2.8.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. American Louver. 2. A.L.P. Lighting and Ceiling Systems. 3. Fixture Manufacturers' Standard.

2.8.2 All lenses and louvers shall be positively held within the door frame so that the

lenses/louvers will not fall out when hinged door is opened or fixture trim is removed.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 89 of 95


2.8.3 Recessed fixtures with removable trim that serves as ceiling trim, provide trim

that is positively held to the fixture body by adjustable means that permit the trim to be drawn up to the ceiling as tight as necessary to insure complete contact of trim with ceiling.

2.8.4 Plastic fixture lenses and diffusers, 100% clear virgin acrylic material. Lenses

shall be minimum 0.125 overall thickness. 2.8.5 Where fixture glass lenses are specified glass lenses shall be provided and

plastic lenses shall not be substituted. 2.8.6 Provide clear tube guards over exposed fluorescent lamps in all strip and

industrial fixtures in unfinished spaces. Equal to ALP Protect-A-Lamp. 2.9 LAMPS 2.9.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

1 G.E. 2. Osram-Sylvania

3. Philips Lighting Company

4. Lithonia 5. Venture

2.9.2 General

1. In areas where there is exposed food, clean equipment, utensils, and linens, or unwrapped single-service and single use articles lamps shall be shielded, coated, or otherwise shatter-resistant.

2.9.3 Incandescent Lamps:

1. None shall be used 2.9.4 Tungsten Halogen Lamps:

1. All Tungsten Halogen lamps shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. Rated at 230 V and sizes as noted in Lighting Fixture Schedule.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 90 of 95


2.9.5 Low Voltage Lamps:

1. All Low Voltage lamps shall be of the same manufacturer (Sylvania or Philips).

2. Rated at 12 V and sizes as noted in Lighting Fixture Schedule. 3. Minimum Lamp life of 4000 hours.

2.9.6 Fluorescent Lamps (230V):

1. General

a. All Fluorescent lamps shall be of the same manufacturer. b. Lamps in remodeled areas shall match colour of existing lamps

in area. c. Lamps shall conform to ANSI C78 d. Colour - Kelvin temperature of lamps shall be 3500 K, or as

noted on lighting fixture schedule. e. Minimum colour rendering index (CRI) of 82.

2. T5 Lamps

a. Lamps shall be rated at:

1) Normal Output - 28 watts (48”), 21 watts (36”) nominal. 2) High Output - 54 watts (48”), 39 watts (36”) nominal.

b. Initial rated lumen output shall be minimum @ 77 degrees F:

1) Normal Output - 2,600 lumens (48”), 1,890 lumens (36”) 2) High Output – 4,400 lumens (48”), 3,080lumens (36”)

c. Lamp shall have mini bi-pin base. d. Rated lamp life shall be a minimum of 20,000 hours. e. Maximum length of 48” nominal.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 91 of 95


3. T8 Lamps

a. Lamps shall be rated at 32 watts (48”), 25 watts (36”) nominal. b. Lamp shall have medium bi-pin base. c. Initial rated lumen output shall be minimum 2,850 lumens (48”),

2,225 lumens (36”) d. Rated lamp life shall be a minimum of 20,000 hours. e. Maximum length of 48”.

2.9.7 Compact Fluorescent

a. Lamps shall be rated at 13, 18, 26, 32, 42 watts nominal as noted on fixture schedule.

b. Lamp shall have base compatible with fixture socket. c. Rated lamp life shall be a minimum of 10,000 hours.

2.9.8 H. Metal Halide Lamps:

1. All Metal Halide lamps shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. All Metal Halide lamps shall be pulse start. 3. Rated lamp operating position shall be suited for fixture. 4. Lamp shall have base compatible with fixture socket. 5. Fixture wattage shall be as on Lighting Fixture Schedule. 6. Rated lamp life shall be minimum of 15,000 hours-vert./10,000 hours-

Hor. Through 150 watt lamps, and 20,000 hours-vert./15,000 hours-Hor. through 1000 watt lamps.

7. Minimum colour rendering index (CRI) of 75 through 150 watt lamps

and 65 through 1000 watt lamps. 8. Lamps shall be clear or coated, as specified or as required for proper

fixture performance. 2.10 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WIRING



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 92 of 95


2.10.1 Where there are two or more fluorescent lamps in a single fixture, or dual

level control is indicated on the drawings, multiple-lamp ballasts shall be used to the greatest extent possible and the following tandem wiring configurations shall apply:

1. One-lamp electronic ballasts may be used only if there are an odd

number of fixtures in the room, or if a fixture is separated by more than 10 feet from any other fixture with electronic ballasts or if the nearest fixture is on another control circuit. Otherwise, a lamp in one fixture shall be tandem wired, that is, connected to a multi-lamp ballast in another fixture.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed


3.1.2 Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Architect’s and/or interior designer’s reflected ceiling plans show actual

location of fixtures. Report to Architect/Engineer any conflict between these plans and electrical documents.

3.2.2 Architect’s and/or interior designer’s elevation and/or section plans may show

actual location of fixtures that are not documented on the reflected ceiling plans. If fixtures are not shown on elevations and/or sections, install at height noted on the electrical documents. Report to Architect/Engineer any conflict between these plans and electrical documents.

3.2.3 Verify adequacy of headroom and non-interference with other equipment such

as ducts, pipes, and openings. Report to Architect/Engineer any conflict between these plans and electrical documents.

3.2.4 Install fixtures in mechanical and unfinished areas after ductwork and piping

installation. Adjust fixture locations to provide the best lighting for equipment access and service locations. Locate fixtures 8’ 6 “above floor, or at suitable locations within space or on walls but not lower than 7’-0”.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 93 of 95


3.2.5 Adjustable fixtures, track fixtures, floodlights and accent lights shall be aimed

as directed by the Architect/Interior Designer/Engineer. Outdoor landscape and accent lighting shall be aimed in periods of darkness.

3.2.6 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and applicable

requirements of NEC. 3.2.7 Provide proper bushings for wire entrances. Ground fixture chassis to conduit

system. 3.2.8 Coordinate with trades so lighting fixtures are properly aligned with items such

as diffusers, grilles, and speakers where applicable. 3.2.9 If necessary, relocate fixtures as directed so there will be no conflict with other

equipment. 3.2.10 Align stem mounted fixtures using swivel aligners and stem lengths as

required. Verify stem lengths. 3.2.11 Make fixture holes for wire entrance with knock-out punches or hole saw,

remove burrs. Do not cut holes with tin snips. 3.2.12 Special care shall be taken to assure light-tight joints between recessed

fixtures and ceiling. 3.2.13 Recessed lighting fixtures which are installed in a rough textured ceiling

surface whereby light may be emitted between fixture frame and ceiling surface shall have a black self- adhesive polyfoam gasket installed around inside edges of frame to prevent light leaks.

3.2.14 Install fixtures in a workmanlike manner. Care shall be taken in placement of

fixture outlets and surface-mounted fixtures to maintain alignment, spacing, layout, and general arrangement shown on drawings. Contractor may vary these dimensions slightly in order to clear obstructions. Any major changes in the arrangement must be approved by Engineer.

3.2.15 Align and plumb rows of light fixtures. 3.2.16 Provide additional trim as required for neat plumbing of recessed fluorescent

lights mounted in patterns. 3.2.17 Maintain clearance as required in Section 410-66 of the NEC. Notify Engineer

of any conflict, prior to roughing-in.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 94 of 95


3.2.18 Comply with all relevant Federal, State, Local, and Agency guidelines when disposing of lighting waste. Most fluorescent and HID lamps require special handling and disposal procedures.

3.3 FIXTURE SUPPORTS 3.3.1 Mount wall and ceiling fixtures independent and secure so that they are not

dependent on finish or ceiling system for support and cannot be rotated or displaced.

3.3.2 Fixtures shall be supported from structure. 3.3.3 See Specification 6-190 for fixture support items. 3.4 ADJUST, CLEAN, AND LUBRICATE 3.4.1 Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris prior to acceptance. 3.4.2 Adjust and plumb units for proper mounting and installation. 3.4.3 Lubricate door hinges and latches and unit retaining screws where applicable

for ease of operation and maintenance. 3.4.4 Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction

period. 3.4.5 Adjust adjustable fixtures to satisfaction of Engineer. Adjustable exterior

lighting fixtures, such as floodlights, shall be adjusted after dark. 3.4.6 Remove conspicuous trade labels.



21-SEP-2016

Rev. A

Page 95 of 95


3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and after building circuitry

has been energized; apply electrical energy to demonstrate performance and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then reset to demonstrate compliance, otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

3.5.2 At time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are

observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Engineer.

- END OF SECTION -

Pt. LISAS 132/66KV GROUND GRID STUDY

Technical Specification - Electrical &

Mechanical Supplemental Requirements

Date: 21st September, 2016

Document Number: 1207-GE-01-500/600

SYLVESTER ENGINEERING LTD. 30A Vierra Drive Champs Fleurs Trinidad, West Indies Tel: +1 868 662 7935 Fax: +1 868 662 9562 Web: www.syleng.com

© Copyright 2016 Sylvester engineering Limited Document No: 1152-1-N008-P002

Disclaimer This specification has been prepared on behalf of and for the exclusive and confidential use of our Client, and is subject to and issued in accordance with the agreement between The Client and Moulton Mayers Architects. The opinions, determinations, evaluations, recommendations, appraisals, and advice delivered or given by SYLENG in this specification represent only its informed professional judgment, consistent with professional industry standards, based on data and information reasonably available to it or obtained from The Client Consequently, SYLENG shall not be liable for any cost, expense, loss or damage sustained by The Client as a result of the manner in which such services were in good faith performed by SYLENG, or as a result of the failure of SYLENG in good faith to perform any service, or as result of the reliance by The Client or any other party on any determination, recommendation or projection made or advice given by SYLENG, except to the extent SYLENG is guilty of gross negligence or willful misconduct. Copying this specification without the permission of The Client or SYLENG is not

permitted.

REV DESCRIPTION ORIG REVIEW SYLENG

APPROVAL DATE CLIENT

APPROVAL DATE

A

ISSUE FOR TENDER

____________

_____________

_____________

21-SEP-16

___________

_________

G. Mitchell T. Sylvester T. Sylvester CLIENT

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL & MECHANICAL SUPPLEMENTAL

REQUIREMENTS

Document No 1207-GE-01-500-600

21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 3 of 53


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 REFERENCES 5

1.2 DEFINITIONS 5

1.3 SCOPE 6

1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7

1.5 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS 8

1.6 MODIFICATIONS IN LAYOUT 9

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI’S) 10

1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 10

1.9 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS 10

1.10 SITE VISIT 11

1.11 CODES, STANDARDS, AUTHORITIES AND PERMITS 12

1.12 GUARANTEES AND 24 HOUR SERVICE 15

1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS 16

1.14 ELECTRONIC MEDIA 17

1.15 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 19

1.16 PROTECTION OF WORK 20

1.17 SUBMITTALS 20

1.18 UTILITY COSTS 28

1.19 TEMPORARY/CONTINUITY OF UTILITY SERVICES 28

2.1 GENERAL 29

3.1 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES 30

3.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 33

3.3 WELDING 33

3.4 CEILING ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS 35

3.5 PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES 35

3.6 ANCHORS AND INSERTS 38

3.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND GUARDS 39

3.8 ESCUTCHEONS 39

3.9 CORE DRILLING 39

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS TESTING AND BALANCING 40

3.11 ELECTRICAL TESTS 41

3.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 41

3.13 PROVISION AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT 42

3.14 IDENTIFICATION 43


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 4 of 53


3.15 LUBRICATION 44

3.16 PAINTING 45

3.17 EXPANSION PROVISIONS 46

3.18 CLEANING 46

3.19 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURE 48


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 5 of 53


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

A. This entire specification forms an integral part of each HVAC, Electrical,

Plumbing, Fire Protection, Controls and all other related Mechanical and Electrical specifications included in the 5-000 and 6-000 series of the specifications.

B. Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements apply to work of this

Section. Where Paragraphs of this Section conflict with similar paragraphs of the General Requirements, requirements of this Section shall prevail.

C. Examine Drawings and other Sections of Specifications for requirements

that affect work of this Section. D. Attention is directed to the following specialized requirements of this Part I:

1. Article 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) procedure. This Article describes the requirements of the Contractor when submitting RFIs.

2. Article 1.12 GUARANTEES AND 24 HOUR SERVICE. The requirement to provide a 24 hour phone number for service during the guarantee period is incorporated; also, an extended warranty to cover the full one year contractor's guarantee period starting on the date of substantial completion, even if equipment has been previously used for temporary service or other purpose.

3. Article 1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS. A requirement to incorporate photographs, taken during construction, of buried and concealed components is incorporated.

4. Article 1.17 SUBMITTALS. A special cover sheet for each submittal, to be filled out by the contractor, is required. A description of "Acceptable Manufacturers" is included. No other manufacturers will be considered for this project. The turnaround time SYLENG requires to process submittals is defined.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. As used in these Sections:

"Provide,” means "furnish and install”.

"Furnish" means "to purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support"


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 6 of 53


"Install" means "to unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project.

"Architect" means the "Prime Design Consultant"

“SYLENG” means “Sylvester Engineering Ltd. the M&E design consultant, acting on the Architect's/Contractor’s behalf in matters concerning the Mechanical and Electrical services”.

"RFI" means Contractor's “Request for Information."

1.3 SCOPE

A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings

and/or as specified and/or indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of Sections (Divisions 5 and 6) with work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation.

B. Drawings and Specifications form complementary requirements; provide

work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both.

Although work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

C. It is the intent that these Specifications and Drawings are to establish minimum requirements for methods, products and equipment and to provide electrical service, distribution and systems finished, tested and ready for operation. Incidental detail not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in the work and this Contractor's estimate, the same as if specified. Locations of all equipment and material shall be adjusted at no extra cost to the Owner, to accommodate the work interferences anticipated and/or encountered. Prior to installation, determine the exact route and location of each raceway and piece of equipment to minimize conflicts with other trades.

D. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back

charges, and obtain necessary approvals from authorities that have jurisdiction as required to perform work in accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 7 of 53


E. The scope of electrical work shall include all labour, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for, or incidental to proper installation and completion of the work indicated on the Drawings and stated within these Specifications.

1. Unless otherwise noted, provide labour and materials to install

electrical disconnects, pushbutton stations, controllers and motor starters supplied by other trades.

2. Unless otherwise noted, provide labour and materials to make final electrical connections to motors, controllers and starters and electrical interconnections between equipment supplied by other trades.

F. These documents are not intended to be complete construction

documents; they are issued for the purpose of obtaining a guaranteed maximum price (GMP) and are not suitable for takeoff bidding. These documents, do, however, describe the systems required and approximately where the larger equipment is to be located. This contractor shall include allowances in his estimates to fully complete the system including all interconnecting and coordination and installation details and components and extending the system into and throughout all spaces. He shall also include allowances for startup and for making the systems fully operational, and for scope and design contingencies.

Future changes in price above the GMP, for items not shown on these GMP drawings will not be allowed if the system itself is shown or described in these documents. The only future changes in price that will be allowed are if new systems are added.

1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Listing of Drawings does not limit responsibility of determining full extent of

work required by these Contract Documents. Refer to Architectural, HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Structural, Site Utility and all other Drawings and other Sections that indicate types of construction in which work shall be installed and work of other trades with which work of Sections (Divisions 15 and 16) must be coordinated.

B. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be

understood that the indication and/or description of any item, in the drawings or specifications or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description.

C. Items referred to in singular number in Contract Documents shall be


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 8 of 53


provided in quantities necessary to complete work. D. Drawings are diagrammatic. They are not intended to be absolutely

precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, and component. The purpose of the drawings is to indicate a systems concept, the main components of the systems, and the approximate geometrical relationships. Based on the systems concept, the main components, and the approximate geometrical relationships, the contractor shall provide all other components and materials necessary to make the systems fully complete and operational.

E. Information and components shown on riser diagrams but not shown on

plans, and vice versa, shall apply or be provided as if expressly required on both.

F. Data that may be furnished electronically by the Architect (on CD, or

otherwise) is diagrammatic. Such electronically furnished information is subject to the same limitation of precision as heretofore described. If furnished, such data is for convenience and generalized reference, and shall not substitute for Architect's sealed or stamped construction documents.

1.5 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS

A. Where Drawings or Specifications conflict or are ambiguous, advise

Architect in writing before Award of Contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of Contract Documents shall be final, and no additional compensation shall be permitted due to discrepancies or ambiguities thus resolved.

B. Where Drawings or Specifications do not coincide with manufacturers'

recommendations, or with applicable codes and standards, alert Architect in writing before installation.

Otherwise, make changes in installed work as Architect requires within Contract Price.

C. If the required material, installation, or work can be interpreted differently

from drawing to drawing, or between drawings and specifications, this contractor shall provide that material, installation, or work which is of the higher, more stringent standard.

D. It is the requirement of these Contract Documents to have the contractor

provide systems and components that are fully complete, operational and


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 9 of 53


suitable for the intended use. There may be situations in the documents where insufficient information exists to precisely describe a certain component or subsystem, or the routing of a component or its coordination with other building elements. In cases such as this, where the Contractor has failed to notify the Architect of the situation in accordance with Paragraph (A) above, the Contractor shall provide the specific component or subsystem with all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in workmanlike manner either concealed or exposed per the design intent.

E. In cases covered by Paragraph (D) above, where the Contractor believes he needs engineering guidance, he shall submit a sketch identifying his proposed solution and the Architect shall review and advise of disposition (refer to Article 1.7).

1.6 MODIFICATIONS IN LAYOUT

A. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical Drawings are

diagrammatic. They indicate general arrangements of mechanical and electrical systems and other work. They do not show all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to coordinate with structure and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements.

B. In order to obtain the Architect's desired aesthetics in spaces used by

building occupants, in all such spaces, prior to installation of visible material and equipment (including access panels) review Architectural Drawings for desired locations and where not definitely indicated, request information from Architect.

C. Check Contract Documents, as well as, Submittals and Shop Drawings of

all subcontractors to verify and coordinate spaces in which work of Divisions 5 and 6 will be installed.

D. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. All piping, duct, conduit and

associated components to be as tight to underside of structure as possible.

E. Make reasonable modifications in layout and components needed to

prevent conflict with work of other trades and to coordinate according to Paragraphs A, B, C and D above.

Systems shall be run in a rectilinear fashion.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 10 of 53


F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval (refer to Article 1.7).

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI’S)

A. If the RFI is a request to resolve a conflict or an ambiguity, or a request for

additional detail, Contractor's RFI shall include a sketch or equivalent description of Contractor's proposed solution, in accordance with paragraphs 1.5 (E) and 1.6 (F) above.

B. To expedite the flow of RFI's, for all RFI's under Divisions 5 and 6,

Contractor shall submit the attached form, or similar form including the same information, to the Architect, with copy to SYLENG. Contractor shall include proposed solution in the indicated space on the form.

1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. When included as part of the Contract Documents, there shall be full

cooperation and coordination of all specialty trades. B. The Division 5 and 6 Contractors shall both comply fully with the

requirements set forth in the “Coordination Drawings” specification section. At a minimum, this shall include the following trades:

1. Mechanical Ductwork 2. Mechanical Piping 3. Plumbing 4. Electrical 5. Fire Protection (sprinkler system) 6. Controls 7. Special Building Systems

C. Refer to the Coordination Drawings specification section for specific

requirements. 1.9 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following work is required by, but not specified in, Division 5 and 6 and

shall be performed in compliance with the appropriate Sections.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 11 of 53


1. Excavation and backfill. 2. Concrete work, including concrete housekeeping pads and other pads

and blocks for vibrating and rotating equipment, duct bank envelopes and cast-in-place manholes and hand holes.

3. Cutting and patching of masonry, concrete, tile and other parts of structure, with the exception of drilling for hangers and providing holes and openings in metal decks.

4. Flashing of wall and roof penetrations. 5. Installation of access panels in floors, walls, and furred spaces or

above ceilings. 6. Painting, except as specified herein. 7. Structural supports necessary to distribute loading from equipment to

roof or floor, except as specified herein. 8. Temporary light, power, water, and sanitary facilities for use during

construction and testing. 9. Outdoor air intake and exhaust louvers.

1.10 SITE VISIT

A. Before submitting bid, visit and carefully examine site to identify existing

conditions and difficulties that will affect work of Divisions 5 and 6. No extra payment will be allowed for additional work caused by unfamiliarity with site conditions that are visible or readily construed by an experienced observer.

B. Contractor shall visit job site to familiarize himself with the specific location of the new equipment installations in existing areas, to ensure there is adequate access for the installation of equipment. All entries, pathways, corridors, stairwells, etc., that may be used to install equipment shall be investigated. All existing conditions and potential obstructions that may impede access and installation shall be addressed prior to equipment purchasing/ordering. Refer to 3.13 Installation of Equipment in this specification section for information regarding equipment installation.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 12 of 53


1.11 CODES, STANDARDS, AUTHORITIES AND PERMITS

A. Perform work strictly as required by rules, regulations, standards,

codes, ordinances, and laws of local governments, and other authorities that have legal jurisdiction over the site.

B. Prior to commencement of work, notify Regional Corporation and

applicable authorities as required and submit all of the applicable notifications for construction, operation and/or demolition.

C. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and

tested as specified in latest editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of:

1. Local building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire and health

department codes. 2. Air Movement and Controls Association, Inc. (AMCA) 3. American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE). 4. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI). 5. Factory Mutual Association (FM). 6. Mechanical Contractors Association (MCA). 7. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS). 8. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 9. National Electric Code (NEC). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 12. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI). 13. American Insurance Association (A.I.A.) (formerly

National Board of Fire Underwriters). 14. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 16. Water Conditioning Foundation (WCF). 17. Owner’s Insurance Underwriter.

D. Material and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), and approved by ASME, ANSI, ASTM, and AGA for intended service.

E. Fire protection equipment shall be listed by Underwriters’

Laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual (FM) approved for fire service.

F. When requirements cited in this Specification conflict with each


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 13 of 53


other or with Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern work. Architect may relax this requirement when such relaxation does not violate ruling of authorities that have jurisdiction. Approval for such relaxation shall be obtained in writing.

G. Most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of

the following organizations form part of these Contract Documents.

1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 4. American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning

Engineers (ASHRAE). 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 6. American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE). 7. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE). 8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 9. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 10. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve &

Fittings Industry (HSS) 11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 13. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). 14. Mechanical Contractors Association (MCA). 15. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 16. National Electric Code (NEC). 17. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 18. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 19. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 20. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI). 21. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association (SMACNA). 22. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA). 23. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 24. Water Conditioning Foundation (WCF).

H. The complete installation shall comply with the following codes:

1. NFPA 1 2000 Fire Prevention Code 2. NFPA 13 2007 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 3. NFPA 13R 2007 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler

Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height.

4. NFPA 14 2000 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 14 of 53


5. NFPA 20 1999 Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps

6. NFPA 25 1998 Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems

7. NFPA 37 1998 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines

8. NFPA 51B 1999 Standard for Fire Protection during Welding 9. NFPA 70 2002 National Electrical Code 10. NFPA 72 1999 National Fire Alarm Code 11. NFPA 780 1997 Installation of Lightning Protection

Systems 12. NFPA 90A 2002 Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 13. NFPA 96 2008 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire

Prevention of Commercial Cooking Operations 14. NFPA 101 2000 Life Safety Code 15. NFPA 110 2005 Standard for Emergency and Standby

Power 16. A17.1 1993 Elevator Code 18. ANSI A117-1 1998 Accessibility Code 19. AMCA 210 (latest edition) Laboratory Methods of Testing

Fans for Rating Purposes 20. AMCA 310 (latest edition) Reverberant Room Method for Sound

Testing of Fans 21. AMCA 500 (latest edition) Test Method for Louvers,

Dampers, and Shutters 22. ARI 410 (latest edition) Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air

Heating Coils I. Secure and pay for all permits and inspections required by any of

the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 15 of 53


1.12 GUARANTEES AND 24 HOUR SERVICE

A. Guarantee the Work of this Section in writing for one year following

the date of Substantial Completion. If the equipment is used for ventilation, etc. prior to initial beneficial occupancy by the Owner, the bid price shall include an extended period of warranty covering the one-year of occupancy, starting from the initial date of beneficial occupancy by the Owner. The guarantee shall repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and installation that develop within this period, promptly and to Architect's satisfaction and correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee within Contract Price.

B. In addition to guarantee requirements of the General Conditions

and of Paragraph A above, obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer's published data without exclusion or limitation, in Owner's name.

C. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service

during guarantee period as defined and as directed by Architect. D. Provide 24-hour service beginning on the date of Substantial

Completion and lasting until the termination of the guarantee period. Service shall be at no cost to the Owner. This contractor or a separate service organization can provide Service. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Architect and Owner approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24-hour basis each day of the week, for the duration of the service.

E. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Architect as

part of the close-out documents before final payment. F. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturers' equipment and

material warranties still in force to Owner. G. This Article shall not be interpreted to limit Owner's rights under

applicable codes and laws and under this Contract. H. Specific Paragraphs of the Specification sections may specify

warranty requirements that exceed those of this Article. I. Use of systems provided under Divisions 5 and 6 for temporary

services and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of work nor beneficial use by Owner, and shall not institute guarantee


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 16 of 53


period. J. Provide manufacturer's engineering and technical staff at site to

analyze and rectify problems that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified immediately to Owner's satisfaction, advise Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. Architect will suggest course of action.

1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. As work progresses and for duration of Contract, maintain a

complete and dedicated set of Contract Documents (including drawings and specifications) at the job site at all times, to become the Record Documents. Record work completed and all changes from original Contract Documents clearly and accurately, including work installed as a modification or addition to the original design. This shall be updated, at a minimum weekly, and will be reviewed prior to each Claim Application approval.

B. Take photographs of all concealed equipment in gypsum board

ceilings, shafts, underground (buried) piping routes and supports and other concealed, inaccessible work. At completion of work, make copies of photographs with written explanation for each photo. These shall become part of Record Documents.

C. Underground and utility work shall be located by distances to

landmarks, such as building foundations. Give actual dimensions of everything installed including elevations and elevations at each change in direction.

D. Drawings shall also show record condition of details, sections, riser

diagrams, control changes and corrections to schedules. Schedules shall incorporate actual manufacturer and make and model numbers of final equipment installation.

E. THE ENGINEER/ARCHITECT WILL NOT CERTIFY THE

ACCURACY OF THE RECORD DRAWINGS - THIS IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.

F. When required by the jurisdiction, each trade shall submit the

record set for approval by the building department in a form acceptable to the department. Any document format size changes, and supplemental information required for the submittal are the


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 17 of 53


responsibility of the contractor. G. The Record Documents shall include at a minimum:

1. Actual location of existing utilities. 2. Field changes to installation that differs from original design

documents. 3. Document revisions associated with RFI responses,

Supplemental Instructions, Site Instructions, and Change Orders, etc.

H. Quality of Record Documents shall equal or exceed that of original

Contract Documents.

I. The record documents shall be submitted in electronic media format to the Architect/Engineer for review and approval, prior to Application for

Final Payment. 1.14 ELECTRONIC MEDIA

A. Electronic media of SYLENG’s Contract Documents may be

provided on requested by the Contractor subject to the discretion of SYLENG. A processing fee of $500 will be charged, plus $20 per drawing for each drawing above a total of 20. Requests should be made by filling out the following form and providing an authorized signature. These files will be provided on CD in AutoCAD Release 2008 format. If any other media or AutoCAD version is requested, then additional fee may be required. SYLENG will not release the information requested prior to receipt of both the completed Release of Liability form and a check for the appropriate documents.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 18 of 53


Sylvester Engineering Ltd.

ELECTRONIC MEDIA DOCUMENTS PROPERTY RIGHTS AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

______________________ ________________________ (replace with appropriate Corporation name) acknowledges and appreciates that as a favor, without compensation beyond the cost of processing the request, to ________________________, Sylvester Engineering Ltd., (hereinafter SYLENG) will provide to us certain electronic media files for use on the above referenced project for our own preparation of shop and/or coordination drawings. We assume all responsibility to determine if this information is applicable and/or accurate for intended use. ________________________ agrees to accept the electronic media files from SYLENG without any warranties, guarantees or other representation of any nature concerning the accuracy or completeness of any information described or depicted therein with respect to any dimensions, measurements, fit, field construction conditions, or criteria. ________________________ further agrees to release, indemnify and hold harmless SYLENG with respect to any claims, cost and/or liabilities between SYLENG and ourselves and/or a third party to whom we release information, arising out of or relating to the accuracy and/or completeness of this information. All materials in the nature of electronic media files are instruments of SYLENG for use solely with respect to this Project and SYLENG shall be deemed the author of these documents and shall retain all common law and statutory and other reserved rights including copyright thereto. Notwithstanding the foregoing, such copies of electronic media documents shall not be used by the Contractor on other projects, for additions to this Project or for completion of this Project by others. I certify that I am an officer of ________________________ and authorized by same to provide and agree to the above terms and conditions. For ____________________ _________________ Signature ___________________ Print Name __________________ Title ____________________ Date

Drawing List Requested ____________________________________________________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________

____________________________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ __________________________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 19 of 53


1.15 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, three copies of operation, lubrication

and maintenance manuals for all items. Assemble literature in coordinated manuals with additional information describing combined operation of field assembled units, including as-built wiring diagrams. Manual shall contain names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives who stock or furnish repair parts for items or equipment. Divide manuals into three sections or books as follows: 1. Directions for and sequence of operation of each item of the Mechanical

and Electrical systems, e.g., air handling units, boilers, domestic water pump, generator, etc. Sequence shall list valves, switches and other devices used to start, stop and control system. Detail procedure to be followed in case of malfunctions. Include detailed approved flow diagrams of temperature control, heating, condensate, chilled water, condenser water, etc., as appropriate for systems provided. Include approved valve directory showing each valve number, location of each valve, and equipment or fixture controlled by valve.

2. Detailed maintenance and troubleshooting manuals containing data

furnished by manufacturer for complete maintenance. Include copy of Engineer-approved balancing report.

3. Lubrication instructions detailing type of lubricant, amount, and intervals

recommended by manufacturer for each item of equipment. Include additional instructions necessary for implementation of first class lubrication program. Include approved summary of lubrication instructions in chart form, where appropriate.

B. The manuals shall include the following and shall have an index of contents

and tabs for each Specification Section and each piece of equipment specified in that Section and be provided in the order listed below, per Specification Section.

1. Copies of all approved submittals/shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists of

all items or equipment. Where manufacturer's data includes several types or models, the applicable type or model shall be clearly designated.

3. Startup and shutdown procedures. 4. Flow diagrams. 5. Test records. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Composite electrical diagrams. 8. Owner's written acknowledgement of satisfactory completion of instruction


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 20 of 53


period. C. The operation manuals and instructions to the Owner are of prime importance

and shall be provided prior to request for final payment. D. Furnish three copies of manuals to Architect for approval and distribution to

Owner. Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit Owner's personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance.

E. Provide framed and glazed charts as follows (mount as directed by Owner or

Architect): 1. Flow diagrams from first part of manual as described above. 2. Valve directory. 3. Lubrication chart from third part of manual.

F. Operating instructions: Upon completion of installation or when Owner

accepts portions of building and equipment for operational use, instruct Owner's operating personnel in any or all parts of all systems. Factory-trained personnel shall perform instructions.

Owner shall determine which systems require additional instructions. Duration of instructions shall take equipment through complete cycle of operation (at least five working days). Make adjustments under operating conditions.

1.16 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Each contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until finally

inspected, tested, and accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment, which are not immediately installed after delivery to site. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plug during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.

B. Each separate contractor shall protect the work and material of other trades

that might be damaged by his work or workmen and make good all damage thus caused.

1.17 SUBMITTALS

A. This Article supplements the Contractor’s General Requirements.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 21 of 53


B. Definitions:

1. Shop Drawings are information prepared by the Contractor to illustrate portions of the work, such as ductwork layout arrangements, in more detail than shown in the Contract Documents.

2. Coordination Drawings are detailed, large-scale layout Shop Drawings

showing HVAC, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection work superimposed in order to identify conflicts and ensure inter-coordination of Mechanical, Electrical, Architectural, Structural and other work.

3. Submittals are a compilation of product data cut sheets fully describing

performance, size, connections, colour selection, etc., as provided by the manufacturer.

C. Submittal Cover Sheet

1. Submittal data for each product shall include a copy of the following cover sheet completely filled out. Incomplete or incorrect cover sheet submittal shall constitute reason for rejection.

2. Shop drawings/submittals shall be submitted according to applicable

specification section’s requirements with a separate cover sheet completed for each product, rather than one cover sheet for multiple products, whether or not supplied by one manufacturer or vendor.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 22 of 53


SHOP DRAWING COVER SHEET PROJECT:

CONTRACTOR:

DIVISION NO.:

SECTION NO.:

DESCRIPTION: CONTRACT DRAWING REFERENCE NO: EQUIPMENT TAG: SUBMISSION (CIRCLE ONE): FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH DATE: INFORMATION AND CHECKLIST 1.

Contractor's Log #ID

2. Name, address, and phone number of supplier.

3. Are all specified or scheduled items included and exactly match scheduled/specified items?

Yes No

4. Is this item a substitution?

Yes No

5.

Are deviations clearly identified?

Yes No

6. Does equipment fit space shown on construction documents, coordination drawings, and actual field conditions?

Yes

No

7. Has support, erection, weights, and installation been coordinated with all trades?

Yes No

8. Does the proposed installation void warranties and/or violate UL or code requirements?

Yes

No

9. Does this material/equipment add expense to any other trade or project costs?

Yes No


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 23 of 53


10. Does equipment require interface with other trades? List divisions and specifics requiring coordination?

Yes

No

11. Is control interface coordinated?

Yes No

12. List electrical characteristics (V/Ph/A)

D. Submittal Procedures and Format

1. Review submittal packages for compliance with Contract Documents and

then submit to Architect for review. Submit reproducible drawing and two blue- or black-line reproductions of each Shop Drawing larger than A4. Submit four sets of each smaller shop drawing. After review, reproducible original or electronic copy, of each large Shop Drawing and three sets of each small shop drawing will be returned with reviewer's marks.

2. Submittals and shop drawings shall be submitted COMPLETE, by trade, in

heavy-duty three-ring binders. Each binder shall include a Table of Contents identifying each section. Each section shall be arranged in order of specification section and tabbed accordingly. Each item submitted shall reference the article and paragraph of its specification section. Each item specified shall be addressed. If specified item will not be used, state so in submittal with brief explanation. (Example: Globe Valves - N/A, use ball and butterfly valves.) In the instance when a resubmission is necessary, resubmit only the items required; a complete re-submittal containing previously approved data is not required.

3. Submittals and/or shop drawings associated with long lead items required

on this project shall be submitted within 30 days after Notice to Proceed has been issued.

4. Provide additional copies of approved submittals/shop drawings as

required for full distribution. 5. Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans,

elevations, sections, details and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be 1/4 inches = 1 foot 0 inch scale unless specified otherwise. Sheet Metal Shop Drawings shall be 3/8 inch = 1 foot 0 inch and shall indicate work of other Sections where physical clearances are critical and where interferences are possible. Provide larger scale details as necessary. Sheet Metal Drawings shall show elements of Architect's reflected ceiling plan, exposed ductwork, walls, partitions, diffusers, registers, grilles, fire


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 24 of 53


dampers, sleeves and other aspects of construction as necessary for coordination. Submit one reproducible plus two prints of each shop drawing.

6. ALL FIREWALLS AND SMOKE PARTITIONS MUST BE HIGHLIGHTED

ON THE SHEETMETAL DRAWINGS FOR APPROPRIATE COORDINATION.

7. Shop drawings and submittals showing manufacturer's product data shall

contain detailed dimensional drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer's published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract Documents.

8. Provide shop drawing submittals showing details of piping connections to

ALL equipment. If connection details are not submitted and connections are found to be installed incorrectly in the field, this contractor shall reinstall them within the original contract price.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. The Engineer’s mechanical/electrical design for each product is based on

the manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the drawings. In Part 2 of the specifications certain Alternate Manufacturers are listed as being acceptable.

The listing of a manufacturer as acceptable does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included herein. These are acceptable only if, as a minimum, they: a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the

specification. For example, to be acceptable, an air-handling unit must deliver equal CFM against equal external static pressure using equal or fewer horsepower as the air handler listed in the schedules.

b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the specification. For example, a two-stroke diesel generator will not be acceptable if a four-stroke model is specified.

c. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and component removal, with no modification to either the space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the design


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 25 of 53


drawings. The fact that a manufacturer’s name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to mean that the Engineer has determined that the manufacturer’s products will fit within the available space - this determination is solely the responsibility of the contractor.

d. For rooftop mounted equipment and for equipment mounted in areas where structural matters are a consideration, the products must have a weight no greater than the product listed in the schedules or specifications.

e. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including but not limited to: being of the same color as the product scheduled or specified, fitting within architectural enclosures and details, and for diffusers, lighting and plumbing fixtures - being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified products.

f. All equipment shall be labeled or listed by the National Board of Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) where such labeling or listing exists for such material.

F. Required Use of Acceptable Manufacturers on this Project:

1. Substitution of products other than those of the Acceptable Manufacturers specified herein shall not be made. Only the specified items or the comparable product by one of the specified Alternate Manufacturers shall be submitted. Products by other manufacturers shall not be used on this project.

2. Listing of a manufacturer's name for a particular material or piece of

equipment does not imply acceptance of all of that manufacturer's products. Use of more than one manufacturer to supply any specific material or equipment shall have prior approval of the Architect/Engineer.

G. Deviations

1. Concerning deviations other than substitutions, proposed deviations from

Contract Documents should be requested individually in writing whether deviations result from field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause.

Submit letter with transmittal of submittals/shop drawings which flags the deviation to the attention of the Architect.

2. Without letters flagging the deviation to the Architect, it is possible that the

Architect may not notice such deviation or may not realize its ramifications. Therefore, if such letters are not submitted to the Architect, the contractor shall hold the Architect and his consultants harmless for any and all adverse consequences resulting from the deviations being


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 26 of 53


implemented. This shall apply regardless of whether the Architect has reviewed or approved submittals/shop drawings containing the deviation, and will be strictly enforced.

3. Approval of proposed deviations, if any, will be made at the discretion of

the Architect.

4. Where equipment or methods different than those specified are submitted by this Contractor and approved for use by the Engineer and Owner, the installation shall be in full conformance with the intent of these Contract Documents. All costs related to the use of the different method and/or equipment shall be paid by this Contractor.

H. Submittal Dispositions: Submittals will be returned from the Engineer marked

as illustrated below:

APPROVED - Submitted data is in compliance with Contract Document requirements; item is approved for release.

APPROVED AS NOTED - Submitted data is generally in compliance with

Contract Document requirements with minor notations; no resubmission required. Item is approved for release if engineers’ notations are addressed.

NOT APPROVED - Submitted data in no way complies with Contract

Document requirements; resubmission of specified manufacturer or equipment is required. Item is not approved for release.

REVISE AND RESUBMIT - Submitted data contains deviations, is

incomplete, or requires further clarification any of which requires resubmission for confirmation; item is not approved for release.

NOT REVIEWED - Submitted data is not required to be submitted for

Engineer’s approval or was incorrectly transmitted to the Engineer for review and approval.

I. Responsibility

1. Intent of Submittal review is to check for capacity, rating, and certain

construction features. Contractor shall ensure that work meets requirements of Contract Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; and for coordination of work of this and other


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 27 of 53


Sections. Work shall comply with submittal notations to extent that they agree with Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports and access for service, nor shop drawing errors or deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. The Architect's/Engineer’s noting of some errors while overlooking others will not excuse the Contractor from proceeding in error. Contract Documents requirements are not limited, waived nor superseded in any way by review.

2. INFORM SUBCONTRACTORS, MANUFACTURERS, SUPPLIERS, ETC.,

OF SCOPE AND LIMITED NATURE OF REVIEW PROCESS AND ENFORCE COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

a. The Engineer’s obligations to review shop drawings and other

submittals and to return them in a timely manner are conditioned upon the prior review and approval of the shop drawings or submittals by the Contractor as required in the construction contract and the Contractor’s submittal of the shop drawings and other submittals in accordance with a written schedule distributed in advance to the Engineer identifying the dates for the submittal of the various shop drawings and submittals.

J. Schedule: Incorporate submittal review period into construction schedule so

that Work is not delayed. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for delays caused by not incorporating the following submittal review time requirements into his project schedule.

Working days listed reference the time in the Engineer's office. It does not include transmittal or review time of Contractor or Architect. If more than five submittals/shop drawings of a single trade are received in one week, allow at least five (5) additional working days, exclusive of transmittal time, for review, each time a submittal/shop drawing is submitted or resubmitted.

K. If acceptable to the Architect and Engineer, the Contractor may submit

individual sections (or related sections), provided that they are complete with respect to the items within that section. If individual sections or related sections are permitted in lieu of full binders by trade, they shall be prepared with individual submittal tracking numbers and transmittals for each Specification Section. The Contractor’s request not to use complete binders shall either be made at the Pre-Construction Conference or via fax to the Architect prior to the first submittal.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 28 of 53


1.18 UTILITY COSTS

A. The Contractor shall include all costs from the electrical, water, sewer, etc.,

utility companies that are assessed the Owner for installation of these services. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain these costs from the utility companies and include them in his Bid.

1.19 TEMPORARY/CONTINUITY OF UTILITY SERVICES

A. Refer to General Requirements, regarding specific requirements.

B. Provide temporary services where project construction schedule requires

extended shut downs of existing equipment and/or systems. Temporary services include the necessary equipment and/or systems to maintain continuity of services. Extended shut downs are interruptions of existing services for a period of time longer than that acceptable to the Owner.

C. Coordinate work under Divisions 5 and 6 with progress of construction so that

permanent cooling system will be ready to provide temporary cooling if permitted by Architect as soon as building is closed in.

D. Provide and direct labour required for attendance, operation and final

restoration of permanent cooling system if used for temporary cooling purposes. Owner shall provide continuous direct attendance whenever permanent system is in operation prior to acceptance of permanent cooling system.

E. Heating, air conditioning, humidity control and any other environmental

factors shall be the responsibility of the Contractor throughout the construction period.

F. Do not interrupt existing utility services without written Owner's approval. G. Schedule interruptions in advance, according to Owner's instructions. Submit,

in writing, with request for interruption, methods proposed to minimize length of interruption.

H. Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of day and work so that they

have minimal impact on Owner's operations. I. Contractor shall coordinate any shutdowns of existing systems as follows:

1. Give proper notice to Owner when making shutdowns; a minimum of


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 29 of 53


fourteen full days is required. 2. Minimize timeline of shutdowns of any system. 3. Provide temporary services where required and perform shutdowns and

tie-in at a time convenient to Owner. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for completing and filing the Owner's

shutdown notice questionnaire. 5. Perform required survey and inspection work required by the notice for

shutdown. 6. All life safety systems, including but not limited to automatic sprinklers

shall be returned to service at the end of each work day, when work is being performed on the systems. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all associated appurtenances necessary to ensure that the systems are in proper working condition at all times.

J. Provide all necessary material, tools, and labour as required for the provisions

of temporary services. K. Include premium time work associated with interruptions of services and/or

shutdowns as necessary to avoid disruption to Owner's operations. L. For electrical work associated with Primary power, coordinate with the

Electrical Power Utility Company. M. Complete the following form, indicating what is being included as part of this

bid, and this project. N. For work involving an independent utility company (i.e., non-owner provided

utility), Contractor shall coordinate directly with the utility provider all aspects of related work, including shutdowns, tie-ins, capacity impacts, etc.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to each specific Mechanical and Electrical section for specific details.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 30 of 53


PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other Sections in executing work of

Divisions 5 and 6. 1. Perform work such that progress of entire project including work of other

Sections shall not be interfered with or delayed. 2. Provide information as requested on items furnished under Divisions 5

and 6 which shall be installed under other Sections. 3. Obtain detailed installation information from manufacturers of equipment

provided under Divisions 5 and 6. 4. Obtain final rough-in dimensions or other information as needed for

complete installation of items furnished under Divisions 5 and 6 or by Owner.

5. Keep fully informed as to shape, size and position of openings required for material or equipment to be provided under Divisions 5 and 6 and other Sections. Give full information so that openings required by work of Divisions 5 and 6 may be coordinated with other work and other openings and may be provided for in advance. In case of failure to provide sufficient information in proper time, provide cutting and patching or have same done, at own expense and to full satisfaction of Architect.

6. Provide information as requested as to sizes, number and locations of concrete housekeeping pads necessary for floor-mounted vibrating and rotating equipment provided under Divisions 5 and 6.

7. Notify Architect of location and extent of existing piping, conduit, ductwork and equipment that interferes with new construction. In coordination with and with approval of Architect, relocate piping, ductwork and equipment to permit new work to be provided as required by Contract Documents. Remove non-functioning and abandoned piping, ductwork and equipment as directed by Architect. Dispose of or store items as requested by Architect.

B. Installation Only Items:

1. Where this Contractor is required to install items which he does not purchase, he shall coordinate their delivery and be responsible for their unloading from delivery vehicles and for their safe handling and field storage up to the time of installation.

These trades shall be responsible for: a. Any necessary field assembly and internal connections, as well as

mounting in place of the items, including the purchase and installation


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 31 of 53


of all dunnage supporting members and fastenings necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions.

b. Their connection to building systems including the purchase and

installation of all terminating fittings necessary to adapt and connect them to the building systems.

2. This Contractor shall carefully examine such items upon delivery. Claims

that any of these items have been received in such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of work of this Contractor will be considered only if presented in writing within one week of their date of delivery.

Unless such claims have been submitted, this Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete reconditioning or replacement of the damaged items.

C. Maintenance of equipment and systems: Maintain equipment and systems

until Final Acceptance. Ensure adequate protection of equipment and material during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown and during delays pending final test of systems and equipment because of seasonal conditions.

D. Use of premises: Use of premises shall be restricted as directed by

Architect and as noted below.

1. Remove and dispose of dirt and debris, and keep premises clean. During progress of work, remove equipment and unused material. Maintain building and premises in neat and clean condition, and perform cleaning and washing required to provide acceptable appearance and operation of equipment, to satisfaction of Architect.

2. Store materials in a manner that will maintain an orderly, clean

appearance. If stored on-site in open or unprotected areas, all equipment and material shall be kept off the ground by means of pallets or racks, and covered with tarpaulins.

3. Do not interfere with function of existing sewers and water mains,

electrical or mechanical systems and services. Extreme care shall be taken to prevent debris from entering pipe, ductwork and equipment. Confer with Architect as to disruption of services or other utilities due to testing or connection of new work to existing. Interruption of services shall be performed at time of day or night deemed by Owner to provide minimal interference with normal operation.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 32 of 53


Obtain Owner's approval of the method proposed for minimizing service interruption.

E. Surveys and measurements:

1. Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by Contractor and be responsible for correct laying out of work.

2. Ensure clearances between all underground utilities comply with code

and Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3. Prior to installation of underground utilities which connect to site

utilities provided by others, verify all existing invert elevations. 4. In event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those

indicated, notify Architect in writing and do not proceed with work until written instructions have been issued by Architect.

F. Fireproofing:

1. Clips, hangers, clamps, supports and other attachments to surfaces to be fireproofed shall be installed, insofar as possible, prior to start of spray fiber work.

2. Ducts, piping and other items, which would interfere with proper

application of fireproofing, shall be installed after completion of spray fiber work.

3. Patching and repairing of fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to

fireproofing during course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of fireproofing and paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds for extra cost to Owner.

G. Air-bound Systems

1. If, after plant is in operation, any piping systems, coils or other apparatus are stratified or air bound (by vacuum or pressure), they shall be re-piped with new approved and necessary fittings, air vents, or vacuum breakers at no extra cost to the Owner. If connections are concealed in furring, floors, or ceilings, this trade shall bear all expenses of cutting, patching and refinishing construction and finish, leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed.

H. Miscellaneous


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 33 of 53


1. Unload materials and equipment delivered to site. Pay costs for rigging,

hoisting, lowering and moving mechanical and/or electrical equipment on and around site, in building or on roof.

3.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Work shall be neat and rectilinear. Ductwork, piping, conduit, etc., shall run

concealed except in mechanical rooms and areas where no hung ceiling exists. Install material and equipment as required by manufacturers. Installation shall operate safely and without leakage, undue wear, noise, vibration, corrosion or water hammer. Work shall be properly and effectively protected, and pipe and duct openings shall be temporarily closed to prevent obstruction and damage before completion.

B. Except as specified otherwise, material and equipment shall be new. Provide

supplies, appliances and connections necessary for complete and operational installation.

C. Finish of materials, components and equipment shall be as approved by

Architect and shall be resistant to corrosion and weather as necessary. D. Owner will not be responsible for material and equipment before testing,

commissioning, and acceptance. 3.3 WELDING

A. Weld only by approved acetylene or electric welding processes and welders

shall hold certificate from approved insurance company. B. Conduct test to demonstrate suitability of procedures to be used in making

welds, which conform to specified requirements.

C. Specification for welding procedure shall meet requirements of Welding Qualifications, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ANSI B31.1.

D. Align components. No strain shall be placed on weld during welding. No part

of pipe shall be offset more than 20% of thickness. Set flanges and branches properly.

E. Welder and Brazing Qualification:


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 34 of 53


1. Test welders to demonstrate ability to make acceptable welds. Tests

conducted for qualification of welder for work under one Division or Section shall not necessarily qualify welder for work under another Division or Section.

2. Tests shall be as prescribed for welder qualification in Section IX of the

ASME code. 3. Records of such tests shall be as follows: Each welder shall be assigned

an identifying number, letter or symbol. Identifying mark shall be stamped adjacent to welds made by this welder. Identification shall be at top of horizontal piping and at front of vertical piping.

4. Maintain record of welders employed, showing dates and results of tests

and identifying mark assigned to each welder. Certify records and make them accessible to Owner's project representative and/or project manager. Before completion of project, one copy of records shall be turned over to Owner.

5. No qualification shall be older than three years when welder commences

work on this project. If welder has not welded in required welding process for a period of six months, he shall be re-certified.

F. Welding Tests

1. As designated by Architect, remove welds for destructive testing or for

testing by non-destructive means. Tests shall be as determined by Architect.

2. If, in Architect's opinion, welds so tested do not meet requirements of

Sections VIII and IX of ASME, then the Contractor shall pay for the costs of the tests. Remove welds welded by that welder, at no cost to the Owner. Re-welding shall be performed by qualified welder other than welder whose welds did not pass test. Welders whose welds were defective shall not be employed on site for remainder of project.

3. Welding of stanchions, brackets, anchors and other welding not performed

on pipe joints shall be in accordance with requirements of AWS specifications and requirements.

G. Medical Gas Brazing Certification:

1. Submit a copy of Brazing Qualification as required by NFPA 99

ANSI/ASSE Standard 6010, Professional Qualification Standards for


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 35 of 53


Medical Gas and Vacuum System Installers.

3.4 CEILING ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS

A. Access panels are generally not shown on the drawings, but they are required

to be provided by Contractor.

B. Provide proper access to materials and equipment that require inspection, replacement, repair or service, and coordinate their delivery with the installing Trade. If proper access cannot be provided, confer with Architect as to best method of approach for minimizing effect of reduced access which may result.

C. The maximum distance from the ceiling line to serviceable equipment (i.e., air

terminal boxes, valve handles, volume damper handles, etc.) shall be 24 inches unobstructed, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

D. Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access

panels required to fully service equipment and deliver to a representative of the installing Trade. Furnish and install distinctively coloured buttons (colour as selected by Architect) in finished ceiling to identify all access panels.

E. Ceilings consisting of lay-in or removable splined tiles do not require access

panels. Fire, control dampers, valves and equipment located above ceiling shall have location marked with colour-coded identification screws attached to the ceiling “grid.” Location shall be noted on record drawings.

3.5 PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES

A. General

1. Lay out penetration and sleeve openings in advance, to permit provision in

work. Set sleeves and conduit in forms before concrete is poured. Provide remedial work where sleeves and conduits are omitted or improperly placed.

2. Provide sleeves and packing materials at all penetrations of foundations,

walls, slabs (except on-grade), partitions and floors. Sleeves shall meet U.L. rated assemblies’ requirements and materials requirements of these specifications.

3. Sleeves that penetrate outside walls, basement slabs, footings and beams

shall be waterproof.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 36 of 53


4. Coordinate work carefully with architectural and structural work. Provide

core drilling as necessary if walls are poured or otherwise constructed, without sleeves and a wall penetration is required. Provide core drilling as required for penetrations of existing construction. Do not penetrate structural members without Structural Engineer’s/Architect's approval.

5. Sleeves for insulated pipe and duct in non-fire rated construction shall

accommodate continuous insulation without compression. Sleeves and/or penetrations in fire rated construction shall be packed with fire rated material which shall maintain the fire rating of the wall. Seal ends of penetrations to provide continuous vapour barrier where insulation is interrupted.

6. Submit a list of the U.L. Listed details that the Contractor intends on using

on this project, in all rated walls. 7. Where pipes, etc., passing through openings are exposed in finished

rooms, finishes of filling materials shall match and be flush with adjoining floor, ceiling, and wall finishes.

8. Identify unused sleeves and slots for future installation.

9. Fill slots, sleeves and other openings in floors or walls if not used. Fill spaces in openings after installation of pipe, duct, conduit or cable.

10. Fill for floor penetrations shall prevent passage of water, smoke,

fire, and fumes. Fill shall be fire resistant in fire floors and walls, and shall prevent passage of air, smoke and fumes.

11. Sleeves through floors shall be watertight and shall extend 2 inches

above floor surface. 12. Submit and coordinate with all trades complete penetration layout

drawings showing all openings in building structural members including floor slabs, walls, bearing walls, foundation walls, shear walls, roof penetrations, etc. Indicate and locate, by dimension, all openings that shall be sleeved. Drawings shall be approved by Structural Engineer prior to the preparation of any opening in a structural member. Provide 24 gauge galvanized steel sleeves for all walls, floors, including foundation, stem and exterior walls.

13. All penetrations into libraries, auditoriums, conference rooms, sleep

rooms, etc. must utilize an acoustical sealant in addition to any other sealants required for wall ratings.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 37 of 53


14. Contractor shall maintain complete integrity of all completed waterproofing, weatherproofing, fire rating and penetrations during construction.

B. Pipe and Conduit Sleeves

1. Annular space between pipe/conduit and sleeve shall be at least 1/4 inch. 2. Sleeves are not required for slabs-on-grade unless specified otherwise. 3. Sleeves and packing materials, through rated firewalls and smoke

partitions, shall maintain fire rating of construction penetrated. 4. Do not support piping risers or conduit on sleeves. 5. Where pipe penetrations occur through exterior walls into building spaces,

use steel pipe sleeves with integral water stop, type "WS" wall sleeves by Thunderline Corporation or approved equal. Seal annular space between sleeves and pipe with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seals by Thunderline Corporation, or sealing system by another manufacturer approved as equal by Architect. Where "Link-Seals" are used with insulated pipes, butt insulation against seals on both sides.

6. Penetrations through gypsum board walls do not require flexible couplings

and/or sleeves. Where flexible couplings are used through non-frangible walls, provide one coupling on each side of the wall penetrated, within 1 foot from the face of the wall.

C. Duct Sleeves and Prepared Openings

1. Provide duct sleeves for round ducts 15 inches and smaller; provide

prepared, framed openings for round ducts larger than 15 inches and for square, rectangular and flat oval ducts, except as specified otherwise. Sleeves shall meet SMACNA requirements.

2. Provide sleeves for ducts through 1-, 2- or 3-hour fire-rated construction

and smoke partitions, regardless of size and shape of ducts. Sleeves shall maintain fire rating of construction penetrated. Sleeve and seal materials, construction and clearances shall meet requirements of SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems.

3. Prepared openings shall be framed to provide 1 inch clearance between

framing and duct or duct insulation in non-rated partitions. 4. All duct penetrations through concrete floors in mechanical rooms shall


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 38 of 53


have 2 inches high water stopped curbs surrounding the openings. This applies to mechanical rooms above the lowest floor level.

5. Trim duct penetrations exposed in finished areas with 2 inches wide

galvanized or aluminum trim collars properly sized to fit the duct. Collars to be same gauge as duct, prime finish unless noted otherwise. Finished areas shall not include mechanical rooms, janitor’s closets, storage rooms, etc., unless suspended ceilings are specified.

D. Installation Testing, Listings and Approvals

1. Installation shall meet material manufacturer's recommendations exactly,

particularly regarding safety, ventilation, removal of foreign materials and other details of installation. Dam openings as recommended. Remove flammable materials used for damming and forming seals in fire-rated construction.

2. Sleeve penetration methods shall be water- and gas-tight and shall meet

requirements of ASTM E-119 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

3. Fire-stop penetration seal methods and materials shall be FM-approved

and UL-listed as applicable. 4. Inspect foamed sealant to ensure manufacturer's optimum cell structure

and colour ranges. 3.6 ANCHORS AND INSERTS

A. Provide anchors as necessary for attachment of equipment supports and

hangers. Anchors shall be iron or steel inserts of type to receive machine bolt head or nut after installation.

B. Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one horizontal direction and shall

develop strength of bolt when installed in properly cured concrete. C. Inserts drilled and spaced after concrete pour shall be steel shell with plug

type, not depending on soft lead for holding power.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 39 of 53


3.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND GUARDS

A. Provide all supporting steel not indicated on the structural drawings as

required for the installation of equipment and materials, including angles, channels, beams, hangers, etc. Do not support equipment or piping from metal decking.

B. Provide equipment guards over belt driven assemblies, pump shafts, exposed

fans and elsewhere as indicated in this specification or required by code. C. Where guards are not furnished factory made or integral with equipment, they

shall be constructed by the Contractor. 3.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Install escutcheons around exposed pipe passing through finished floor, floor,

wall, or ceiling. Escutcheons shall be heavy cast brass, chromium-plated, adjustable, and shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover sleeve opening and shall fit snugly around pipe and flush against floor or wall surface.

3.9 CORE DRILLING

A. Core drilling is to be avoided. B. Set sleeves prior to installation of structure for passage of pipes, conduit,

ducts, etc. C. Where core drilling is unavoidable, or required by renovation projects, locate

all required openings prior to coring and submit to Architect for review. D. Coordinate openings with General Contractor/Construction Manager and all

other trades. E. Core drilling is to be provided by the Contractor for General Construction, not

by the M/E subcontractors. F. Do not disturb existing systems. Protect all areas from damage of any type. G. Thoroughly investigate existing conditions in vicinity of required opening prior

to coring.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 40 of 53


3.10 MISCELLANEOUS TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Tests for piping systems and equipment shall be performed as specified in

their respective specification sections. B. Provide all equipment required for testing, including fittings for additional

openings as required. C. Notify the Architect and any Inspectors required to observe the test; at least

48 hours prior to when the test is ready to be performed. D. The General Contractor is responsible for certifying in writing, the results of all

testing of systems and equipment in this contract. These written results will be required at project close-out.

E. Include description and what portion of the system has been tested. Record

date, time, test medium and pressure used, name and title of the person certifying the test. This person shall sign the certification. Forms and data must be legible.

F. When equipment or systems fail to meet minimum test requirements, replace

or repair defective work or materials as necessary, and repeat the inspection and test. Make repairs with new materials. No caulking of holes or screwed joints will be allowed.

G. Maintain complete records at the job site of all testing that have been

certified. At completion of the project, include in the instruction manuals clearly legible copies of all test approval records and certification.

H. Balancing of the various systems shall be in accordance with those specific

balancing specification sections. I. Balance the entire new water distribution system. Set all balancing valves for

proper flow control of all circulating water. J. All flushing valves, pressure regulating valves or other regulating devices

shall be adjusted for proper balancing and flow to the plumbing fixture and/or equipment.

K. If the exterior domestic water supply is also serving as a source for fire

protection, either exterior or interior or both, it shall be tested according to the fire protection system as herein specified.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 41 of 53


3.11 ELECTRICAL TESTS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment required for testing. B. On completion of work all systems installed shall test entirely free of grounds

and short circuits. Before the systems are energized, perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection. Perform insulation-resistance test on each feeder conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for 1 minute for 480 volt equipment and 500 volts dc for 1 minute for 120 and 208 volt equipment.

Evaluate results by comparison with cables of same length and type. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. Provide test report to the Engineer. Include copies of all test results in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

C. Feeder unbalance measurements shall be made after the systems are in

normal use by the Owner. All unbalance greater than 10% shall be corrected by this Contractor.

3.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect equipment/materials from damage during shipping, storage, handling

and installation. Delivery equipment/materials to the site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.

B. The Contractor shall provide for enclosed storage, when equipment/materials

are stored on-site and prior to building “dry-in”, to prevent any damage resulting from inclement weather or construction traffic. Sheet metal/specialties shall not be stored outdoors.

C. Equipment exposed to weather during shipping and/or storage on site shall

be plastic shrink-wrapped by the manufacturer to prevent damage due to weather and road debris during transportation and thereafter while in storage awaiting installation.

D. Prevent dirt and construction debris from accumulating inside equipment

(including pipe and conduit, ductwork, fittings, etc.). E. Equipment/materials, stored or installed, found to be damaged shall be

replaced with new by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Owner and at no additional expense. Do not store equipment with PVC material with exposure to direct sunlight.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 42 of 53


F. Equipment/materials shall be handled and installed in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. 3.13 PROVISION AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. For all equipment installed external to the building whether on roofs, supports,

grade, etc., the installation must comply with wind loading and impact requirements of the applicable codes for this project site.

B. All equipment being furnished on this project, shall be certified by the

manufacturer that the equipment item meets the applicable seismic, wind, earthquake, and hurricane impact requirements as set forth by the Authority Having Jurisdiction overseeing this project, and as defined in the following codes:

1. International Building Code - Section 1609 “Wind Loads” 2. International Building Code – Section 1621 “Earthquake Loads”

C. Compliance with the above Paragraph B can be reduced and/or eliminated if

the equipment being provided is located inside a structural building enclosure, designed by a licensed professional Architect and Structural Engineer.

D. Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving

adequate headroom and clearing doors and passageways, to satisfaction of Architect and in accordance with code requirements. Installation shall permit clearance for access to equipment for repair, servicing and replacement.

E. Install equipment so as to properly distribute equipment loads on building

structural members provided for equipment support under other Sections. Roof-mounted equipment shall be installed and supported on structural steel provided under other Sections.

F. Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or

legs as necessary for floor, wall or ceiling mounting of equipment as required. G. Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers,

anchors, guides, etc. H. Provide cuts, weights, and other pertinent data required for proper

coordination of equipment support provisions and installation. I. Structural steel and hardware shall conform to Standard Specifications of

ASTM; use of steel and hardware shall conform to requirements of Section Five of Code of Practice of American Institute of Steel Construction.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 43 of 53


J. If it is determined that in order to install equipment in an existing space,

disassembling of the equipment will be required, the Architect shall be notified immediately, prior to ordering equipment. Confirmation that equipment factory warranties will not be voided shall be confirmed in writing. Arrangements for factory-authorized assembly at the job site shall then be made and be considered part of the construction cost, per Paragraph 1.10 B. above.

K. No piping or ductwork shall pass over electrical apparatus. Piping, ductwork

or equipment installed in dedicated electrical spaces as defined in NFPA shall be relocated at no additional expense.

L. Wherever the installation of this Contractor's equipment destroys the

radiological integrity of a wall, floor, or ceiling, this Contractor shall be responsible to provide suitable lead shielding to maintain that integrity. Coordinate these requirements with the General Contractor.

M. Route all piping and conduit concealed in walls or above ceiling (exceptions:

Mechanical/Electrical Rooms), unless noted otherwise. 3.14 IDENTIFICATION

A. After painting and/or covering is completed, identify all equipment and piping

as hereinafter indicated. Locate identification as conspicuously as possible except where such would distract from the finished area.

PIPING VALVES 1. Chilled Water Supply (CHS) CHS-1, CHS-2, CHS-3, etc. 2. Chilled Water Return (CHR) CHR-1, CHR-2, CHR-3, etc. 3. Cold Water CW-1, CW-2, CW-3, etc. 4. Hot Water (Domestic) HW-1, HW-2, HW-3, etc. 5. Hot Water Return (Domestic) HR-1, HR-2, HR-3, etc. 6. Gas GAS-1, GAS-2, GAS-3, etc. 7. Storm N/A 8. Grease Water N/A 9. Fire Protection FP-1, FP-2, FP-3, etc.

B. Identify all major equipment, including air handling units, rooftop units, pumps,

fans, water heaters, fire pumps, booster pumps, recirculation pumps, tanks, etc.

C. Identify equipment with laminated plastic nameplates 1/8 inch thick by

approximately 1-1/2 inch high X 4 inches wide with 1/2 inch high lettering. Face of plastic shall be black with white letters.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 44 of 53


D. Identify piping not less than once every 20 feet 0 inches, not less than once in

each room, at each branch, adjacent to each access door or panel, at each valve and where exposed piping passes through walls and floors.

E. Place flow directional arrows at each pipe identification location. F. Identify piping with markers system as manufactured by the W.H. Brady

Company, Seton Name Plate Corp., or approved equal.

G. Identify all valves with minimum 1-1/4 inch diameter brass tags bearing the valve identification number. Attach tag to valve with brass chain or split ring.

H. Valve number shall be prefixed with the corresponding piping system

identification letters. I. Furnish a typewritten chart together with colour code identification and

location of all access panels serving equipment and valves. This includes the location of colour-coded identification screws located in accessible ceilings. Incorporate chart into Instruction Manual.

J. Identify control equipment with laminated plastic nameplates 1/8 inch thick by

approximately 1-1/2 inches X 4 inches with 1/2 inch high lettering. Face of plastic shall be black with white letters.

K. Motor nameplates shall be located for easy reading. Relocate or provide new

nameplates on motors if they are not located for easy reading. L. Label all fire damper access doors “FD” and all fire/smoke dampers “FSD”.

3.15 LUBRICATION

A. Upon completion of the work and before turning over to the Owner, clean and

lubricate all bearings except sealed and permanently lubricated bearings. Use only lubricant recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Contractor is responsible for maintaining lubrication of all mechanical

equipment under his contract until work is accepted by Owner. C. Furnish a typewritten chart with each piece of equipment listed, itemizing

locations for lubrication and recommended periods for lubrication. Incorporate chart in Lubrication Manual and Instruction Manual.

D. Furnish to the Architect for approval, three typewritten lubrication manuals in


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 45 of 53


loose leaf binders. One approved copy shall be returned to the Contractor for his use during the Owner instruction period. At the end of this period it shall be returned to the Architect.

E. Lubrication manual shall consist of a separate page for each item of

equipment requiring lubrication, listing locations for lubrication, lubricant required, recommended periods for lubrication, date last lubricated, and spaces for recording periodic lubrication.

3.16 PAINTING

A. Equipment installed shall have shop coat of non-lead gray paint. Hangers and

supports shall have one coat of non-lead red primer. Machinery such as pumps, fans, etc., shall be stenciled with equipment name. Stencil shall be at least 6 inches high for large equipment, 2 inches high for small equipment. Finish painting, including painting of various piping and duct systems, shall be specified under other Sections.

B. Note requirement for Architect's approval invoked under Article 3.2

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP regarding finish of material and equipment which are visible or subject to corrosive or atmospheric conditions.

C. All exposed equipment, piping, hangers, etc., shall be painted by the

Contractor. Confirm with Owner the colour scheme prior to commencing with painting. Unless otherwise directed, each system shall be painted according to the following schedule:

SYSTEM COLOUR Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Cold Water Green Sanitary Waste and Vent Green Chilled Water Supply & Return Blue Gas Yellow Automatic Sprinkler Red Standpipe Red Vents/Drains Brown

D. Furnish all equipment with factory applied prime finish, unless otherwise

specified. E. If the factory finish on any equipment furnished by the Contractor is damaged

in shipment or during construction of the building, the equipment shall be refinished by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 46 of 53


F. Furnish one can of aerosol-free touch-up paint for each different colour factory finish which is to be the final finished surface of the product.

3.17 EXPANSION PROVISIONS

A. Installation of piping must allow for expansion using offsets, loops, swing

joints, expansion joints, etc., as necessary to prevent undue strain. Take-offs from mains to run-outs shall not have less than a three-elbow swing.

B. Mains and risers with loops or offsets shall be securely anchored to structure

so as to impart expansion toward loops or offsets. Anchors shall be constructed of heavy forged wrought iron, secured to pipe and to structure. Provide vibration isolation as required.

C. Provide pipe alignment guides as required to guide expanding pipe to move

freely from anchor points toward expansion joints, offsets, etc. 3.18 CLEANING

A. Cleaning shall be performed prior to commissioning. B. Ductwork

1. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned so that no dirt or dust shall be discharged from diffusers, registers or grilles, when system is operated.

2. Clean all ductwork both internally and externally to remove all dirt, plaster dust or other foreign materials. When external surfaces of piping are rusted, clean and restore surfaces to original condition.

3. Provide temporary connections required for cleaning. Provide cheesecloth

for openings during cleaning. 4. Replace filters prior to final inspection and testing.

C. Piping

1. Flush all water and condensate systems clear of all dirt and foreign matter

with all pumps bypassed. Provide recirculation by means of Contractor supplied portable pumping apparatus. All flushing to be at a recirculation rate of minimum 6 F.P.S.

2. After all piping systems have been pressure tested and approved for

tightness, clean and flush piping as specified and as required by codes.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 47 of 53


3. Furnish pipe cleaning chemicals, chemical feed equipment, materials and

labournecessary to clean piping. 4. Permanently install necessary chemical injection fittings complete with

stop valves. 5. The cleaning chemicals shall be designed to remove deposition from

construction, such as pipe dope, oils, loose mill scale, and other extraneous silt and mud. The products shall inhibit corrosion of the various metals in the system and shall be safe to handle and use with normal chemical safety equipment, i.e., gloves and safety glasses. Effectiveness of the product shall be such that the water need only be at ambient temperatures.

6. During the cleaning procedure, remove strainers, automatic air vents, flow

regulators and any other item that would be affected by the clean and flush procedure. All control valves and coils should be set up for wide open, full flow.

7. After initial flushing of a system, use portable pumping apparatus for a

continuous 24 hour circulation of a cold water detergent equal to Nalco 2567 cleaner. Flush detergent clear with continuous draining and raw water fill for an additional 12 hours or until all cleaner is removed from the system.

8. All flushing to be at a circulation rate of min. 6 F.P.S. 9. Maintain continuous blow-down and make-up, as required during flushing

operation. 10. Monitor the water temperatures and prevent the heat generated by

the pump circulating the water from causing the water temperature to exceed the temperature ratings of the pipe, pumps, and other components of the piping system.

11. After circulating for the prescribed time, systems shall then be

drained and flushed until the total alkalinity or conductivity of the rinse water is not more than 20% higher than the readings for the make-up water. Refill with clean water, and treat with scale and corrosion inhibitor. Contractor shall furnish the chemicals, supervise the cleaning, test the water after flushing, and shall provide a report that certifies successful cleaning and flushing of the piping.

12. Clean all pipeline strainer baskets and return to original condition or


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 48 of 53


replace with new baskets.

D. Equipment

1. After completion of project, clean the exterior surface of all equipment, including concrete residue, dirt, paint residue, etc .

2. Clean all equipment and plumbing fixtures, as recommended by manufacturer.

3. Thoroughly disinfect all water heating equipment and the complete new domestic water piping system according to Department of Health requirements.

4. All dirt, plaster dust and other foreign matter shall be blown and/or cleaned

from coils, terminal devices, diffusers, registers, and grilles. 5. Thoroughly clean equipment of all stains, paint spots, dirt, and dust.

Remove all temporary labels not used for instruction or operation. 3.19 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURE

A. General

1. The requirements of Divisions 5 and 6 are in addition to and supplement the requirements outlined in the General Conditions and General Requirements.

2. It shall be each Contractor's responsibility to personally hand-deliver all of

the required project close-out checklist items and to obtain Owner's authorized representative(s) signed receipt on all items requiring Owner sign-off.

B. Record Drawings (As-Builts):

1. Refer to Article 1.14 in this section for specific requirements regarding Record Drawings.

C. Project Close-Out Checklist

1. Review requirements of each section of the specifications and submit for approval to Architect the sign-off forms which shall become the project close-out checklist. These, at a minimum, shall include the following information shown in attached Project Closeout Checklist Example. The


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 49 of 53


Architect and/or Owner may incorporate additional specific items to the following checklist which shall become part of the project requirements.

2. Close-Out Checklist Example.


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 50 of 53


OTHER FORMS


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 51 of 53


RFI No. Date: Contractor: Job Name: Person: Spec. Sec.: Contr. Fax No.: SYLENG Fax No.: (868) 662-9562 Arch. Fax No.: Contractor Field Question (Provide narrative and/or sketch): Contractor Proposed Solution (Provide narrative and/or sketch): SYLENG’s Response:


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 52 of 53


PROJECT CLOSE-OUT PROJECT: DIVISION NO.: CONTRACTOR:

ITEM1 DATES OWNER'S SIGN-OFF COMPLETED RECEIVED BY

OWNER Permits

City and County Inspection Contractor’s Warranties Manufacturer’s Warranties State Fire Rating Data Copy of Final Shop Drawings List and Possession of Spare Parts Pressure Tests Equipment Tests Required by Specs O & M Manuals Record Documents Coordination Drawings Sanitization Reports Commissioning Reports/Letters/Forms On Site Training Complete Protective Device Settings Valve Tags and Charts Final ATC Installation Drawings Insurance Underwriters Approvals Final Punch List (Initialed by contractor that items are complete)

Building Certificate of Occupancy (CO) 24 Hour Phone No. for Service during Guarantee Period

1 Provide separate line item for each specified item (do not group items).

1Provide separate line item for each specified item (do not group items).


REQUIREMENTS


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 53 of 53


FACILITY NAME: __________ PROJECT NAME: __________ CONT. LOG NO._______ DATE: _______________ TESTED BY: _______________________ Maximum Test Intervals: Name: _______________________ General Care - 12 mths. Critical Care - 6 mths. Company: _______________________ Wet Locations - 12 mths

GROUND TEST REPORT Type meter used and external network if used: ________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ Note: Maximum readings permitted - 20 MV New Construction

40 MV Critical Existing Construction 500 MV General Care Existing Construction 0.1 ohm New Construction 0.2 ohm Quiet Grounds and Existing

Room No

Description “c” = Critical

“g” = General

Voltage Measurement Impedance Measurement Remarks – If voltage readings more than 20 mV in existing const. Note tests and investigation req’d

No. of recepts.

No. of other

Max. reading in milivots

No. of recepts.

Max. reading in Ohms


_________________________________________


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

DX SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (HEAT PUMPS)

DOCUMENT NO: 1207-2-ME-5-730


A 21-SEP-16 Issue for Tender TOS ML

Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:


BEP II – ST. MARY’S SECONDARY SCHOOL

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – DX SPLIT AIR

CONDITIONING UNITS (HEAT PUMPS)

Document No 1207-2-ME-5-730

21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 2 of 14


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 4

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................ 4

1.2 RELATED WORK .................................................................................................... 4

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................... 4

1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 4

1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA ................................................................................................. 5

1.6 TEST REPORTS ..................................................................................................... 5

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ............................................................. 6

1.8 GUARANTEE .......................................................................................................... 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 6

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ....................................................................... 6

2.2 MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................ 6

2.3 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 7

2.4 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT ....................................................................... 7

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT ....................................................................................... 9

2.6 AIR HANDLING UNIT ........................................................................................... 10

2.7 COILS.................................................................................................................... 11

2.8 FILTERS................................................................................................................ 11

2.9 UNIT CONTROLS ................................................................................................. 11

PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 12

3.1 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 12

3.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSTALLATION ............................................................. 12

3.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING ....................................................................................... 13






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 3 of 14


3.4 VALVES IN GENERAL .......................................................................................... 13

3.5 TESTING EVACUATION AND CHARGING ......................................................... 13

3.6 START UP............................................................................................................. 14






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 4 of 14


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements,

and Architects Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Motor Requirements: Refer to Specification 5-001 - Motors and Electrical Work.

B. Vibration Isolation: Refer to Specification 5-550 - Vibration Isolation.

C. Coil Requirements: Refer to Specification 5-620 - Coils.

D. Control Sequence: Refer to Specification 5-900 - Control Systems and Specification 5-

901 - Control Sequence.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings for all equipment as herein specified.

B. Shop drawings to be complete and shall include all data concerning dimensions, weights,

capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, fan curves, vibration isolation,

complete power and control wiring diagrams, and appropriate identification.

C. Fan curves shall include a series of curves indicating the relationship of cfm and static

pressure for various rpm. Brake horsepower curves shall also be included.

D. Indicate the design operating point clearly on the fan curves.

E. Submit confirmation, from the selected unit manufacturer, of the necessary ancillary

equipment (such as hard start kits) required by the manufacturer due to the length and

configuration of the refrigerant piping for this specific project.






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 5 of 14


1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Furnish condensing units and air handling units complete with all components,

accessories, and all operating and safety controls to provide the intended performance as

specified in this section, as shown on the plans and/or as scheduled.

B. All V-belt drives shall be designed for 150% of motor rating.

C. All insulation and liners to meet NFPA 90A requirements.

D. All electrical components to be UL listed.

E. Cooling coils to be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210.

F. Each fan and motor combination shall be capable of meeting both of the following

conditions while maintaining stable fan performance:

1. Deliver plus or minus 10% of the air quantity scheduled at the scheduled static

pressure.

2. Unit static pressure shall take into consideration the actual static pressure loss of

the components furnished within the unit.

G. The motor furnished with the fan shall not operate into the motor service factor in any of

these cases. Drive efficiency shall be considered in motor selection according to

manufacturer's published recommendation, or according to AMCA Publication 203,

Appendix L.

H. Where inlet and outlet ductwork at any fan is changed from that shown on the drawings,

submit a scaled layout of the change and system effect factor calculations, indicating

increased static pressure requirement as described in AMCA Publication 201. This

Contractor shall be responsible for any motor, drive and/or wiring changes required as a

result of duct configuration changes at the fan.

1.6 TEST REPORTS

A. The unit manufacturer representative to field check, test and start all units after they have

been properly installed by the HVAC Contractor. All of the component systems to be run

and adjusted to perform quietly and efficiently at the capacities scheduled.

B. The unit manufacturer or his representative to provide the services to field instruct and

check out unit operation and control of the complete system. The instruction shall not

take place until HVAC system has been field checked, tested, started, and balanced. The

manufacturer shall establish the instruction dates, and shall give the Architect and Owner






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 6 of 14


ten (10) days written notice of the time. Instruction shall be deemed completed when an

affidavit of instructions has been signed by a representative of the manufacturer and the

Owner.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Before final payment, the manufacturer to furnish to the Owner three (3) sets of Operation

and Maintenance Manuals.

B. The manuals to indicate unit model numbers, serial numbers, sizes, and types.

C. Manuals to indicate name and address of Service Company.

D. A description of maintenance required weekly, monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, and

annually to be included along with type of lubrication recommended.

1.8 GUARANTEE

A. The manufacturer and Contractor to provide a warranty on the rooftop units for a period

of one year after acceptance by the Owner.

B. The warranty to include all the cost of parts and labour for any and all work the unit

manufacturer and/or Contractor has to accomplish to repair a malfunctioning unit or piece

of equipment furnished by the rooftop unit manufacturer. The warranty shall not cover

normal maintenance such as changing of filters, cleaning of coils, replacement of belts

and lubrication of bearings.

C. Unit manufacturer to include an additional four (4) year warranty for all refrigeration

compressors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It is the

sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products

that meet or exceed the specifications included here.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Trane, Daikin, LG or York.






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 7 of 14


B. Units to be the manufacturer's model with capacity and operating characteristics

indicated on the schedules.

2.3 GENERAL

A. Condensing unit and air handling unit shall be of same manufacturer. Units shall be

factory run tested to check cooling and heating operation, defrost initiation and

termination, fan and blower rotation and control sequence. Units shall be designed to

operate at ambient temperatures between 120 degrees F and 30 degrees F on cooling

mode and 70 degrees F and 0 degrees F on heating mode. Cooling and heating

capabilities shall be rated in accordance with ARI standards.

B. Total unit to be listed by U.L. and carry a U.L. Label.

2.4 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

A. Unit to be equal to the manufacturer's model with capacity and operating characteristics

indicated on the schedules.

B. Compressors:

1. Compressor to be hermetic or semi-hermetic type for 1750 rpm operation, mounted

on separate vibration isolators within the condensing unit chassis. Furnish with

capacity control, forced-feed lubrication, and built-in crankcase heater and sound

attenuating compartment within the chassis.

C. Condenser Fans:

1. Condenser fans to be vertical discharge, direct-drive or multiple V-belt drive fans,

statically and dynamically balanced.

2. Provide safety guard for each fan.

D. Condenser Coils:

1. Construct coils of seamless copper tubing with aluminium plate fins, mechanically

bonded to the tubes. Provide sub-cooling circuit with liquid accumulator. Test

Coils at 425 psig minimum air pressure under water.

E. Casing:

1. Construct unit casing of zinc phosphatized steel finished with baked-on enamel with

factory standard colour.

2. Make all components suitable for outdoor mounting.

3. Provide access panels for servicing top all electrical connections and control devices.






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 8 of 14


F. Controls:

1. Controls to be factory wired and located in a separate enclosure.

2. Controls to include a control power transformer for 120 volt, 60 hertz, single phase,

fusing, magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser motors, compressor

overload protection, high and low pressure switches, differential oil pressure control,

non-cycling pump down if required and reset relay, refrigerant discharge and suction

pressure gauges, and oil pressure gauge.

3. Furnish a positive acting timer to prevent short cycling of compressor if power is

interrupted. Timer shall prevent compressor form restarting for approximately 5

minutes after shutoff.






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 9 of 14


2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

A. Each unit to have expansion valves, liquid receiver, filter driers and sight glass/moisture

indicator. Provide heavy- duty, high capacity, pilot-operated reversing valves for

automatic refrigerant cycle changeover.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all refrigeration piping to be Type L refrigeration grade soft

copper tubing.

C. All fittings to be ACR type. All sweat-type fittings to be wrought copper or forged brass. All

elbows and return bends to be of the long radius type. Flare fittings to be of the frost-

proof type and constructed of forged brass.

D. Refrigeration Valves:

1. Check valves 7/8" O.D. and smaller: Henry, Mueller, Superior, equal to Henry type

#120 spring loaded piston check valves with accessible internal parts. Valve shall be

provided with soft teflon seat, piston guide, stainless steel spring, 250 degrees F.,

500 psig.

2. Pressure Relief valves: Henry type #522, #52, #524, #523, #541, #542, #545, ASME

approved pressure relief valves.

3. Expansion valves: Alco, Sporlan, A.P., or equal. Unless specified otherwise, use

externally equalized thermostatic expansion valves with superheat adjustment.

Standard ratings to be in accordance with A.R.I. Standard 750-76.

4. Liquid line solenoid valves: Alco, Sporlan, or approved equal. A.C.R. type valves to

be U.L. listed.

5. Hot gas bypass valves: Sporlan, Alco, Flo-Con or equal, electrically pilot operated.

Unless specified otherwise, each valve shall be selected to maintain each system's

minimum evaporating pressure. Multiple expansion valves, mixing tee, and any

additional accessories required for proper system performance. All valves shall be UL

listed.

E. Specialties:

1. Liquid driers 5/8" O.D. or smaller: Throwaway or replaceable core type. ARI

Standard 710, UL listed.

2. Combination moisture and liquid indicators (sight glass): Sporlan, Superior, Alco,






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 10 of 14


Henry, or equal, temperature compensating indicators, UL listed, 500 psig maximum

working pressure.

2.6 AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Unit to be equal to the manufacturer's model with capacity and operating characteristics

indicated on the schedule.

B. Casings:

1. Construct unit casings of heavy gauge steel throughout with steel framework with

baked enamel or mill galvanized finish. Furnish casings with removable panels to

provide access to all internal parts. Construct units air tight, water tight and rust

inhibited.

2. Unit casings including filter boxes, access plenum sections and external bypass

section where required shall be thermally insulated with fibreglass insulation securely

fastened to the casing with a water proof adhesive.

3. Drain pan to be double wall construction consisting of galvanized steel inner pan with

insulation between. Inner pan to be waterproof construction with drain connection on

both sides.

4. Unit casings for heating only units need not be provided with drain pans.

C. Fans:

1. Fans shall be double width, double inlet centrifugal type statically and dynamically

balanced in the unit fan section. Fasten fans securely to solid or hollow steel shafts

and design for continuous operation at the maximum rated static pressure. Mount

bearings externally, or if internally mounted, provide with an external grease line and

fitting to allow servicing without dismantling of the unit.

2. Provide fans with a belt guard if the belt and drive assembly is located outside of the

casings. Make provision for use of a tachometer to verify fan speed without removing

the belt guard assembly. Provide fans with variable pitch V-belt drives for purposes of

system balancing. After system is balanced, fixed pitch sheaves shall replace the

variable pitch sheaves for all motors using multiple belt drives.

D. All V-belt drives shall be designed for 150% of motor rating.

E. Provide fan section with hinged access door.






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 11 of 14


2.7 COILS

A. The unit cooling coils shall be equal to sizes and capacities scheduled and in accordance

with the requirements of Specification 5-620. Mount coils in the casing to accessible for

service and to be removable from either side of the unit without dismantling of the entire

unit. Coil header and U-bends shall be within the unit insulated casing, with supply return,

drain and vent connections extending through the casing. Support coils along their entire

length within casing and pitch for proper drainage.

B. Provide sealing collars to prevent leakage where coil connections penetrate unit casing or

end panel.

2.8 FILTERS

A. Filter box section shall be suitable for installation of filters as indicated in Specification 5-

820 of this project. Filter housing may be furnished as part of the air handling unit.

B. Provide each air handling unit with a set of glass fibre media throwaway filters to be used

during the construction period.

C. Provide an extra set of throwaway filters.

2.9 UNIT CONTROLS

A. Space thermostat to provide staged cooling and fan control. Provide matching sub-base

as required.

B. The thermostat shall be interlocked to the associated air handling unit and air cooled

condensing unit.






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 12 of 14


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all units as indicated on plans and according to the unit manufacturer's

instructions.

B. Install all ductwork, electrical and piping connections to the unit as shown on the plans

and as required to complete the installation.

C. Provide all wiring between the rooftop units, remote panels, time clocks, and other

temperature control devices.

D. The unit manufacturer and/or his representative shall calibrate all control devices and

adjust unit automatic dampers to insure proper operation of the system.

E. Mount units at proper height above floor or ceiling so that proper trap depth is provided in

the condensate drain line.

F. Mount thermostats at 4'-0" above finished floor unless otherwise noted.

3.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Horizontal hot gas and suction piping runs shall be sloped away from and toward the

compressor, respectively, at a rate of 2-1/2" per 20'. Support all lines at intervals of not

more than 8' and anchor appropriately. Use rubber grommets on uninsulated piping

between pipe and hanger to prevent line chafing.

B. Where oil is being lifted up vertical hot gas and suction risers of more than 5', provide trap

at the bottom of the riser. Provide additional traps for each additional 12' of riser length.

C. Where condensing section is located below evaporator, liquid line to be sized for

pressure drop due to friction and due to vertical rise to prevent flashing. When evaporator

is located below condensing section, suction line must be sized for both pressure drop

and for proper oil return to the compressor.






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 13 of 14


D. Extreme care shall be taken to keep all refrigerant piping clean and dry. It shall be kept

sealed except when cutting or fabricating. Each length shall inspected and swabbed with

a cloth soaked in refrigeration oil if any dirt, filings, or visible moisture are present.

E. Protect the refrigerant piping adequately.

F. Arrange the piping so that normal inspection and servicing of the equipment is not

hindered. Do not obstruct the view of the crankcase oil sight glass, or run piping so that it

interferes with removal of the compressor or other components.

G. Tubing installed in trenches or conduit under the floor must be pitches 2-1/2" per 20' to

prevent oil trapping. Guard against deformation or damage from trucks carrying heavy

loads, or cement being poured.

3.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Manufactured soldered ACR type fittings are preferred and shall be used wherever

practical. The use of sliding block or lever type tube bending tools or flaring block or

punch type swaging tools to field fabricate elbow or coupling type fittings will be allowed

on piping 1-1/8" O.D. and smaller as long as the fittings are of the long radius type and

are free from buckling or kinks. Field fabricated metered elbows and tees will not be

allowed.

3.4 VALVES IN GENERAL

A. Liquid line driers shall be of the filter drier type, and of the size recommended by the

manufacturer. Drier cartridges shall not be installed until the second evacuation has been

completed.

B. Install all valves per the manufacturer's instructions.

C. When brazing any valve to connecting piping, protect the valve properly against damage

from excessive heating. For minimum protection, wrap a damp cloth around the valve

body or remove internal valve parts before brazing and direct the flame away from the

valve body.

3.5 TESTING EVACUATION AND CHARGING

A. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and/or Engineer 24 hours in advance of any test

so that the Owner and/or manufacturer's representative may be present for the test if

desired.

B. When the refrigeration connections have been completed, test the system at a minimum

of 300 psig with the compressor suction and discharge valves closed, and all other valves






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 14 of 14


in the system open. (If local codes require higher test pressures, such codes must be

complied with). Sufficient liquid refrigerant shall be charged into the system to raise

pressure to 35 psig, and dry nitrogen added to obtain the desired test pressure. Wrap all

joints with a rubber or rawhide mallet and check for leaks with an electric leak detector

having a certified sensitivity of at least one once per year.

C. Refrigeration piping will not be acceptable unless it is gas tight. If any leaks are found,

isolate the defective area, discharge the gas and repair the leaks, and then repeat the

test. When testing has been completed, release all pressure freely to the atmosphere.

D. The system shall be evacuated with a vacuum duty pump specifically manufactured for

refrigeration vacuum duty, having a capability of pulling a vacuum of at least 50 microns.

Evacuation of the system must not be done by using refrigeration compressor. The pump

should be connected to both the low and high side evacuation valves with copper tube or

high vacuum hoses (1/4" I.D. minimum). The compressor service valves should remain

closed. A high vacuum gauge capable of registering pressure in microns should be

attached to the system for pressure reading. Hermetic or accessible- hermetic motor

compressors must not be operated during evacuation because of the reduced dielectric

strength of the atmosphere within the motor chamber. The check system pressure, a

hand valve must be provided between the pressure gauge and the vacuum pump which

can be closed to isolate the system and check the pressure.

E. Charge refrigerant directly from the original drums through a combination filter drier.

F. Each drier may be used for a maximum of three cylinders of refrigerant, and then must be

replaced with a fresh drier.

G. Include written results with close-out documents.

3.6 START UP

A. After the compressor is started, continue charging until system has sufficient refrigerant

for proper operation. Do not overcharge. During start-up, no compressor is to be left

operating unattended and unwatched until the system is properly charge with refrigerant

and oil.

END OF SECTION


_________________________________________


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION -

FANS




Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION –

FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 2 of 9


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 3

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................ 3

1.2 RELATED WORK .................................................................................................... 3

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................... 3

1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 3

1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA ................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 5

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ....................................................................... 5

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS ............................................................................................ 5

2.3 UTILITY SETS ......................................................................................................... 6

2.4 IN LINE DUCT FANS .............................................................................................. 6

2.5 POWER ROOF EXHAUSTERS AND SUPPLY FANS ............................................ 7

2.6 POWER ROOF EXHAUSTERS (Up-blast type) ..................................................... 8

2.7 CEILING EXHAUST FANS ..................................................................................... 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 9

3.1 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 9




FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 3 of 9


PART 1 - GENERAL




Supplemental Requirements, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work

specified in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Motor Requirements: Refer to Specification 5-001 - Motors and Electrical Work.

B. Vibration Isolation Requirements: Refer to Specification 5-550 - Vibration

Isolation.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for all equipment as herein specified, including all

dimensions, capacities, fan curves, materials of construction, ratings, weights

and appropriate identification and vibration isolation.

B. Fan curves shall include a series of curves indicating the relationship of CFM and

static or total pressure for various fan speeds. Brake horsepower curves shall

also be included.

C. Submit colour selection charts for equipment where applicable.

D. Provide equipment certification of compliance with seismic, wind and impact

structural loading requirements of the Building Code due to wind and seismic

forces.

1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. All fans shall be tested as complete units in accordance with the applicable test

code of AMCA and shall be certified by that organization.

B. All fans shall be furnished complete with motors, wheels, drive assemblies,

bearings and accessories as hereinafter specified.




FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 4 of 9


C. All fans specified with V-belt drives shall be provided with variable pitch V-belt

sheaves for purpose of system balancing. After system is balanced, fixed pitch

sheaves shall replace the variable pitch sheaves for all motors using multiple belt

drives.

D. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall operate without

objectionable noise or vibration.

E. All V-belt drives shall be designed for 150% of motor rating.

F. Where fan drives are exposed, guards shall be provided in accordance with all

applicable code requirements. Provisions shall be made so that a tachometer

may be used to verify fan speed without removing the guard assembly. Guards

shall be constructed as shown in detail manual.

G. Fan size, fan class, wheel type, inlet type, capacity, arrangement operating

characteristics and any other special requirements shall be as indicated on the

plans and/or as scheduled.

H. Fans shall be Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.

I. Each fan and motor combination shall be capable of meeting both of the following

conditions while maintaining stable fan performance: deliver plus or minus 10% of

the air quantity scheduled at the scheduled static pressure; deliver the air

quantity scheduled at 125% of the scheduled static pressure or 1.25" W.C. above

that schedule, whichever is less. The motor furnished with the fan shall not

operate into the motor service factor in any of these cases. Drive efficiency shall

be considered in motor selection according to manufacturer's published

recommendations, or according to AMCA Publication 203, Appendix L.

J. Where inlet and outlet ductwork at any fan is changed from that shown on the

drawings, Contractor shall submit a scaled layout of the change and system

effect factor calculations, indicating increased static pressure requirements as

described in AMCA Publication 201. This Contractor shall be responsible for any

motor, drive and/or wiring changes required as a result of duct configuration

changes at the fan.

K. All fans serving a “fume” application (i.e., fume hoods) shall be completely coated

internally with a baked phenolic coating, minimum 4 mils thick.




FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 5 of 9


L. When required by the documents, provide exhaust fan and curb design to

conform with the wind and impact structural loading requirements of the local

Building Codes and Authority Having Jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval.

It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made

are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included here.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Greenheck, Carrier, Champion, Chicago Blower, New York Blower, Trane or

Cook.

B. Housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with welded fabrication and

welded angle iron frame. Inlet cones shall be spun or die formed to provide for a

streamlined air flow into the wheel. Fan discharge shall be flanged.

C. Fan wheel shall be constructed of non-overloading airfoil blades welded to spun

wheel cones unless otherwise indicated.

D. Bearings shall be heavy duty self-aligning grease packed pillow block type with

grease seal. Bearings shall be provided with external grease fittings.

E. All fan parts shall be painted with a prime coat after metal cleaning and surface

preparation. In addition, a second coat of paint shall be applied to all exterior

surfaces.

F. Provide common mounting rails for fan and motor as appropriate for the fan

arrangement indicated.

G. Provide variable inlet vanes for fans as scheduled. Vane bearings shall have

grease fittings extended to an accessible location.

H. Provide gravity backdraft dampers, for fans not provided with motorized dampers,

for mounting in discharge ductwork.

I. Provide 1" mesh inlet screens for fans without inlet ductwork.




FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 6 of 9


J. Provide bolted and gasketed access doors in the fan housing for inspection of

interiors and the wheel.

K. Provide drain connection in fan housing.

L. Provide thrust blocks as specified in Section 15550 and as required for stable fan

operation.

2.3 UTILITY SETS

A. Chicago Blower, Greenheck, New York Blower or Cook, equal to manufacturer’s

model scheduled.

B. Housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with welded or lockseam

fabrication and adequate reinforcing to prevent housing distortion.

C. Bearings shall be grease lubricated, self-aligning ball bearing type with grease

seal.

D. Paint all fan parts with a prime coat after metal cleaning and surface preparation.

In addition, a second coat of paint shall be applied to all exterior surfaces.

E. Motor supports shall be designed to adequately hold motor in place and provide

adjustment on V-belt drive models.

F. Provide variable inlet vanes for fans as scheduled. Vane bearings shall have

grease fittings extended to an accessible location.

G. Provide opposed blade volume control damper for mounting in discharge

ductwork.

H. Provide gravity backdraft dampers, for fans not provided with motorized dampers,

for mounting in discharge ductwork.

I. Provide 1" mesh inlet screens for fans without inlet ductwork.

J. Where fans are indicated on the drawings for outdoor installation, they shall be

equipped with weather covers and weather-resistant enamel finish.

K. Provide access doors in fan housing for inspection of interiors and the wheel.

L. Provide drain connection in fan housing.

M. Provide backward incline, airfoil or flat blade wheel with diameter to meet CFM

and pressure scheduled, including low CFM high pressure applications.

2.4 IN LINE DUCT FANS

A. Greenheck, Cook, Acme or Penn, equal to the manufacturer's models scheduled.




FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 7 of 9


B. Fan housing shall be designed for installation in the straight run of duct with

transitions as indicated. Housing shall be designed for complete access to fan

and motor without removing fan assembly from ductwork.

C. All fan parts shall be painted with a prime coat after metal cleaning and surface

preparation. In addition, a second coat of paint shall be applied to all exterior

surfaces.

2.5 POWER ROOF EXHAUSTERS AND SUPPLY FANS

A. Greenheck, Penn or Cook, equal to the manufacturer's models scheduled.

B. Housings shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a baked enamel finish;

colour to be selected by the Architect.

C. Exhauster wheels shall be centrifugal, non-overloading type with full inlet cones

to reduce air turbulence.

D. Provide units with factory mounted and wired NEMA standard disconnect

switches and thermal overload protection.

E. Mount units on factory installed vibration isolators.

F. All units shall be provided with birdscreens.

G. Provide units with gravity backdraft dampers for fans not provided with motorized

dampers.

H. Units shall be provided with a factory fabricated curb and extended base, as

required for mounting a minimum of 12 inches above roof.

I. Impact certified equipment shall include the following features in accordance with

the testing requirements:

1. Enclosure is impact certified louver of heavy gauge aluminium or

galvanized steel construction. Enclosure shall be designed to allow

access for inspecting, cleaning and servicing the fan.

2. Structural curb cap to provide positive connection to curb.

3. Structural galvanized steel frame.

4. Structural galvanized steel roof curb.

5. Integral internal wireways for installation of all power and control wiring

conduit within interior of roof curb so that no exposed conduit is located

external to unit.




FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 8 of 9


2.6 POWER ROOF EXHAUSTERS (Up-blast type)

A. Greenheck, Penn or Cook, equal to the manufacturer's model scheduled.

B. Housing to be finished with baked enamel; colour to be selected by the Architect.

C. Fan wheels to be centrifugal, non-overloading type, and be spark proof

aluminium construction.

D. Motor, bearings and drives to be completely enclosed and sealed from the

exhaust air stream and be positively ventilated by forced air cooling tubes with

outside air.

E. Mount the entire drive assembly or entire unit on factory installed vibration

isolators.

F. Provide units with factory mounted and wired NEMA standard disconnect

switches and thermal overload protection.

G. Units to be provided with a factory fabricated sound attenuating curb and

extended base, as required for mounting a minimum of 12 inches above roof.

Fans handling grease laden vapour (kitchen hoods) shall be mounted on a

vented external curb so that fan discharge is a minimum of 40" above the roof.

H. Kitchen hood exhaust fans shall include a grease collector and shall be UL listed

for the removal of smoke and grease laden vapours operating continuously at

300 degrees F.

I. Impact certified equipment shall include the following features in accordance with

the testing requirements:

1. Enclosure is impact certified louver of heavy gauge aluminium or

galvanized steel construction. Enclosure shall be designed to allow

access for inspecting, cleaning and servicing the fan.

2. Structural curb cap to provide positive connection to curb.

3. Structural galvanized steel frame.

4. Structural galvanized steel roof curb.

5. Integral internal wireways for installation of all power and control wiring

conduit within interior of roof curb so that no exposed conduit is located

external to unit.




FANS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 9 of 9


2.7 CEILING EXHAUST FANS

A. Carnes, Greenheck, Penn, Cook, or ACME, equal to the manufacturer's model

scheduled.

B. Fans shall be complete with centrifugal blower wheel, steel housing with

acoustical lining, integral exhaust grille, adjustable mounting brackets to allow for

any ceiling thickness, permanently lubricated motor, integral junction box with

motor factory wired and motor overload protection.

C. Provide unit discharge outlet as indicated on the plans.

D. Provide units with appropriate wall, eave or roof discharge assembly, as

indicated, complete with birdscreen and gravity backdraft damper.

E. Provide time delay switch for fan and light to turn lights on and off immediately

and allow fan to run a minimum of 10 minutes after switch is turned off. Turn

switch over to electrical contractor for installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units as shown on the drawings, as detailed, and according to

manufacturer's installation instructions. On units provided with a drain

connection, install a drain valve and cap discharge of drain.

- END OF SECTION -


_________________________________________



INDOOR AIR QUALITY




Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:




INDOOR AIR QUALITY


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 2 of 8


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 3

1.1 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................ 3

1.2 DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 3

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................... 3

1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 4

2.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AND MONITORING COMPANIES ................................. 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 4

3.1 PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL NECESSARY TO CONDUCT MONITORING AND REPORTING AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. .................................. 4

3.2 MONITORING PROGRAM ...................................................................................... 5

3.3 CONTINUOUS TEST PROCEDURE MONITORING ............................................... 5

3.4 INITIAL MONITORING ............................................................................................. 5

3.5 SECOND MONITORING .......................................................................................... 6

3.6 BAKE-OUT/VENTILATION PROCEDURE .............................................................. 6

3.7 FINAL MONITORING ............................................................................................... 7




INDOOR AIR QUALITY


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 3 of 8


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS





1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. This section is provided to evaluate indoor air quality and HVAC system

operation prior to commencement of work and then again prior to the Contractor's

request for substantial completion and after Owner occupancy (warranty period).

B. The Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) monitoring is intended to establish the building

baseline IAQ and the construction’s impact on the baseline IAQ.


A. All testing protocols shall be in accordance with current NIOSH Standards for

each specified assay.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, as required by these documents, specific procedural information

(protocol) including critical path scheduling for review and approval by Engineer

prior to Performing any work.

B. Complete formal “baseline” and “final” reports of testing methodology and results,

accompanied with indication of ASHRAE recommended safe levels of each

specified element, compound or organic material, are to be submitted to the

Owner, Architect and Engineer.




INDOOR AIR QUALITY


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 4 of 8


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AND MONITORING COMPANIES

A. Companies acceptable for performing indoor air quality monitoring and reporting

shall be as listed below and may include any local capable company:

Environmental Science & Engineering, Inc.

P.O. Box 1703

Gainesville, FL 32602

(904) 332-3318

Professional Service Industries, Inc.

1748 33rd St.

Orlando, FL 32839

407-304-5560

Pure Air Control Services

4911 Creekside Drive

Clearwater, FL 33760

(800) 422-7873 Vik Ahuja, Ext. 804

(727) 792-0570

Law Engineering and Environmental Services

4919 West Laurel Street

Tampa, FL 33607

(813) 289-0750

(813) 289-5474

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL NECESSARY TO CONDUCT

MONITORING AND REPORTING AS SPECIFIED HEREIN.

A. Prior to Contractor's request for substantial completion, the following shall occur:




INDOOR AIR QUALITY


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 5 of 8


1. Building interior shall be clean and free of standing water.

2. Electrical and energy systems shall be finalized and approved per

contract.

3. HVAC system shall be completed, finalized and approved per contract.

4. HVAC system shall be tested, balanced, commissioned and approved by

Engineer.

5. Initial monitoring shall be performed and documented in rough draft form,

specifically noting any levels of contaminants exceeding ASHRAE

recommended safe levels.

3.2 MONITORING PROGRAM

A. Outdoor Monitoring:

1. Monitoring at outdoor air intakes for each air handling unit, shall be

performed to indicate intensity levels of site specific elements.

B. Indoor Monitoring:

1. Monitor within each building three separate spaces to be designated by

the Engineer prior to testing.

3.3 CONTINUOUS TEST PROCEDURE MONITORING

A. A seven day temperature/humidity chart recorder shall be placed in one

representative space per building (to be determined by HVAC Engineer)

throughout the test period which is defined as follows:

1. From the date of the initial monitoring to the date of the final monitoring.

3.4 INITIAL MONITORING

A. Prior to substantial completion (installation of Owner-furnished tables, chairs,

desks, etc.), monitoring of contaminants shall occur per the following tables:

Outdoor Indoor

1. Carbon Monoxide (CO) 1. Carbon Monoxide (CO)

2. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 2. Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

3. Sulfur Dioxide 3. Sulfur Dioxide




INDOOR AIR QUALITY


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 6 of 8


4. Ozone 4. Radon

5. Nitrogen Dioxide 5. Ozone

6. Temperature & Relative Humidity

(%RH)

6. Nitrogen Dioxide

7. Total Volatile Organic

Compounds (VOC’s)

7. Formaldehyde

8. Bacteria (total count) 8. Particulate count 9. Molds and Fungus (total count) 9. Temperature & Relative Humidity

(%RH) 10. Particulate count 10. Total Volatile Organic Compounds

(VOC’s) 11. Bacteria (total count)

12. Molds and Fungus (total count)

B. For phased projects, the sampling point shall be located in the occupied space

adjacent to construction.

3.5 SECOND MONITORING

A. Upon installation of Owner furnished equipment into the building, monitoring of

contaminants shall occur per the following table:

Indoor

1. Formaldehyde

2. Nuisance Dust

3. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's)

B. For phased projects, provide a sample point in the occupied spaces adjacent to

construction.

3.6 BAKE-OUT/VENTILATION PROCEDURE

A. Upon completion of the second monitoring the bake-out/ventilation procedure

shall begin as follows:

1. Set the HVAC system to heat building spaces to between 85 F and 90 F.

Full illumination may be required. All outside air intakes must be closed

and exhaust and/or relief fans must be off. The specified temperatures

shall be established and maintained for a period of 12 hours. Once the




INDOOR AIR QUALITY


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 7 of 8


specified temperature has been maintained for 12 hours, monitoring of

contaminants shall occur per the following table:

Indoor

a. Formaldehyde

b. Nuisance Dust

c. Temperature & Relative Humidity (% RH)

d. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's)

2. Upon completion of the monitoring, set the HVAC system to operate at

normal operation mode (i.e., 68 to 78 F) described below for 12 hours.

The air handling equipment shall be activated in the occupied/ventilation

mode during this 12 hour period. The associated system exhaust fans

shall also be activated.

a. Repeat Step 1 above.

b. Repeat Step 2 above.

c. Repeat Step 1 above.

d. Repeat Step 2 above.

e. Steps 1 and 2 shall be repeated for a minimum of three times. If

acceptable levels (to be determined by the Environmental

Engineer) of specified elements are indicated after three days,

the process shall be stopped. If contamination is present (as

determined by the Environmental Engineer and the HVAC

Engineer), the process shall continue until contamination is no

longer measurable or for a maximum of seven days.

f. Immediately following the bake-out period, forced mechanical

ventilation with units operating in their normal

occupied/ventilation mode shall be maintained for a full 48 hours.

3.7 FINAL MONITORING

A. Two weeks after the building is occupied for its intended use, monitoring of the

specified contaminants shall occur per the following table:




INDOOR AIR QUALITY


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 8 of 8


Outdoor Indoor Indoor

1. Carbon Monoxide (CO) 1. Carbon Monoxide (CO) 2. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 2. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 3. Ozone 3. Radon 4. Temperature & Relative Humidity (%RH)

4. Ozone

5. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s)

5. Formaldehyde

6. Bacteria (total count) 6. Particulate count 7. Molds and Fungus (total count) 7. Temperature & Relative Humidity

(%RH) 8. Particulate count 8. Total Volatile Organic Compounds

(VOC’s) 9. Bacteria (total count) 10. Moulds and Fungus (total count)

B. Monitoring shall be made while spaces are occupied on a Friday. Audits shall be

made after 1:00 p.m. Reports shall be submitted to the HVAC Engineer.

- END OF SECTION -


_________________________________________



VOICE & DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING

DOCUMENT NO: 1207-2-EL-6-742



Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - VOICE & DATA


Document No 1207-2-EL-6-741

21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 2 of 42


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 4

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 4

1.2 GENERAL 4

1.3 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS 4

1.4 SUMMARY OF WORK 4

1.5 REFERENCES 5

1.6 DEFINITIONS 6

1.7 BIDDING 7

1.8 SUBMITTALS 8

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS 10

1.10 CABLING BASIC REQUIREMENTS 12

1.11 GROUNDING AND BONDING 12

1.12 PRODUCT WARRANTY AND APPLICATION ASSURANCE 13

1.13 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE ROUTING AND INSTALLATION 15

1.14 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING 16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16

2.1 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS 16

2.2 GUARANTEED CHANNEL PERFORMANCE 16

2.3 OUTLETS 17

2.4 110 WIRING BLOCK 21

2.5 CATEGORY 6 MODULAR PATCH PANELS 22

2.6 COPPER PATCH CORDS 23

2.7 EQUIPMENT RACKS 24






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 3 of 42


2.8 FIBRE OPTIC BACKBONE CABLING DISTRIBUTION 26

2.9 FIBRE OPTIC HARDWARE 30

2.10 FIBRE OPTIC LINE/PATCH CORDS 30

2.11 GROUNDING SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS 31

PART 3 - EXECUTION 31

3.1 WORKMANSHIP 31

3.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 32

3.3 WORK AREA 32

3.4 HORIZONTAL 32

3.5 RISER BACKBONE 34

3.6 CAMPUS BACKBONE 34

3.7 EQUIPMENT ROOM 35

3.8 ADMINISTRATION 35

3.9 INSTALLATION 36

3.10 PENETRATIONS OF WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS 38

3.11 TESTING / WARRANTY 39

3.12 COMPLETION OF WORK 41

3.13 INSPECTION 41






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 4 of 42


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1.1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 GENERAL

1. Use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalogue number is for establishing standard of quality, general configuration, and operating characteristics desired only. This specification is intended to be a minimum standard for function, operation and performance. Equipment catalogue numbers are listed to establish this minimum.


1. Specification – Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Requirements

2. Specification 6-111 – Conduit

3. Specification 6-130 – Boxes

4. Specification 6-450 – Grounding

5. Specification 6-741 – Voice/Data Raceway System

1.4 SUMMARY OF WORK

1.4.1. Furnish and install complete with all accessories a Structured Cabling System

(SCS). The SCS shall serve as a vehicle for transport of data, video and voice telephony signals throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desks, workstation and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein.

1.4.2. The Contractor shall maintain a current copy of the design drawings,

specifications, installation schedule, equipment submittals and shop drawings at the job site at all times. These documents shall be made available to the Owner/Engineer at their request.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 5 of 42


1.4.3. Throughout the project, the Contractor shall provide levels of manpower necessary to meet all construction schedules.

1.4.4. Wiring utilized for data and voice communications shall originate at owner

provided switches and concentrators either wall mounted, in vertical free standing equipment racks, and/or enclosed wall mounted vertical equipment racks located at the Server Rooms (SR), the Main Cross-connect (MC) and the Intermediate cross-connect (IC). Wiring, terminations and patch bays between these designated demarcation points and outlet locations designated on the plans shall be considered part of the contract. Telecommunication Outlets (TO) for Voice and Data shall be furnished, wired and installed by the SCS systems vendor.

1.4.5. The system shall utilize a network of fibre optic, and unshielded twisted pair,

riser, tie and station cables. Cables and terminations shall be provided and located as shown and in the quantities indicated on the drawings. 1. Fibre cables shall terminate on fibre patch panels and/or modular patch panels located in all demarcation and termination points shown on the drawings. 2. All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations. 3. All cables shall terminate in an alpha-numeric sequence at all termination locations.

1.4.6 All copper cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B standards for Category 6 installations. 1.4.7. Available and unused pairs between the SR and TR (s) shall be terminated,

tested and shall be identified as spare at each location. 1.4.8. Station cables shall be provided by Contractor. 1.5 REFERENCES

1.5.1. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications

Wiring Standards, General requirements. 1.5.6. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications

Wiring Standards, Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components. 1.5.7. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications

Wiring Standards, Optical Fibre Cabling Components standards.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 6 of 42


1.5.8. ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

1.5.9. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A – Administration Standards for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructures. 1.5.10. International Standards Organization/International Electrotechnical

Commission (ISO/IEC) 11801. 1.5.11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL ) Cable Certification and Follow up

Program. 1.5.12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1.5.13. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 1.5.14. National Electric Code (NEC ), 1999 1.5.15. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 1.5.16. UL Testing Bulletin. 1.5.17. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3T9.5 Requirements for

UTP at 100 Mbps. 1.5.18. BICSI – TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International,

Telecommunications 1.5.19. Krone Cat#8 KRONE Structured Connectivity Solutions,

Performance Specifications, (Addendum) Latest Issue. 1.5.20. Krone Cat# 8 KRONE Structured Connectivity Solutions,

Components Guide, Latest Issue. 1.5.21. Krone Cat# 8 Design & Installation Guidelines, Latest Issue. 1.6 DEFINITIONS

1.6.1. Structured Cabling System (SCS): A SCS is defined as all required equipment

and cabling including hardware, termination blocks, cross connect wire or cordage, patch panels, patch cords, telecommunication outlets, work area cords, UTP and fibre optic cable installed an configured to provide computer data and voice connectivity from each data or voice device to the network file server or voice network/switch designated as the service point of the local






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 7 of 42


area network. 1.6.2. Work Area: The connection between the information outlet and the station

equipment in the work area is provided by the Work Area. It consists of cords, adapters, and other transmission electronics.

1.6.3. Horizontal Subsystem: The Horizontal subsystem Provides connections from

the horizontal cross connect to the Telecommunication Outlets (TOs) in the work areas. It consists of the horizontal transmission media, the associated connecting hardware terminating this media and IOs in the work area. Each floor of a building is served by its own Horizontal Subsystem.

1.6.4. Riser Backbone: The Riser Backbone subsystem links the main cross connect

(MC) in the equipment room to intermediate cross connects (IC) and horizontal cross connects in the Server Rooms (SR). It consists of the backbone transmission media between these locations and the associated connecting hardware terminating this media. It is normally installed in a star topology, with first-level backbone cables beginning at the main cross connect. If needed, second-level backbone cables begin at intermediate cross connects.

1.6.5 Campus Backbone: A Campus Backbone is used when a distribution system

encompasses more than one building. The components and cables that provide the link between buildings constitute the Campus Backbone. This subsystem includes the backbone transmission media, associated connecting hardware terminating this media, and electrical protection devices to mitigate harmful voltages when the media is exposed to lightning and/or power surges. It is normally first-level backbone cables beginning at the main cross connect in the equipment room of the hub building and extending to the intermediate cross connect in the equipment room of a satellite building.

1.6.6. Equipment Subsystem: The Equipment Subsystem consists of shared

(common) electronic communications equipment in the equipment room, main cross connect or telecommunications closet and the transmission media required to terminate this equipment on the distribution hardware.

1.6.7. The Administration Subsystem: The Administration Subsystem links all of the

subsystems together. It consists of labelling hardware for providing circuit identification and patch cords or jumper wire used for creating circuit connections at the cross connects.

1.7 BIDDING

1.7.1. At the time of bid, in addition to a complete bid including all pricing

information, provide the following:






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 8 of 42


1. A detailed description of any and all additions, deletions or exceptions taken to the bid documents. Include the reasons why changes are being proposed. 2. Detailed breakout of all requested alternate pricing. 3. A price to furnish and install each individual media type and system component under this proposed work. 4. Manufacturer’s original equipment cut sheets for each product for use on

this project. 1.8 SUBMITTALS

1.8.1. Schedules

1. Within 10 days of the notice to proceed, submit a full and complete schedule, in the form of a GANNT chart, for all phases and aspects of the work. A break down by floor, and work type (e.g. material delivery, pathways installation, rack/cabinet/frame installation, cable pulling, termination, labelling, testing) 2. Schedule shall be fully coordinated with the General Contractors overall construction schedule. 3. Schedule shall include dates when the Contractor needs certain specific areas to be completed (e.g. equipment rooms, Telecommunications Closets)

1.8.2. Product Data

1. Provide manufacturer’s catalogue information showing dimensions, colours, and configurations. 2. Submittals shall include all items called for in PART 2 – PRODUCTS of this document and the manufacturers cut sheets for the following: a. All fibre optic and copper cable: to include patch cords, cross connect wire and cross connect cordage. b. All connectors and required tooling. c. All termination system components for each cable type.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 9 of 42


d. All SR, MC, EF and TR equipment frame types, hardware. e. All grounding and building entrance protection surge suppression system components. f. All test equipment to be used for fibre and copper channels 3. A technical data sheet showing manufacturer’s Guaranteed Channel Performance over the full swept frequency range. 4. Technical data sheets shall include the physical specifications as well as the following electrical and transmission characteristics for the cable:

a. Mutual Capacitance b. Impedance c. DC Resistance d. Attenuation e. Worst Pair-to-Pair Near End Crosstalk f. Power Sum Near End Crosstalk g. ELFEXT h. Power Sum ELFEXT i. Return Loss

1.8.3. Pre-Qualification Certificate

1. Contractor shall submit the following documents with project proposal:

a. A letter of approval from the manufacturer (Krone, Ortronics/Berk-Tek) indicating completion of pre-qualification requirements by installing vendor. b. Submit proof from manufacturer of vendor’s good standing in manufacturer’s qualification program (Krone, Ortronics/Berk-Tek). c. Training certificates for design, engineering and installation of the proposed products (Krone, Ortronics/Berk-Tek).






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 10 of 42


d. Contractor must be a Corning Cable Systems LANscape™ Solutions Extended WarrantySM Program (EWP) Member and must provide written warranty certification and evidence of current EWP program membership. e. Contractor must offer a twenty-five (25) year extended warranty for the premises fibre cabling solution comprised of covered Corning Cable Systems’ products.

1.8.4. Material Guarantee

1. The wiring vendor (installer) shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all Category 6 and fibre optic cabling and components meet or exceed specifications (including installation) of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, 568-B.2, 568-B.3 and 569.

1.8.5. Material Provided

1. The successful wiring vendor (installer) shall be certain that all correct parts are ordered per Products Section of this document and installed in accordance with manufacturers design and installation guidelines. Vendor shall submit complete parts and part numbers to Engineer prior to installation of equipment for approval.

1.8.6. Warranty Documentation

1. Warranty shall be for a minimum of 20 years for the SCS and 25 years for the fibre. 2. Complete documentation regarding the manufacturer’s warranty shall be submitted as part of the proposal. This shall include, but is not limited to: a sample of the warranty that would be provided to the customer when the installation is complete and documentation of the support procedure for warranty issues. 3. A systems application assurance manual documenting the vendor supported applications and application guidelines shall be provided as part of the submittals

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

1.9.1. Manufacturer






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 11 of 42


1. The products specified in this specification shall be supplied by a single manufacturer, with the exception of 1. Data racks and other hardware that is not defined as part of the channel test configuration by ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B. 2. Approved structured cabling system manufacturers:

a. Krone b. Ortronics/Berk-Tek

3. Approved fibre manufacturers:

a. Corning Cable Systems (fibre) b. Superior (fibre cabinets)

1.9.2. Contractor

1. The Contractor selected to provide the installation of this system shall be certified by the manufacturing company in all aspects of design, installation and testing of the products described herein. 2. The Contractor shall utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this Project. 3. Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years of recent experience on structured cabling systems of similar type and size. 4. Contractor and design firm shall be in compliance with all federal, state and local statutes regarding qualifications of firms. 5. The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. 6. The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of optical and Category 5E and Category 6 metallic premise distribution systems. 7. The Contractor shall have personnel who are adequately trained in the usage of such tools and equipment. 8. Contractor shall submit a resume of qualification with the vendor’s proposal indicating the following:






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 12 of 42


a. A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names and telephone numbers for each. b. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of metallic and fibre optic cable systems on this project. c. A technical resume of experience for the vendor’s Project Manager and onsite installation supervisor who will be assigned to this project. d. A list of technical product training attended by the vendor’s personnel that will install the SCS system. e. Any sub-Contractor, who will assist the SCS vendor in performance of this work, shall have the same training and certification as the SCS vendor.

1.10 CABLING BASIC REQUIREMENTS

1.10.1. Cable Pathway

Extension of all data and voice cables shall be within raceway, conduit, cable tray or other designated cable delivery system.

1.10.2. Hardware

Required hardware includes, but is not limited to, termination blocks, fastening devices, data outlets, voice outlets, connectors and all required accessories to comply with this specification.

1.11 GROUNDING AND BONDING

1.11.1. All grounding and bonding shall meet the National Electrical Code

(NEC) as well as local codes which specify additional grounding and/or bonding requirements.

1.11.2. Bonding and Grounding

Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPA. Horizontal cables shall be grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70 and local requirements and practices. Horizontal equipment includes cross connect frames, patch panels and racks,






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 13 of 42


active telecommunication equipment and test apparatus and equipment. When required by local code, provide a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone utilizing a #6-AWG or larger bonding conductor that provides direct bonding between equipment rooms and telecommunications closets. This is part of the grounding and bonding infrastructure (part of the telecommunications pathways and spaces in the building structure), and is independent of equipment or cable.

1.12 PRODUCT WARRANTY AND APPLICATION ASSURANCE

1.12.1. Structured cabling system (SCS) Extended Product Warranty and

Application Assurance Program 1. Extended Product Warranty

a. The Extended Product Warranty covers product defects for all passive components of the SCS. Passive components are defined as those exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. The manufacturer shall warrant, from the date a Registration Certificate is issued by the manufacturer to the end-user, the following: b. The passive products that comprise the registered SCS will be free from manufacturing defects in material or workmanship under normal and proper use; c. All SCS approved passive cabling products that comprise the registered SCS solution exceed the specification of TIA 568-B.1, B.2, B.3 and exceed ISO/IEC 11801 standards and will conform to the performance specifications of the manufacturer’s associated product data sheet in effect at the time the Registration Certificate is issued; d. The installation will exceed the insertion and return loss, attenuation and near end crosstalk (NEXT) requirements of TIA 568-B and the ISO/IEC 11801 standards for cabling links/channel configurations specified in these standards.

1) That each SCS channel comprised exclusively of manufacturer’s Category 6 passive products, end-to-end, shall be capable of delivering 1.2 Gbps to the workstation in accordance with application standards.

e. This extended Product Warranty shall be applicable to the SCS only on the original site of installation. Under the Extended Product






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 14 of 42


Warranty, manufacturer shall either repair or replace the defective product itself at manufacturer’s cost. And in the U.S.A., manufacturer shall pay an Authorized manufacturer’s Reseller for the cost of labour to repair or replace any such defective product on behalf of the manufacturer.

2. Application Assurance

a. Application Assurance covers failure of the SCS to operate the applications which the system was designed to support, as well as additional application(s) defined below. Manufacturer shall warrant that the registered SCS solution will be free from failures which prevent operation of the specific applications for which the original SCS was designed. b. The Application Assurance Program shall also cover those applications identified in the current (at the time of installation) SCS Performance Specifications; and c. In accordance with application standards specifications, any applications introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that use ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B or ISO/IEC 11801 components and link/channel specifications for cabling.

1.12.2. Term of Warranty

1. For a minimum twenty years from the date of issuance of the Registration Certificate or installation, whichever is later.

1.12.3. Persons / Entity Covered

1. This Limited Warranty shall be for the benefit of the person or entity to which the manufacturer’s SCS Registration Certificate is issued and any successor (Transferable) in interest to the site in which such System was originally installed by the manufacturer or an Authorized manufacturer’s Reseller. 2. If manufacturer repairs the product, it may use new or reconditioned replacement parts. If manufacturer chooses to replace the product, manufacturer may replace it with a new or reconditioned one of the same or similar design. Any such repair or replacement will be warranted for either (a) 90 days or (b) the remainder of the original 20-year warranty period, whichever is longer.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 15 of 42


1.13 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE ROUTING AND INSTALLATION

1.13.1. Cabling

1. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC ) Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the appropriate local codes. 2. All copper cabling shall bear CMP (Plenum Rated), CM/CMR (Riser Rated) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed. 3. All fibre optic cabling shall bear OFNP (Plenum Rated), OFNR (Riser Rated) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed.

1.13.2. Cable Pathway

1. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or conduit are not available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, station wiring with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. 2. Cable bundles shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing building structure and framework at intervals of four (4) feet average with a maximum separation of five (5) feet 3. Plenum rated cable ties shall be used in all appropriate areas. 4. The Contractor shall adhere to the manufacturers’ requirements for bending radius and pulling tension of all data and voice cables. 5. Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the ceiling grid. 6. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems or any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.

1.13.3. Fire Stopping

1. Sealing of openings around the exterior of the sleeves or openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by the Contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. Sealing of the space internal to the sleeves or openings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 16 of 42


such a manner which is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work. 3. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between locations as shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor) work. 4. Any openings created by or for the Contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this work.

1.13.4. Contractor Responsibility

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces, including painting, shall be included as necessary.

1.14 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING

1.14.1. Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the

drawings shall be governed by the provisions of this specification and the applicable drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS

2.1.1. Equivalent product(s) may be considered for substitution for those products

specified, however, the equivalent product(s) must be approved and show demonstrated and documented equivalence to the product(s) specified.

2.1.2. Documentation shall include, but is not limited to: product samples, data

sheets, and actual test data. 2.1.3. Written approval for product substitution must be submitted with the bid. 2.2 GUARANTEED CHANNEL PERFORMANCE

2.2.1. Category 6 Guaranteed Channel Performance

1. All copper cable and apparatus shall conform to the Category 6/classE






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 17 of 42


Channel Performance Specification. 2. The copper cable and apparatus channel performance shall be measured over the full 100 meters (328 feet) length and include 4 or 6 connection points. 3. The specifications for the 4 pair UTP Category 6 channel are divided into two primary groups based upon high performance and premium performance cable. The Category 6 channel shall consist of all cable and components with four or six ?connections that comprise the full 100 meter (328 feet) length circuit from the Hub/Server/LAN Electronics port located in the Telecommunications Closet or the main data administration location to the voice/data/video/imaging device port located at the User Work Station. 4. The Category 6 cable and Category 6 channel components shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer. The manufacturer shall warrant the Category 6 channel cable, components, and applications for a period of 20 years. 5. The 20 year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and include all labour to replace any defective components as well as the component replacement. 6. The Category 6 channel with four (4) connections shall have a minimum of 10dB Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (ACR); across the full frequency range of 1MHz 500MHzThe Delay Skew on the 100 meter channel shall not exceed 30 ns. 7. The Category 6 cable and components shall be electrically compatible with future networks and backward compatible with existing Category 3, 5, 5E. 8. The Category 6 components shall be engineered and manufactured to compensate for any CAT 3, 5 or 5E component crosstalk and shall provide at least CAT 3, 5 or 5E performance in all of the customer’s existing installed base of voice/data/video. 9. The Category 6 cable and components shall be physically compatible with existing installed base of equipment. 10. The Category 6 cable and components shall not require special cords, specialty tools or special installation requirements.

2.3 OUTLETS

2.3.1. Outlet Locations

1. Unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document, all voice






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 18 of 42


and data wall outlets for 24 AWG copper cable shall be:

a. 8-position/ 8-conductor modular outlets b. Insulation displacement c. Support Universal applications in a multivendor environment, accepting modular RJ-45 plugs. . d. Provided with blank module inserts for all unused module locations. Jack module arrangement is shown on the drawings. Provide colour coded inserts at each outlet, termination block and at patch panels as shown on the drawings. e. Mounted in one, two or three gang utility outlet boxes. f. Equipped with EIA/TIA-T568A and EIA/TIA-T568B universal wiring labels.

2.3.2. Outlet Faceplates 2.3.3. Flush – For administrative areas, flush mount faceplates shall be available in

single, duplex, triplex, quadplex, or sixplex arrangement in a single gang configuration. 1. The outlets shall be capable of being installed in any (M-series) (Krone Cat#) or TracJack (Ortronics Cat#) modular faceplate, frame, or surface-mounted box avoiding the need for special faceplates. 2. Approved Faceplates

a. Krone Cat# Designer Faceplate with number of ports as required. 1) One-Port M10LE 2) Two-Port M12LE 3) Three Port M13LE 4) Four Port M14LE 5) Six Port M16LE

b. Ortronics Cat# TracJack Faceplates with number of ports as required:






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 19 of 42


1) One-port OR -40300549 2) Two-port OR 40300548 3) Three-port OR 40300547 4) Four-port OR 40300546 5) Six-port OR 40300545

c. Colour shall be White

3. Colour of outlets a. Data – Outlet colour shall be blue b. Voice – Outlet colour shall be white

2.3.4. Flush – Mount faceplates shall be available in single, duplex, triplex,

quadplex, or sixplex arrangement in a single gang configuration. 1. The outlets shall be capable of being installed in any or Leviton modular faceplate, frame, or surface-mounted box avoiding the need for special faceplates. 2. Approved Faceplates:

a. Leviton Cat# Decora Faceplate with number of ports as required. b. Colour shall be White.

2.3.5. Category 6 Gigabit outlets

1. All Category 6 outlets shall meet or exceed Category 6 transmission requirements for connecting hardware, as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard and be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program. 2. The Category 6 outlets shall be backward compatible with Category 5E, 5 and 3 cords and cables. 3. The outlet shall use either the EIA/TIA-T568A or EIA/TIA-T568B wiring. However, EIA/TIA-T568B wiring scheme shall be used. 4. Approved Category 6 outlets:






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 20 of 42


a. Krone Cat# MGS400 GigaSPEED® XL (for administrative areas only) b. Ortronics Cat# Clarity6™ Outlet (for administrative areas only) c. Leviton Gigamax® (for guest areas only)

5. Acceptable Manufacturers

a. Krone Cat# 1061 (2061 for plenum areas)

1) White cable colour for voice 2) Blue cable colour for data

b. Berk-Tek NetClearGT LANmark-350


c. Colour of outlets

1) Data – Outlet colour shall match outlet faceplate cover 2) Voice– Outlet colour shall match outlet faceplate cover

2.3.6. Category 6 UTP, 4 Pair (High Performance)

1. The high performance Category 6 UTP cable shall be of the traditional round design with Mylar separator between pairs. 2. The cable shall support Voice, Analogue Baseband Video/Audio, Fax,Modem,Switched-56, T-1, ISDN,RS-232, RS422, RS-485, 10BASE – T Ethernet, Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, as well as all 77 channels (550 MHz) of analogue broadband video. 3. The cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a plenum or non-plenum cable. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be UL and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (plenum) or CM (non-plenum). 4. Performance shall characterized to 550 MHz to support high-bandwidth






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 21 of 42


video applications 5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Krone Cat# 1071E XL7 (2071E for plenum areas) 1) White cable colour for voice 2) Blue cable colour for data

b. Berk-Tek NetClearGT2 10032455 LANmark-1000 (10032094 for plenum rated)


2.4 110 WIRING BLOCK

2.4.1. The wiring block shall support Category 6 applications and facilitate cross

connection and interconnection using either cross connect wire (voice only) or the appropriate category patch cords.

2.4.2. The wiring blocks shall be fire retardant, moulded plastic consisting of

horizontal index strips for terminating 25 pairs of conductors each. The index strips shall be marked with five colours on the high teeth, separating the tip and ring of each pair, to establish pair location.

2.4.3. A series of fanning strips shall be located on each side of the block for

dressing the cable pairs terminated on the adjacent index strips. 2.4.4. The wiring block shall accommodate 19- through 26-AWG conductors and

shall be able to mount directly on wall surfaces with or without backboards or on a 19” free-standing frame.

2.4.5. Clear label holders with the appropriate coloured inserts shall be provided

with the wiring blocks. The insert labels shall contain vertical lines spaced on the basis of circuit size (3-, 4-, or 5-pair) and shall not interfere with running, tracing or removing jumper wire/patch cords.

2.4.6. The wiring blocks shall be available in 100 and 300 pair sizes and shall be

available with legs. 2.4.7. The wiring block shall be able to accommodate over 500 repeated insertions






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 22 of 42


without incurring permanent deformation and it shall pass the reliability test of no more than one contact failure in 10000 connections. 2.4.8. The 110 wiring blocks shall meet the following specifications: 2.4.9. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Krone Cat# 110AA2-100/300FT Wiring Blocks (with legs) 2. Ortronics Cat# 110AA2-100/300FT Wiring Blocks (with legs)

2.4.10. Jumper Trough

1. Provide a horizontal trough for the routing of patch cords and/or cross connect wire. 2. Provide between each wiring block and top and bottom of each group of wiring blocks.

a. Krone Cat# 110A3 (with legs) b. Ortronics Cat# OR-30200140 (with legs)

2.5 CATEGORY 6 MODULAR PATCH PANELS

2.5.1. The Category 6 modular jack panels shall meet or exceed the proposed Category 6 standards requirements in ISO/IEC 11801, CENLEC EN 50173 and ANSI/TIA/EIA and shall be UL Listed.

2.5.2. The jack panels shall be 19-inch rack mountable.

1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Krone Cat# 1100GS#-24/48 Patch Panels b. Ortronics Cat# Clarity 6 OR PHD68u24/48 Patch Panels (with hinged cable management OR PHD66u24HM/48 HM)

2.5.3. Provide patch cord organizers between each modular patch panel.

1. Shall have horizontal routing via metal distribution rings 2. Shall have 24 plastic clips to provide vertical pathways for patch cables






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 23 of 42


3. Approved Manufacturers

a. Krone Cat# 1100D2 Patch Cord Organizers b. Ortronics Cat# OR-808004410 Patch Cord Organizers

2.6 COPPER PATCH CORDS

2.6.1. Category 6 Patch Cords

1. All patch cords shall exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC Category 6/Classs E specifications. 2. All patch cords shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and Category 5E systems. 3. The patch cords shall incorporate an anti-snag feature that provides maximum protection from snagging during moves and re-arrangements. 4. Patch cords shall be UL listed, UL-C certified and AUSTEL approved. 5. Patch cords shall support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per second. 6. Patch cords shall be available in stranded and solid conductor in lengths to 100 feet.

CPC a b c d e f g h Copper Patch Cord

Termination End 1

Termination End 2

Cordage Wiring Scheme

MGS Module Colour

Cord Colour

UOM Length

1 D8CM/RJ45

1 D8CM/RJ45

1 1074E (GS3-4pr)

1 TIA568A

0 NA

1 Black

F Foot

001 1

3 GS8E/RJ45

5 2MGS Mod Jack

2 3071E (LSZH Solid GS3

2 TIA568B

1 Black

2 Blue

M Metre

002 2

5 VisiPatch ™

3 GS8E,RJ45

4 1074D (Stranded 4pr)

3 1X4, 2X3

2 Blue

3 Gray

050 50

6 D8PS RJ45

4 Unterminated

5 1074D

3 Gray

4 Green

100 100






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 24 of 42


(Stranded 2pr)

8 110GS

5 VisiPatch ™

6 1074D (Stranded 1pr)

4 Green

5 Ivory

6 D8PS RJ45

7 2072E Solid Plenum

5 Ivory

6 Orange

8 110GS 8 1071 Solid Non Plenum

6 Orange

7 Red

7 Red

8 White

8 White

9 Yellow

9 Yellow

A Sable

B Lilac

C Slate

Krone Cat# Category 6 Patch Cords Approved: GS8E, CPC3312-0xFxxx Plug-Plug, 4 Pair, Stranded, B wiring Patch Cord approved

GS8E, CPC3412-0xFxxx Plug-Unterminated, 4 Pair, Stranded, B wiring Patch Cord approved

GS8E-SN, CPC3482-0xFxxx Plug-Unterminated, Solid Non-plenum, B wiring Patch Cord approved GS8E-SND, CPC3382-0xFxxx Plug-Plug Solid Non-plenum, B wiring Patch Cord approved

GS8E-SP, CPC3472-0xFxxx Plug-Unterminated, Solid Plenum, B wiring Patch Cord approved

GS8E-SPD, CPC3372-0xFxxx Plug-Plug, Solid Plenum, B wiring Patch Cord approved

GS8MGS-SN, CPC3282-xxFxxx Plug-Jack, Solid Non-plenum, B wiring Patch Cord approved

GS8MGS-SP, CPC3272-xxFxxx Plug-Jack, Solid Plenum, B wiring Patch Cord approved

2.6.2. Patch cords are provided by owner. 2.7 EQUIPMENT RACKS

2.7.1. General

1. The equipment rack shall provide vertical cable management and support for the patch cords at the front of the rack and wire management, support, and protection for the horizontal cables inside the legs of the rack. Waterfall cable management shall be provided at the top of the rack for patch cords and for horizontal cables entering the rack channels for protection and to maintain proper bend radius and cable support. Wire management shall also be mounted above each patch panel and/or piece of equipment on the rack. The






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 25 of 42


rack shall include mounting brackets for cable tray ladder rack to mount to the top of the rack as required. Velcro cable ties shall be provided inside the rack channels to support the horizontal cable. Rack shall be black in colour to match the patch panels and cable management.

2.7.2. Free-Standing Rack

1. Free-standing rack shall: a. Provide the necessary strain relief, bend radius and cable routing for proper installation of high performance cross connect products, meeting all specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. b. Have top cable trough with waterfall and built in patch/horizontal cable distribution separator. c. Have EIA hole pattern on front and rear. d. Have with a 6.5” channel depth. e. Have hook and loop straps for securing bulk cables inside the vertical U-channels. f. Be 19” mounting. g. Have a height of 7 ft h. Have vertical patch cord management. i. Shall be UL listed

2. Approved Manufacturer a. Ortronics Mighty Mo II Racks Cat # OR-60400159 (44 rack units) b. Superior “RackMax” Cat#CMR45 (45 rack units)

2.7.3. Wall Mounted Rack

1. Wall mount rack shall:

a. Provide the necessary strain relief, bend radius and cable routing for proper installation of high performance cross connect products, meeting all specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. b. Have EIA hole pattern on front and rear. c. Have Plexiglass lockable hinged door






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 26 of 42


d. Locking rear swing frame with heavy duty quick release hinges. e. Vented sides and top f. Have a 6 outlet power strip with surge

1) Chatsworth Cat#10814

2. Approved Manufacturer a. Superior Cat# WC2428 – 45”Hx21”Wx20”D, 24 rack units b. Superior Cat# WC1838 – 36”Hx21”Wx24”D, 18 rack units c. Superior Cat# WC1828 – 36”Hx21”Wx20”D, 18 rack units d. Superior Cat# WC1818 – 36”Hx21”Wx16”D, 18 rack units e. Superior Cat# WC1238 – 24”Hx21”Wx24”D, 12 rack units f. Superior Cat# WC1228 – 24”Hx21”Wx20”D, 12 rack units g. Superior Cat# WC1218 – 24”Hx21”Wx16”D, 12 rack units h. Superior Cat# WC828 – 15”Hx21”Wx20”D, 8 rack units i. Superior Cat# WC818 – 15”Hx21”Wx16”D, 8 rack units

2.8 FIBRE OPTIC BACKBONE CABLING DISTRIBUTION

2.8.1. General

1. The cable must meet the requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) Section 770. 2. Plenum Applications - Applicable Flame Test: UL 910 (NFPA 262-1994)

2.8.2. Fibre Cable Characteristics 1. All fibres must be useable and meet required specifications. The optical glass manufacturer shall be Corning Optical Fibre Products. . 2. All fibre cables must be flame retardant and meet UL-1666 OFNR specification






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 27 of 42


3. All optical fibres shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and occlusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification 4. A silica core surrounded by a concentric silica glass cladding shall comprise each optical fibre. The fibre shall be a matched clad design manufactured by the outside vapour deposition process (OVD). 5. Each optical fibre shall be proof tested by the fibre manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi (0.7 GN/m2). The fibre shall be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective coating. The coating shall be in physical contact with the cladding surface. 6. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum value for each cabled fibre at 23 ±5⁰C on the original shipping reel.

2.8.3. 62.5-Micron Multi-mode Fibre

1. Multimode fibre shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAA-A, “Detail Specification for 62.5-µm Core Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class, Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibres." 2. The core diameter shall be 62.5 ± 3.0 µm. The core non-circularity shall be ±1.0%. The cladding diameter shall be 125.0± 2.0 µm. 3. The cladding non-circularity shall be ±1.0%. 4. The core-to-cladding concentricity shall be <12 3.0 µm. 5. The coating outside diameter shall be 245 ± 5 µm. 6. The optical fibre refractive index profile shall be graded. The numerical aperture shall be 0.275 ± 0.015. 7. The maximum cabled fibre attenuation shall be ±3.0 dB/km at 850 nm and ±0.7.dB/km at 1300 nm. 8. The cabled optical fibre shall support industry-standard IEEE 802.3 10GBASE-S (10 Gigabit Ethernet at 850 nm) physical layer specifications. 9. The optical fibre shall support laser-based Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) operation in the 1000BASE-SX operating window (850 nm) at 200 meters, and in the 1000BASE-LX operating window (1300 nm) at 500 meters.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 28 of 42


10. There shall be no point discontinuity greater than 0.2 dB. 11. The attenuation coefficient at 1380 nm shall not exceed the attenuation coefficient at 1300 nm by more than 1.0 dB/km. The attenuation due to 100 turns of fibre around a 75 mm diameter mandrel shall not exceed 0.5 dB at 850 nm and 1300 nm.

2.8.4. Single-mode Fibre

1. The single-mode fibre shall meet EIA/TIA-492CAAA, “Detail Specification for Class lVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibres,” and ITU-T G.652, “Characteristics of Single-mode Optical Fibre Cable.” 2. Fibre shall have a mode field diameter of 9.20 + 0.40 µm at 1310 nm and 10.40 + 0.50 µm at 1550 nm. 3. Fibre core-clad concentricity shall be ± 0.5 μm. 4 Fibre cladding diameter shall be 125.0 + 0.7 µm. 4. Fibre cladding non-circularity shall be ±0.7%. 5. Fibre coating diameter shall be 245 5 µm. 6. The cabled fibre attenuation shall be < 0.33 dB/km at 1310 nm and < 0.20 dB/km at 1550 nm. 7. The attenuation at the water peak (1383 nm) shall not exceed 2.1 dB/km. 8. The attenuation due to 100 turns of fibre around a 50 + 2 mm diameter mandrel shall not exceed 0.05 dB at 1310 nm and 0.05 dB at 1550 nm. 9. There shall be no point discontinuities greater than 0.10 dB at either 1310 nm or 1550 nm. 10. The maximum dispersion shall be < 3.2 ps/(nm/km) from 1285 nm to 1330 nm and shall be < 18 ps/ (nm/km) at 1550 nm. 11. The cabled fibre shall support laser-based Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) operation according to the 1000BASE-LX (1310 nm) specifications up to 5000 meters, in accordance with the GbE standard. 12. The cabled fibre shall support 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GbE) operation according to the 10GBASE-LX4 (1300 nm region), 10GBASE-L (1310 nm) and 10GBASE-E (1550 nm) specifications for distances of 10 km, 10 km and






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 29 of 42


40 km, respectively. 2.8.5. Outside Plant Cable Construction

1. Cable shall be all-dielectric, riser-rated, standard loose-tube design with dry water blocking for indoor and outdoor use. 2. Each fibre shall be distinguishable by means of colour coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B, "Optical Fibre Cable Colour Coding.” 3. The fibres shall be coloured with ultraviolet (UV) curable inks. 4. Buffer tubes shall be made from polypropylene, filled with a non-hygroscopic, non-nutritive to fungus, electrically non-conductive, homogenous gel and be manufactured to a standard 3.0 mm in size, regardless of fibre count. 5. Buffer tubes containing fibres shall be colour coded with distinct and recognizable colours in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B. 6. Buffer tubes in a hybrid cable (cable containing more than one type of fibre) shall contain only one fibre type. 7. Identification of fibre types in a hybrid cable shall correspond to fibre core diameter (or mode field diameter) from smallest to largest in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B. 8. Cable shall be comprised of water-swellable yarns and/or tapes, dielectric strength members (as required), ripcord(s) and an MDPE jacket containing carbon black to provide ultraviolet light protection while inhibiting the growth of fungus. 9. Cable jackets shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or file number, fibre count and fibre type, month and year of manufacture, sequential meter or foot markings, a telecommunication handset symbol as required by Section 350G of the National Electrical Safety Code®, fibre count, and fibre type, flame rating and listing marking. The actual length of the cable shall be within -0/+1% of the length markings. 10. The outside plant (OSP) fibre optic cables jacket colour shall be black.

2.8.6. Packing and Shipping

1. The cable shall be packaged in cartons and/ or wound on spools or reels. Each package shall contain only one continuous length of cable with sufficient






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 30 of 42


length for entire run without splicing. The packaging shall be constructed so as to prevent damage to the cable during shipping and handling. 2. Tests tails shall be at least 2 meters long. The inner end shall be fastened so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose during shipping and installation. Tails shall be permanently marked with an identification number that it can be used by the manufacturer to trace the manufacturing history of the cable and the fibre.

2.8.7. Approved Manufacturers

1. Corning Cable Systems 006KWF-14130A20 (6 Strand Multimode)





2.9 FIBRE OPTIC HARDWARE

2.9.1. 96 Port fibre optic housing shall be Corning Cable Systems P/N CCH-04U 2.9.2. Eight port ST connector housing panels loaded with multi-mode ST

connectors shall be Corning Cable Systems P/N CCH-CP08-15. 2.9.3. Eight port ST connector housing panels loaded with single-mode ST

connectors shall be Corning Cable Systems P/N CCH-CP08-19. 2.9.4. Multi-mode ST Unicam connectors shall be Corning Cable Systems P/N 95-

000-51 (ceramicferrule). 2.9.5. Single-mode ST Unicam connectors shall be Corning Cable Systems P/N 95-

200-52. 2.9.6. Buffer tube fan-out unit shall be Corning Cable Systems P/N FAN BT25-12

with 12 fibre pair buffer tubes. 2.10 FIBRE OPTIC LINE/PATCH CORDS

2.10.1. All optical fibre line/patch cords shall be provided by owner.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 31 of 42


2.11 GROUNDING SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS

2.11.1 Grounding Conductor

1. The SCS Contractor shall provide a #6 AWG stranded copper wire cable between ground bars located at each TR and the building main service ground point. This ground conductor shall be utilized for equipment, termination, equipment rack and computer equipment grounding.

2.11.2. Bonding and Grounding 1. Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the

NEC and NFPA.

2. Horizontal cables and equipment shall be grounded in compliance with

ANSI/NFPA 70 and local requirements and practices.

3. Horizontal equipment includes cross connect frames, patch panels and

racks, active telecommunication equipment and test apparatus and

equipment.

2.11.3. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone

1. When required by local code, provide a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone utilizing a #6-AWG or larger bonding conductor that provides direct bonding between equipment rooms and telecommunications closets. This is part of the grounding and bonding infrastructure (part of the telecommunications pathways and spaces in the building structure), and is independent of equipment or cable. 2. Always provide Telecommunications Bonding Backbone when using non-shielded backbone copper cable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

3.1.1. Components of the SCS system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike

manner. 3.1.2 Wiring colour codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be

uniform throughout the system.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 32 of 42


3.1.1 Identification markings and systems shall be uniform. 3.1.4. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B wiring codes shall standardize all SCS wiring. 3.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3.2.1 The wiring system components shall comply with all product specifications

contained in Section two. 3.2.2. The structured cabling system shall consist of the Work Area, Horizontal, and

Backbone – Riser, Server Rooms (SR), Call Centre and Administration elements.

3.3 WORK AREA

3.3.1. Wiring and cords

1. Contractor shall supply the wiring or cords that connect terminal devices to information outlets. This includes mounting cords and connectors, as well as extension cords.

3.4 HORIZONTAL

3.4.1. Horizontal Cabling

1. Contractor shall supply horizontal cables to connect each information outlet to the backbone subsystem on the same floor. 2. Unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document, the type of horizontal cables used for each work location shall be 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP)

3. The 4-pair UTP cables shall be run using a star topology format from the administration subsystem (Telecommunications Room) on each floor to every individual Telecommunication Outlet. 4. All cable routes are to be parallel and/or perpendicular with the outside walls of the building. Alternate paths must be approved by Engineer prior to installation of the cabling. 5. The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the administration subsystem (Telecommunications Closet) on each floor to the Telecommunication Outlet shall not exceed 295 ft (90 m).






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 33 of 42


6. Contractor shall adhere to the manufactures recommendations and specifications with regard to the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of the 4-pair UTP cable during handling and installation. 7. Each run of cable between the termination block and the information outlet shall be continuous without any joints or splices. 8. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where walker duct, cable trays or conduit are not available, the Contractor shall bundle station wiring with Velcro type cable ties at appropriate distances.

a. The cable bundling shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing building structure and framework.

9. Plenum cable will be used in all appropriate areas. 10. The Contractor shall conceal horizontal distribution wiring internally within the walls. If obstructions exist, Contractor shall secure approval by Engineer prior to the use of an alternate method. 11. Every effort will be made to schedule the requirements under this Contract in such a manner so as to complete all above ceiling work prior to ceiling tile installation. In the event Contractor is required to remove ceiling tiles, such Work shall not break or disturb grid and must be coordinated with the General Contractor. 12. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed type MPR, MPP, CMR, or CMP as stated later in this section. 13. Contractor shall provide shop drawings with detailed cable run diagrams for cable runs within raised floors detailing exact locations of cable for review and approval by Engineer after coordination with other contractors, architect and general contractor. 14. Conduit runs installed by the contractor should not exceed 100 feet or contain more than two 90 degree sweeping bends without utilizing appropriately sized pull boxes. 15. Station cables and tie cables installed within ceiling spaces shall be routed through these spaces at right angles to electrical power circuits.

3.4.2. Work location information outlets

1. Supply and install outlets as shown on drawings.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 34 of 42


3.5 RISER BACKBONE

3.5.1. Riser Backbone

1. Contractor shall supply and install the transmission media and terminating hardware to provide interconnection between the MC and each TR in a star topology. 2. All cable routes to be approved by Engineer prior to installation. 3. All fibres will be run in inner duct and terminated in the SR's with ST type connectors in (wall) (rack) mounted fibre cabinets equipped with sufficient panels, couplers and jumper storage shelves to terminate and secure all fibres. 4. Contractor shall run the riser cables in a star topology, terminated in the equipment room at one end and in the administration subsystem at the other end. 5. Riser and tie cables shall be extended between SR's utilizing the interfloor conduit sleeves or conduits. 6. The cable shall support voice and data applications. 7. Contractor shall adhere to the manufactures recommendations and specifications with regard to the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of all backbone cables during handling and installation.

3.6 CAMPUS BACKBONE

3.6.1. Contractor shall supply and install the transmission media and terminating

hardware to provide inter-building communications facility. 3.6.2. All cable routes to be approved by Engineer prior to installation. 3.6.3. Contractor shall supply outside plant multi-pair copper cable, outside plant

optical fibre cable and electrical protection devices that will prevent electrical surges on the cable from entering buildings.

3.6.4. The cable distribution system shall be underground in conduit. 3.6.5. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to secure any permits required

for the construction of the outside plant.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 35 of 42


3.7 EQUIPMENT ROOM

3.7.1. Terminations

1. Contractor shall terminate all wires and fibres. 3.7.2. Electrical Protection

1. Contractor shall supply lightning protectors and wires used to ground the equipment. 2. The electrical protection devices supplied by the contractor shall be in multi-pair form. 3. For small pair count applications, contractor shall supply electrical protection devices which consist of a mounting panel for a series of solid-state or gas-tube protector units and a wiring block. The wiring block shall be used for input and output cable terminations. Insertion of the protector units into the mounting block will complete the circuit.

3.8 ADMINISTRATION

3.8.1. The administration subsystem shall consist of wiring blocks and or patch

panels for termination of copper cables or optical fibres. 1. All wall field layouts to be as detailed on drawings or as approved by

Engineer prior to installation.

3.8.2. Fields

1. Separate termination fields shall be created for voice and data applications if both are wall mounted.

3.8.3. Termination blocks 1. Termination blocks that require rotation after connection of horizontal/vertical wiring shall not be allowed.

3.8.4. Cross-connect wire, patch cords

1. Contractor shall provide cross-connect wire, copper and fibre patch cords






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 36 of 42


for cross-connection and inter-connection of termination blocks, patch panels, and fibre cabinets.

a. Jumper type 1) The type of jumper cables shall depend on ANSI/EIA/TIA Category 5E, Category 6 applications, or fibre application and the termination block used, i.e. a punch panel, a patch panel termination block.

3.9 INSTALLATION

3.9.1. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-B

standards, federal and local standards and MANUFACTURER Design and Installation guidelines.

1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the

specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines will require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labour necessary to properly rectify the situation. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation.

3.9.2. Bonding and Grounding

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing an approved ground at all newly installed distribution frames, and/or insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities. 2. The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes, and framework. 3. All grounds shall consist of #6 AWG or larger (As required) copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved building ground and bonded to the main electrical ground. 4. Grounding must be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA and all local codes

and practices. 3.9.3. Power Separation






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 37 of 42


1. The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or Share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus.

3.9.4. Miscellaneous Equipment

1. The Contractor shall provide any necessary screws, anchors, clamps, tie wraps, distribution rings, wire moulding (MC & TR locations), miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the installation of the System.

3.9.5. Special Equipment and Tools

1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish any special installation equipment or tools necessary to properly complete the System.

a. Tools shall include, but are not limited to: 1) Tools for terminating cables,

2) Testing and splicing equipment for copper/fibre cables,

3) Communication devices,

4) Jack stands for cable reels,

5) Cable wenches.

3.9.6. Labelling

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for printed labels for all cables and cords, distribution frames, and outlet locations i.e., 2N-001-V, 2N-001-D1, 2N-001-D2 at the time of delivery. Adhere to existing owner standards if exist. 2. Labels shall not be written by hand.

3.9.7. Cable Records

1. The Contractor shall maintain conductor polarity (tip and ring) identification at the main equipment room (switch room), risers, and station connecting blocks in accordance with industry practices.

3.9.8. As Built Documentation 1. Upon completion of the project, Contractor is to prepare "As Built" documentation showing actual site conditions and installation as constructed. 2. Provide copies of such documentation to Owner as mentioned below.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 38 of 42


a. Upon completion of system installation, Contractor shall provide to Owner for its records the following:

1) MC, TR and EF Diagrams which shall include: (1) Cable routing

(2) Position of all components and

(3) Detailed layout of the wall field

(4) Labelling plan.

2) Work Area Floor Plans which shall Include:

(1) Detailed cable routes

(2) Approved labelling plan for all work areas.

3) Riser Distribution Plan 4) Cable Tray, Conduit, and Raceway Plans 5) Campus Distribution Plan (if applicable)

b. Documentation shall be in the following format:

1) Four (4) hard copies and one electronic AutoCAD/Revit copy of all diagrams and drawings in "D" size (24" x 36") or "E" size (30" x 42") as appropriate,

3.9.9. Additional Records

1. In addition to the engineering diagrams, the following items shall be provided by the Contractor:

a. Cable Records and Assignments

3.10 PENETRATIONS OF WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS

3.10.1. Prior consent

1. The Contractor shall make no penetration of floors, walls or ceiling without






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 39 of 42


the prior consent from GRG. 3.10.2. Sealing penetrations – The area around the exterior of the sleeve shall

be sealed by the contractor who installed the sleeve, the area internal to the sleeve shall be sealed by the Contractor who pulled or placed the cables.

1. Where penetrations through acoustical walls or other walls for cableways have been provided for the Contractor or made by the Contractor, such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor in compliance with applicable code requirements and as directed by Owner's Architect or General Contractor. 2. Where penetrations through fire-rated walls for cableways have been provided for the Contractor or made by the Contractor, such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor as required by code and as directed by Owner's Architect or General Contractor.

3.11 TESTING / WARRANTY

3.11.1. Copper Cable testing

1. Testing of all copper wiring shall be performed prior to system acceptance. 2. 100 percent of the horizontal and riser wiring pairs shall be tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals, transposition and presence of AC voltage. 3. Voice and data horizontal wiring pairs shall be tested from the information outlet to the TR. 4. The Category 6 cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of EIA/TIA 568-B Category 6. 5. Category 6 horizontal cables shall be tested according to test set manufacturers instructions utilizing the latest firmware and software.

a. Testing shall include all of the electrical parameters. b. Any pairs not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge.

6. Complete, end to end, test results must be submitted to Engineer for review. Submit test results in an organized three ring binder.

3.11.2. Optical Fibre Cable Testing

1. All fibre testing shall be performed on all fibres in the completed end to end






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 40 of 42


system. 2. Testing shall consist of a bidirectional end to end OTDR trace performed per EIA/TIA 455-61 or a bidirectional end to end power meter test performed per EIA/TIA 455- 53A. 3. The system loss measurements shall be provided at (850 and 1310 nanometres for multimode fibres) and (1310 and 1550 for single mode fibres). 4. Pre-installation cable testing

a. The Contractor shall test all fibre cable prior to the installation of the cable. b. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be found defective at a later date.

5. Loss Budget a. Fibre links shall have a maximum loss of:

1) Allowable cable loss per km)(km of fibre in link) + (.4dB)(number of connectors) = maximum allowable loss

b. A mated connector to connector interface is defined as a single connector. c. Loss numbers for the installed link shall be calculated by taking the sum of the bidirectional measurements and dividing that sum by two. d. Any link not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge to Owner. e. Documentation shall be provided in both hard copy and Compact Disk to the point of contact.

3.11.3. Manufacturer Warranty

1. Contractor shall provide a Twenty (20) year Structured Connectivity Solution Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance.

3.11.4. Additional Warranty

1. Contractor shall state any additional Contractor supplied warranty.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 41 of 42


3.12 COMPLETION OF WORK

3.12.1. At the completion of the System, the Contractor shall restore to its

former condition, all aspects of the project site and on a daily basis, shall remove all waste and excess materials, rubbish debris, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the services provided under this Contract.

3.12.2. All clean up, restoration, and removal noted above will be by the Contractor and at no additional cost.

3.12.3. If the Contractor fails in its duties under this paragraph, Owner may

upon notice to the Contractor perform the necessary clean up and deduct the costs there of from any amounts due or to become due to the Contractor.

3.13 INSPECTION

3.13.1. On-going inspections shall be performed during construction by the

Project Manager and/or System Engineer. All work shall be performed in a high quality manner and the overall appearance shall be clean, neat and orderly.

3.13.2. The following shall be examined and shall comply satisfactorily in all

instances.

1. Is the documentation complete, including Submittals/As-Builts? 2. Are all cables properly labelled, from end-to-end? 3. Have all terminated cables been properly tested in accordance with the specifications for the specific category as well as tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals, transposition and presence of AC and/or DC voltage? 4. Is the cable type suitable for its pathway? 5. Are the cables bundled in parallel? 6. Have the pathway manufacturer's guidelines been followed? 7. Are all cable penetrations installed properly and fire stopped according to code? 8. Have the Contractors avoided excessive cable bending?






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 42 of 42


9. Have potential EMI and RFI sources been considered? 10. Is Cable Fill Correct? 11. Are hanging supports within 1.5 meters (5 feet)? 12. Does hanging cable exhibit some sag? 13. Are telecommunications closet terminations compatible with applications equipment? 14. Have Patch Panel instructions been followed?

a. jacket removal point

b. termination positions

c. all pair terminations tight with minimal pair distortions

d. twists maintained up to Index Strip

15. Have Modular Panel instructions been followed?

a. cable dressing first

b. jackets remain up to the Connecting Block

c. all pair terminations tight and undistorted

d. twists maintained up to the Connecting Block

16. Are connectors properly turned right side up in the Jack Panels without cables wrapped or twisted around the Mounting Collars? 17. Have the correct outlet connectors been used. 18. Have outlets been wired correctly? (T568B)? 19. Is the cable jacket maintained up to the outlet? 20. Are identification markings uniform, permanent and readable?

- END OF SECTION -


_________________________________________



FOR

WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS



A 21-SEP-16 ISSUE FOR TENDER TOS

Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 2 of 6


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 3

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................ 3

1.5 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................... 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................... 5

2.1 802.11 WIRELESS ............................................................................................. 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 6

3.1 INSTALLTION .................................................................................................. 6






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 3 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL



Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements, and Architects Specification, apply to work specified in this section.


A. Specification – Mechanical and Electrical Supplemental Requirements

B. Specification 6-111 - Conduit

C. Specification 6-120 - Wires, Cables, and Connectors

D. Specification 6-130 - Boxes

E. Specification 6-450 – Grounding

F. Specification 6-741 – Telecommunications Raceway Systems

G. Specification 6-742 – Voice and Data Communication Cabling

H. Specification 6-745 – Private Branch Exchange

1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK

1.3.1. General Contractor furnished/ General Contractor installed devices:

1. The General Contractor is responsible for providing and installing the pathways for Wireless Access Points System per Contract Documents. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Backboxes

b. Conduit

c. Sleeves through rated and non-rated walls

d. Backboards

2. Coordinate exact locations for these pathways with the Owner’s

representative prior to installation.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 4 of 6


3. Coordinate exact power requirements for the Owner-furnished system

with his representative prior to installation.

4. Provide grounding for systems equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of all equipment, j-

hooks, wiring, terminations, etc. as necessary to provide a functional system.

6. This Owner representative shall be responsible for testing the system to

verify adequate performance.

1.4 REFERENCES

1.4.1. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA-70 - National Electric Code (NEC). 2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 3. Local Codes and Ordinances.

1.4.2. Project site visitation:

1. Review installation requirements with Contractors involved, prior to

permanently installing equipment and/or making mechanical or electrical connections.

1.4.3. General Contractor to coordinate meetings to ensure presence of all parties

concerned. The schedule for this Owner’s vendor shall be established by the General Contractor in coordination with this vendor and GRG to complete the work prior to project substantial completion.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1.5.1. Shop drawings for approval prior to ordering any equipment. These shop

drawings shall include:

1. Complete equipment list of all components for all systems.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 5 of 6


2. Manufacturer's catalog specification cut sheets and printed descriptive

literature on all components. 3. A block diagram of the entire system and point-to-point drawings of all

devices, including floor plans. 4. Dimensional plan of all equipment enclosures including the locations of power

and control conduits and ampacities required. 5. Schematic drawings of all circuits and equipment located at each point in

these systems shall be furnished. Submittal drawings to be on 22" X 34" (minimum size) prints.

1.5.2. Three (3) complete sets of Maintenance and Operating Instructions in hard cover

binders. These manuals include replacement part numbers, description of all components, parts list with its respective chassis, module or kit.

1.5.3. Theory of operation of all devices in sufficient detail to facilitate servicing. 1.5.4. Complete set of final reproducible drawings.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6.1. The IP Telephony solution is simply a different method of carrying voice traffic.

The interfaces to the Public Telephone network are the same as in a traditional voice network, but at customer site, the voice traffic traverses the data network. This will eliminate the need for two diverse systems, slow and costly physical phone moves, and will provide mobility to end users.

1.6.2. The proposed design includes Cisco Aironet 1200 series access points using 802.11g. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 802.11 WIRELESS

2.1.1 Compression Algorithms: G.711, G.729A 2.1.2. LAN Connectivity: - 10/100 Base-T LAN interface; Meridian 1 or Succession






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 6 of 6


1000/1000M; 10/100 BaseT connection for Wireless IP Gateway card to TLAN for voice transmission; 10 BaseT connection for Wireless IP Gateway card to ELAN for administration; BCM.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLTION

3.1.1. The installation shall be provided by the original equipment manufacturers

certified vendor who will be responsible for the training and support of the new system during the warranty period.

3.1.2. The acceptance tests will be witnessed and the results will be provided to GRG

Inc. and the owner.

- END OF SECTION -


_________________________________________



SURVEILLANCE CCTV



A 21-SEP-16 Issue for Tender ML TOS

Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - SURVEILLANCE CCTV


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 2 of 16


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................ 3

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................ 3

2.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................................... 3

2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: ...................................................................................................... 5

2.4. SYSTEM DESIGN: .................................................................................................................... 6

2.5. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE APPLICATION SOFTWARE .................................................................. 8

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 15

3.1 CABLE PATHWAYS ............................................................................................................... 15

3.2 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 15

3.3 PENETRATIONS .................................................................................................................... 16





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 3 of 16


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. Surveillance CCTV system is required to ensure effective surveillance of an area as well as

create a tamperproof record for post event analysis. The System shall provide an online

display of video images on TFT monitors/Video Wall/Large plasma monitors located in

Central as well as Local control rooms.

1.2. System should IP based and facilitate viewing of live and recorded images and controlling of

all cameras by the authorized users present in the LAN.

1.3. System should provide inter-operability of hardware, OS, software, networking, printing,

database connectivity, reporting, and communication protocols. System expansion should be

possible through off-the-shelf available hardware.

1.4. Equipment with better specifications shall be accepted.

Note: 1. NVR & Camera Server are synonymous in these specifications.

2. OEM of Cameras, Encoders, Decoders, NVR, Servers, NAS box/Raid backup

device, Workstations, Monitors, and Switches shall be ISO firms & the offered

products must be CE certified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It is



2.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATION

2.2.1. Proposed CCTV system shall be an open standard based integrated system with IP

network centric functional and management architecture aimed at providing high-

speed manual/automatic operation for best performance.

2.2.2. System shall use video signals from indoor/outdoor CCD colour cameras installed at

different locations, process them for viewing on workstations/monitors at Central





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 4 of 16


location and simultaneously record all the cameras after compression using MPEG 4

or better standard. Joystick or Mouse-Keyboard controllers shall be used for Pan, Tilt,

Zoom, and other functions of desired cameras.

2..2.3. System shall have combination of Digital CCD Colour video Cameras with individual

IP address, with Fixed or P/T/Z Lens, encoders / decoders, Network Video recorders

(NVR/CAMERA SERVER), Network attached storage (NAS) / Raid backup device for

recording, Application software, Colour Video Monitors, Keyboards with Joystick

controllers / Mouse-Keyboard, software based Video Matrix Switcher, workstation for

System Administration / Management / Maintenance etc.

2.2.4. The NVR / CAMERA SERVER can be embedded type or server based. However the

NVR / CAMERA SERVER software shall run on common off the shelf available

servers (Camera server & Database server). Each NVR / Camera Server shall be

able to handle 36 or more cameras.

2.2.5. Network Video Recorder shall offer both video stream management and video stream

storage management. Recording frame rate & resolution in respect of individual

channel shall be programmable.

2.2.6. System should ensure that once recorded, the video cannot be altered; ensuring the

audit trail is intact for evidential purposes.

2.2.7. System shall provide sufficient storage of all the camera recordings for a period of 30

days or more @ 25 FPS, at 4 CIF or better quality using necessary compression

techniques for all cameras (extended capacity of cameras i.e. present capacity + 25

%).

2.2.8. System shall use IP enabled cameras. The video shall be compressed using MPEG-4

or better standard and streamed over the IP network.

2.2.9. not used

2.2.10. The recording resolution and frame rate for each camera shall be user

programmable.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 5 of 16


2.2.11. The Area under surveillance shall be monitored and controlled from Central location

through workstations and Joystick controllers.

2.2.12. Surveillance CCTV System shall operate on 120V, 50 Hz single -phase power supply.

Power for all the equipment will be conditioned using on-line UPS with minimum 30

minutes or more back up. If any equipment operates on any voltage other than the

supply voltage and supply frequency, necessary conversion/correction device for

supply shall be supplied along with the equipment.

2.2.13. All the control equipment e.g. servers, NVR/CAMERA SERVER, NAS/Raid backup

device, decoders etc. shall be provided in standard Racks.

2.2.14. All the indoor cameras & control equipment shall be suitable for operation from 10° C

to 40° C and relative humidity up to 80 % non-condensing. Cameras & other

equipment, meant for outdoor installations, shall be suitable to work from - 10° C to

50° C with RH up to 90% non-condensing. This temperature range may be achieved

with or without heater.

2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:

2.3.1 IP Camera shall be used for image capture.

2.3.2 Indoor cameras shall be either with fixed focal length lens or with Pan/Tilt & Zoom

lens as per site requirement. All outdoor Cameras shall be Day/Night cameras.

2.3.3 Housing of cameras meant for indoor use shall be of IP42 rating whereas outdoor

camera housing shall be of IP66 or better rating. These must be integrated by the

camera manufacturer.

2.3.4 System must provide built-in facility of watermarking or Digital certificate to ensure

tamperproof recording so that these can be used as evidence at a later date, if so

desired. The recording shall support audit trail feature.

2.3.5 All camera recordings shall have Camera ID & location/area of recording as well as

date/time stamp. Camera ID, Location/Area of recording & date/time shall be

programmable by the system administrator with User ID & Password.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 6 of 16


2.3.6 Facility of camera recording in real-time mode 25/15/12.5/10 FPS or lower FPS as

well as in any desired combination must be available in the system.

2.3.7 Facility of Camera recording in CIF, 2CIF, 4CIF as well as in any combination i.e. any

camera can be recorded in any quality – Selective or Group of cameras must be

available in the system.

2.3.8 System to have facility of additional camera installation beyond the originally planned

capacity.

2.3.9 In order to optimize the memory, while recording, video shall be compressed using

MPEG-4 or better standard and streamed over the IP network. Once on the network,

video can be viewed on a local workstation or on analogue/digital monitor using a

hardware decoder (MPEG-4/compatible standard Receiver) and shall be recorded on

NVR/CAMERA SERVER and shall be backed up on NAS/RAID Backup device.

2.3.10 System shall be triplex i.e. it should provide facility of Viewing, Recording & Replay

simultaneously.

2.3.11 The offered system shall have facility to export the desired portion of clipping (from a

desired date/time to another desired date/time) on CD or DVD. Viewing of this

recording shall be possible on standard PC using standard software like windows

media player etc.

2.3.12 PTZ Cameras shall have 64 or more pre-defined positions, to be selected through

suitable input alarm.

2.3.13 Redundancy/Fail-over feature is required i.e. in case of failure of an NVR/CAMERA

SERVER the relevant cameras shall automatically switch over to the redundant

NVR/CAMERA SERVER.

2.3.14 System shall have provision of WAN connectivity for remote monitoring.

2.4. SYSTEM DESIGN:





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 7 of 16


2.4.1 All cameras shall be IP based, UTP ready. The encoders should be capable of

producing streams @ 25 fps for each camera for viewing on LAN and on monitors

and also recording into the NVR/CAMERA SERVER/Camera servers and NAS

box/Raid backup device @ 25 fps or lower frame rate, user selectable as per

requirement, for each individual camera.

2.4.2 Encoders shall be Power Over Ethernet (POE) compliant and connected to Layer 2 or

Layer 3 switch as per system design using UTP CAT 6 Cable or fibre optic cable and

the required connectors as per standards.

2.4.3 Central/Local Control Room will have workstations along with controllers for Camera

operation. For monitoring purposes, Video monitors/Plasma monitors/Video wall shall

be setup with suitable mounting arrangements, as per user requirements. Facility for

viewing and controlling all the cameras at various other locations, as required, shall

be provided.

2.4.4 Monitoring at Local control rooms may be restricted to operation of certain cameras

only & system administrator should be able to configure the system, accordingly.

2.4.5 Each control room may have one or more Operators simultaneously using the

installed Video monitors/Video wall. Operator control on cameras shall be on a static

basis or rotary basis depending on the policies to be decided at site.

2.4.6 There shall be a Control System with Video Control Software to manage all the video

surveillance devices.

2.4.7 Database Server shall keep track of all configurations & events. This will help in

proper System administration & management of redundancies etc.

2.4.8 Video stream from individual cameras shall be recorded on respective NVR/Camera

Server &, subsequently, archived to NAS box/RAID backup device. System shall

have provision to automatically over-write the new information after the period of

30/31 days & necessary script/algorithm must be available in the Application.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 8 of 16


2.4.9 All the workstations in LAN should be provided with software to view and control the

cameras, encoders and retrieve the recorded video images from the NVR/CAMERA

SERVER/NAS/Raid backup device seamlessly.

2.5. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE APPLICATION SOFTWARE

2.5.1 The software shall operate on open architecture for integration with perimeter safety,

access control, and fire / safety systems based on open standards.

2.5.2 Digital video surveillance control software should be capable to display and manage

the entire surveillance system. It should be capable of supporting variety of devices

such as cameras, video encoders, video decoders, PTZ controller, NVR, NAS

boxes/Raid backup device etc.

2.5.3 The software should have inbuilt facility to store configuration of encoders / decoders

and cameras.

2.5.4 The software should Support flexible 1/2/4 Windows Split screen display mode or

scroll mode on the PC monitor or on preview monitor as per site requirement.

2.5.5 The software should be able to control all cameras i.e. PTZ control, Iris control, auto /

manual focus, and colour balance of camera, Selection of presets, Video tour

selection etc.

2.5.6 There must be a single encoder for each camera.

2.5.7 The software is required to generate reports of stored device configuration. The

control software is required to provide alarm and alarm log. The log shall be able to

be archived, printed and displayed using a device filter, a device group filter and/or a

time window.

2.5.8 The software should have user access authority configurable on per device or per

device group basis. The user shall have the facility to request the access of any

camera and can control the camera for a reservation period. Control of camera is

released after the reservation period.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 9 of 16


2.5.9 The system shall provide User activity log (audit trail) with user id, time stamp, and

action performed, etc.

2.5.10 The administrator should be able to add, edit & delete users with rights. It shall be

possible to view ability / rights of each user or the cameras which can be viewed &

controlled as per the permission assigned by the administrator.

2.5.11 The users should be on a hierarchical basis as assigned by the administrator. The

higher priority person can take control of cameras, which are already being controlled

by a lower priority user. There should be minimum 3 hierarchical levels of security for

providing user level log in.

2.5.12 It should have recording modes viz. continuous, manual, or programmed modes on

date, time and camera-wise. All modes should be disabled and enabled using

scheduled configuration. It should also be possible to search and replay the recorded

images on date, time and camera-wise. It should provide onscreen controls for

remote operation of PTZ cameras. It should have the facility for scheduled recording.

Different recording speeds (fps) and resolution for each recording mode for each

camera should be possible.

2.5.13 It should provide programmable motion detection and recording, to be defined area

wise. System must be able to support video motion detection algorithms to detect and

track objects, learn the scene, adapt to a changing outdoor environment, ignore

environmental changes including rain, hail, wind, swaying trees and gradual light

changes.

2.5.14 The settings shall be individually configurable for each alarm and each camera

prerecord duration. This shall allow the Camera Server to capture video prior to the

alarm/event, as well as after the alarm/event. Shall be selectable from a list of values

ranging between 0 seconds and 5 minutes.

5.15 The software for clients should also be working on a browser based system for

remote users. This will allow any authorized user to display the video of any desired

camera on the monitor with full PTZ and associated controls.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 10 of 16


5.16 Retrieval: The CCTV application should allow retrieval of data instantaneously or any

date / time interval chosen through search functionality of the application software. In

case data is older than 30 days and available, the retrieval should be possible. The

system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like CD/DVD/Blu

ray Recorders or any other device in a format which can be replayed through a

standard PC based software. Log of any such activity should be maintained by the

system which can be audited at a later date.

5.17 Backup: Online backup should be maintained to protect against storage failure.

5.18 Storage: Data storage shall be at a central location in the Server room. The capacity

of the storage should be equal to 30 days of recoding of all cameras at 25 fps/4 CIF.

The system should follow FIFO on recording.

5.19 Artificial Intelligence: It shall have image tracking facility. If any object is found

to be stationary for a pre-defined period the system shall track the event and

alert the operator. This facility shall be provided on select cameras at entry

point and as defined by the tenderer. The system must have the features for

identifying tail-gating, unattended package identification, queuing analysis,

external text insertion feature and intruder detection.

2.6. DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.6.1 Colour video Dome Camera with PTZ

Image Device Interline transfer 1/4" or better format CCD sensor

Focal length 4 mm to 72 mm or better (for Artificial Intelligence Cameras with

better focal length i.e; 3.5 mm to 91 mm to be used)

Optical zoom (For Indoor Camera)

18 X or better Optical zoom (For Outdoor Camera)

26 X or better Number of Pixels 720 X 576

Scanning System PAL

Resolution 480 TVL or better Illumination (For Indoor camera)

Lux (Colour), 0.1 Lux (B/W) or better Illumination (For Outdoor camera)

Lux (Colour), 0.05 Lux (B/W) or better Pan Travel 360º Continuous Tilt Travel

0 - 90º

Manual Tilt Speed 0.5°/SEC to 90°/SEC





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 11 of 16


Manual pan speed 0.5°/SEC to 90°/SEC

Preset Tilt speed 0.5°/SEC to 90°/SEC

Preset Pan Speed 0.5°/SEC to 300°/SEC

Preset positions Min. 64

Iris Control Auto

Focus Auto

Back Light compensation

Required with black masking or other suitable technology

White balance Auto

Electronic shutter Auto

S/N ratio >= 48 dB

Power supply As per OEM's design, however generally AC 120 V @

60Hz/12V or 24 V AC Rectifier and SMPS if DC supply

2.6.2 Fixed Colour Dome Camera Varifocal

Image Device 1/3” or ¼” CCD Sensor

Number of Pixels Minimum 720 x 576

Scanning System PAL

Resolution 480 TV Lines or better

Min Illumination 1 Lux at F 1.2

S/N Ratio >=48 dB

Electronic Shutter AUTO

Lens Built-in Varifocal lens. Auto Iris, lens f = 4 – 12 mm. (approx.)

Backlight compensation Required Power supply As per OEM's design

2.6.3 MPEG4 ENCODER (HARDWARE BASED)

2.6.3.1 The encoder shall be built on embedded processor and real time operating system.

The Encoder should convert Analogue Composite/S-Video input into good quality

digital stream on real time basis and shall be able to transmit as Unicast /Multicast IP

packet with low latency (less than 200 msec.) for live viewing as well as for recording.

2.6.3.2 The video resolution should be configurable at either of 4 CIF, 2 CIF, CIF @ 25 fps or

at lower frame rate per camera, user selectable.

6.3.3 The encoder should generate MPEG4 video stream Compliant with ISO/IEC 14496

standard. The encoder should be interchangeable with any standard encoder of any





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 12 of 16


other make, which generates MPEG4 video stream Compliant with ISO/IEC 14496

standard.

2.6.3.4 The Encoder should have the following specifications or should match with the

requirement:

Format PAL colour, B/W, composite, 25 fps, 2:1 interlaced

Resolution (H x V pixels) 4 CIF 704 x 576, 2 CIF , CIF, QCIF

Frame Rate 25 fps (PAL) and lower

Encoding MPEG-4 Compliant with ISO/ IEC 14496 Standard

Video Parameters Brightness, contrast, hue, sharpness, and sizing

selectable

Video Latency Less than 200 mSec.

Connectors BNC for Composite Video for input, suitable connectors for

Power, Alarm in, and Alarm out, RJ-45 for Ethernet 10/100

Base-T output.

IP Address Static IP Address or as per System requirement.

MPEG4 standard Compliant with ISO / IEC14496

IP Packets Unicast and Multicast

POE Compliant

Power supply As per OEM's design

2.6.4 NETWORK ATTACHED STORAGE (NAS)/RAID BACKUP DEVICE

2.6.4.1 NAS box/RAID backup device shall be used to record video streams based on the

configuration assigned by administrator. Workstations & Servers within the LAN should be

able to access the recorded video streams. The NAS/RAID backup device should support

simultaneous play back and recording at full duplex operation.

2.6.4.2 It shall provide a high quality recording storage and play back of images. It should support

integration with LAN to provide Centralized Management and shall operate on Windows /

Linux OS. Support of user management for security level control and authentication required.

These NAS boxes/RAID backup device should have the following features and specifications:

Onboard CPU Dual Intel Xeon R Support up to 2.8 GHz

Onboard Memory 2 GB DDR RAM

HDD Drive As per system requirement

Host Interface Dual Gigabit Ethernet

RAID Support RAID levels 0, 1, and 5





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 13 of 16


Network Transport Protocols TCP/IP

Network File Protocols CIFS, NFS, HTTP/HTTPS, FTP, NTP, SNMP, SMTP,

DHCP and DNS

Drive Status /Space Monitoring Supported

Operating System (OS) MS Windows OS (Latest version) or Linux

Power supply Hot pluggable Redundant Power Supply

2.6.5 Workstation

CPU Pentium ® 4 Processor 3.4 GHz, 800FSB, 16 MB Cache or better

Mother Board Intel Original Mother Board

Memory 2 GB DDR RAM

Hard Drives 250 GB or more

Keyboards PS /2 Keyboard

Mouse Optical Mouse with scroll

Video Card In Built 2 Nos for connecting 2 monitors

RAID Supported

Network Adapter (NIC) Integrated 10/100/1000 Base -T

Sound Card In- Built

DVD writer DVD+16x –16x, RW +8x -6x, CDW 48x, Blu Ray

Monitor 19" TFT monitor

USB 2.0 or fire wire card 2 nos. at front panel

Operating system MS Windows OS or Linux (Latest versions) at the time of

tender.

Anti Virus Software Latest software at the time of tender.

2.6.6 NVR/Camera/Database Server

CPU Pentium IV or Xeon, 3.2GHz or higher

Memory 2 GB DDR RAM

Hard Drives 2 TB with RAID 5 Support

DVD writer External DVD+16x –16x, RW +8x -6x, CDW 48x, Blu Ray

Network Adapter (NIC) Dual TCP/IP Integrated 10/100/1000 Base –T

Sound Card In- Built

Graphic Card FHD non-interlaced graphics card capable of 1920 x

1080 pixel resolution and 65K colors (or true color) with 16MB video memory

or better

Recording Speed 25 fps / channel (minimum 32 channel)

USB 2.0 or fire wall 2 nos. at front panel





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 14 of 16


Keyboards PS/2 Keyboard

Mouse Optical Mouse with scroll

Monitors 19" TFT

Operating system MS Windows OS or Linux (Latest versions) at the time of

tender.

Anti Virus Software Latest software at the time of tender.

2.6.7 Camera Housing & mount: The camera mount should be:

i. Of the same make as that of camera and suitable for the model number offered as

specified by the manufacturer and should be an integrated unit.

ii. Should be compact and indoor / outdoor type as required.

iii. Should support the weight of camera and accessories such as housing, pan & tilt

head in any vertical or horizontal position etc.

2.6.8 Speed dome controller/PTZ controller

Speed Dome Controller should have variable speed joystick, LCD display for programming

and it should be able to control the speed dome for PAN / TILT / Zoom.

2.6.9 Cables

Sr. No. Connectivity Cable Type

1. Camera to Video Encoder Coaxial RG 6/U / CAT 6 / Fibre Optic

2. Video Encoder to Switch in control room UTP CAT 6 / Fibre Optic

3. Switch to Video Wall Switches UTP CAT 6 / Fibre Optic

4. From switches to NAS Box Fibre Optic

5. Hardware Decoder to monitor Composite signal cable

2.7. Recommended Coverage areas for installation of Surveillance CCTV:

2.7.1 Building (s) perimeter and Parking lot

2.7.2 Access corridors and elevator lobbies

2.7.3 Reception desks

2.7.4 Emergency Egress stairwells

2.7.5 Main Switchgear and Server rooms

2.7.6 Roof of building

2.7.7 Other areas as specified by the user.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 15 of 16


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE PATHWAYS

A. Pathways will be constructed from J-hooks hung from ceiling wire installed with

powder-actuated devices. J-hooks shall be attached to independent grid wire and not

attached to the existing drop ceiling grid wiring. The added weight to the ceiling grid

system can cause distortion in the grid system.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide conduit system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. Provide 1-inch conduit from each telephone, data, and CATV outlet stubbed to

nearest vertical distribution location.

C. Terminate metal conduit using connectors with plastic bushings.

D. Each conduit bend should be a long sweep radius wherever possible. In no instance

shall the inside radius or bend be less than 6 (six) times the internal diameter of the

conduit for conduits that are 2” diameter or less, for conduits larger than 2” the bend

radius shall be no less than 10 (ten) times the inside diameter.

E. In finished areas, conceal conduits and flush mount boxes.

F. Where a wall-mounted telephone/data outlet is shown, provide a 4-inch square box

with a depth of 2-1/8 inches, flush-mounted, with a single gang device plate with

entry/connector configuration compatible with telephone system (Raco #265).

G. Provide nylon or plastic fish wire in conduit runs.

H. Ground conduits at terminal boards with grounding bushings.

I. Telecommunications conduits shall be separated from power conduits by not less

than 12- inches.

J. Locate 120 volt, 30 amp, twist lock outlet on vertical centre line of backboard and 7-

feet-0- inches above the floor unless otherwise noted on drawings.

K. Provide #6 insulated copper ground wire from each telephone terminal

cabinet/backboard to service entrance ground. Ground wire may be looped from

terminal cabinet and backboards. Ground wire shall be installed in conduit. Provide

ground terminal strip at each terminal cabinet/backboard. Leave 4-feet-6-inches

minimum slack of ground wire at each backboard.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 16 of 16


L. Conduit installation shall be coordinated with their respective termination equipment

layouts at each backboard location as required to provide adequate dedicated space

for equipment provided and installed by Owner’s communication vendor(s).

M. Install not more than three 90 degree bends or equivalent between any two

pull/termination points.

N. Any section of conduit longer than 150 feet or containing more than two (2) 90 degree

bends shall have pull boxes. These boxes are not shown on drawings.

O. Cable pathways

1. Provide cable pathways. Coordinate locations and J-hook sizes with systems

vendors, General Contractor and Owner’s representative.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Fire stop penetration seal methods and materials shall be FM-approved and UL-listed

as applicable and as approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sealing of openings around the exterior of the low voltage systems sleeves, or

openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by

the Contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the General

Contractor. Sealing of the space internal to the sleeves or openings shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor.

C. All sealing methods shall be submitted to GRG Inc. for review.


_________________________________________



FOR

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM



A 21-SEP-16 Issue for Tender TOS GM

Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 2 of 22


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - SCOPE .................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM .................................................................................. 3

PART 3 - RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATION .................................................. 3

PART 4 - DETAILED DESIGN & PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION ................................... 4

4.1 DEFINITION OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ................................................... 4

4.2 EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND PERFORMANCE

CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................... 5

4.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 19






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 3 of 22


PART 1 - SCOPE

1.1 This specification lays down the technical specification, functional features and

performance characteristics of basic equipment items, quality of installation,

materials used and standard of workmanship, which are required for the provision of

a general public address system.

1.2 This specification should be read in conjunction with the “Mechanical and Electrical

Supplemental Requirements” and the Particular Specification. Unless otherwise

stated in the Particular Specification, the requirements laid down in this document

shall apply to contracts/orders for the supply and installation of all public address or

sound systems issued by SYLENG.

PART 2 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

2.1 A public address system shall basically comprise one or more microphones, mixer

and/or power amplifiers, loudspeakers of various types to suit the local environment

and other ancillary equipment such as control and monitoring panels etc.

2.2 Microphone inputs of different priority and groupings of loudspeakers to serve a

number of zones may be required. Typical systems to be provided are those for

speech reinforcement/background music in school halls; public waiting areas for

clinics, hospitals and Government Offices; sports grounds, swimming pools etc.

Detailed tailoring of individual system is given in the Particular Specification.

PART 3 - RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATION

3.1 REFERENCE TO USER/DESIGN/INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

a. The latest edition of IEC 60386:1972 or BS 4847:1989 “Method of Measurement






21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 4 of 22


of Speed Fluctuations in Sound Recording and Reproducing Equipment”.

b. The latest edition of IEC 60268-1:1985 or BS 6840-1:1987 “Sound System

Equipment. Methods for Specifying and Measuring General Characteristics Used

for Equipment Performance”.

c. The latest edition of IEC 60268-2:1987 or BS 6840-2:1993 “Sound System

Equipment. Glossary of General Terms and Calculation Methods”.Project

Division, EMSD – ESG11 (07/05) Page 4

d. The latest edition of EIA-160 Sound Systems.

e. The latest edition of EIA/CEA-490 Standard Test Methods of Measurement for

Audio Amplifiers.

f. The latest edition of EIA-27A Acceptance Testing of Dynamic Loudspeakers.

3.2 Other National or International Standards Equipment complying with other national

and international standards may be offered. Tenderers shall demonstrate clearly the

factors of technical superiority or other aspects as reviewed by these standards.

PART 4 - DETAILED DESIGN & PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

4.1 DEFINITION OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

4.1.1 Terminology Not applicable.

4.1.2 Symbols and Abbreviations

(a) “BS” means British Standards

(b) “EIA” means Electronic Industries Alliance of USA

(c) “IEC” means International Electrotechnical Commission

(d) “r.m.s.” means root mean square

(e) “LED” means light emitting diode






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 5 of 22


4.1.3 Measuring Systems

All units are SI units.

4.1.4 Measuring Criteria

(a) Unless otherwise stated, all voltage, power levels, power or voltage ratios for

amplifiers are r.m.s. measured at 1 kHz or relative to measurement made at

1 kHz.

(b) Frequency response of Compact Disc players, MiniDisc players/recorders

and Digital Audio Tape players/recorders is measured on a record/playback

basis at nominal record and playback signal levels. If a -20 dB recording level

is required for this parameter, it should be clearly stated.

(c) Sensitivity of loudspeakers is measured at a distance of 1 metre with a

random noise signal of 1 watt.

4.2 EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND PERFORMANCE

CHARACTERISTICS

4.2.1 Microphone

4.2.1.1 Unidirectional Microphone

(i) It shall be of dynamic type provided with built-in blast and pop protection

and microphone holder.

(ii) The microphone shall be provided with a built-in on-off switch and a

suitable length of cable. The required length of cable is specified in the

Particular Specification.

(iii) All cables for microphones shall be terminated with Cannon XLR-type

connectors.

(iv) Where required, the microphone shall be provided with a tiltable mount






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 6 of 22


and hardware adaptable to the floor stand or desk stand (Items 4.2.2 and

4.2.3 refer.)

4.2.1.2 Miniature Omnidirectional Lavalier Microphone

It shall be lightweight and unobtrusive with smooth exterior and recessed grill

screen minimizing clothing noise. It shall be of rugged aluminium case

construction and fitted with a flexible long-life cable. The lavalier cord shall be

easily snapped onto or disengaged from a clasp of the lavalier holder. A proper

cable anchoring shall be provided and shall be terminated with the connector.

4.2.1.3 Performance Characteristics Required

(i) On-axis frequency response not to vary by more than +6 dB, -10 dB over the

frequency range 100 to 10 000 Hz, relative to 1 kHz,

(ii) Sensitivity not to be less than 1.0 mV/Pa (-77 dB ref. 1 V/ubar) at 1 kHz,

(iii) Distortion to be less than 0.5% at 1 kHz at 30 Pa sound pressure level input,

front-to-back discrimination ratio to be greater than 15 dB for 300 to 5 000 Hz

for unidirectional microphones,

(iv) Balanced, low impedance in the range 200 to 600 ohm at 1 kHz.

4.2.2 Microphone Floor Stand & Boom Arm

(a) The floor stand shall comprise a substantially constructed heavy cast black

painted base supporting a satin chrome finished column with a self-locking

device permitting the inner column to be raised or lowered with one hand

within a range of adjustment from 900 to 1600 mm nominal.

(b) Adaptor for microphone or adaptor for the boom arm shall be provided.

(c) The boom arm shall comprise a satin chrome finished tubing with a suitable

size of counter weight. The length shall not be less than 700 mm.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 7 of 22


(d) The boom arm shall be fitted with a locking device for snapping onto the

adaptor of the microphone floor stand.

(e) The boom adjustment range shall be 360o in any direction.

4.2.3 Microphone Desk Stand & Flexible Gooseneck Shaft

(a) The desk stand shall be similarly constructed as the floor stand but with a

short satin chrome pillar, with adjustment by means of a clamping ring

designed to support the microphone 100 to 200 mm above desk top.

(b) The flexible gooseneck shaft shall be a stainless steel flexible tubing of not

less than 300 mm and permit easy bending in any direction of 45o.

(c) The gooseneck shall be fitted with a thread insert and a XLR-type connector

for easy mounting onto a desk stand on one end and a microphone on the

other.

4.2.4 Mixer-Power Amplifier

a. The mix-power amplifier shall be fully solid-state, and provided with balanced

floating outputs of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker connections.

b. As a minimum requirement, the mixer-power amplifier shall provided with the

following facilities: -

(i) power on/off switch,

(ii) mains ‘on’ indicator lamp,

(iii) independent mixing volume control for each input,

(iv) master volume, bass and treble tone controls,

(v) three-core flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply

and earth connection,

(vi) AC and DC fuse protection,

(vii) standard sockets complete with plugs and locking rings for each






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 8 of 22


input and terminals for loudspeaker output.

(c) Performance Characteristics Required

(i) Microphone input sensitivity not to be greater than 0.5 mV for

rated output for source impedance of 200 to 600 ohm balanced,

(ii) high level input sensitivity not be greater than 400 mV for rated

output for source impedance up to 50 kohm,

(iii) preamplifier provided at least 60 dB signal range from noise to

clipping,

(iv) frequency response not to vary by more than + 3 dB over the

frequency range 50 to 15 000 Hz, at rated output power,

(v) total harmonic distortion at rated output not to exceed 2% between

50 and 15 000 Hz, distortion shall not increase at lower power

output,

(vi) noise level to be better than 65 dB below rated output with input

shorted, over the frequency range 50 to 15 000 Hz, un-weighted.

4.2.5 Mixer-Preamplifier

a) The mixer-preamplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the

following facilities: -


(ii) independent mixing volume for each input,

(iii) master volume, bass and treble tone controls,

(iv) flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply connection,

(v) AC and DC fuse protection.

b) Performance Characteristics Required

(i) microphone input sensitivity not to be greater than 0.5 mV for rated






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 9 of 22


output for source impedance of 200 to 600 ohm,

(ii) high level input sensitivity not to be greater than 400 mV for rated

output for source impedance up to 500 kohm,

(iii) r.m.s. output level not to be less than 0 dBm,

(iv) output impedance: 600 ohms balanced,

(v) preamplifier provides at least 60 dB signal range from noise to

clipping,

(vi) frequency response not to vary by more than + 2 dB over the

frequency range 50 to 15 000 Hz at rated output,

(vii) total harmonic distortion at rated output not to exceed 1% between 50

and 15 000 Hz, distortion shall not increase at lower power output,

(viii) base control + 10 dB at 100 Hz,

(ix) treble control + 10 dB at 10 000 Hz,

(x) noise level to be better than 80 dB below rated output with input

shorted, over the frequency range 50 to 15 000 Hz, unweighted.

4.2.6. Power Amplifier

a) The power amplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the following facilities: -


(ii) mains ‘on’ indicator lamp,

(iii) input protection against overload, Project Division, EMSD – ESG11

(07/05) Page 9

(iv) volume, bass and treble controls,

(v) balanced floating output of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker

connections,

(vi) flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply connection,

(vii) AC and DC fuse protection,

(viii) standard sockets complete with plugs and locking rings for each input

and terminals for loudspeaker output.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 10 of 22


(b) Performance Characteristics Required (i) input sensitivity not to be grater than 0.77 V for rated output for source

impedance of 600 ohm,

(ii) frequency response not to vary by more than + 3 dB over the

frequency range 50 to 15 000 Hz,

(iii) total harmonic distortion at rated output power not to exceed 1%

between 50 and 15 000 Hz, distortion shall not increase at lower

power output and/or less than full load,

(iv) noise level to be better than 70 dB below rated output with input

shorted, over the frequency range 50 to 15 000 Hz unweighted,

(v) output regulation to be less than 2 dB from no load to full load, the

amplifier shall be stable under no load conditions.

4.2.7. Loudspeaker 4.2.7.1 Horn Speaker

a) The horn speaker shall be perfectly weatherproof and complete with

built-in multiple tapping matching transformer and mounting bracket suitable for mounting onto any hard surfaces or masts.

b) It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics: -

1) General Purpose Horn Speaker

(i) on-axis frequency response not to vary by more than

+ 10 dB over the frequency range 250 to 6 000 Hz,.

(ii) sensitivity not to be less than 103 dB/W.

2) Wide Range Horn Speaker

(i) on-axis frequency response not to vary by more than

+ 10 dB over the frequency range 200 to 15 000 Hz,


4.2.7.2 Speaker Column

(a) The speaker column shall comprise at least four dynamic cone speaker units






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 11 of 22


arranged in column on a baffle board. Multiple tapping matching transformers

shall be provided.

(b) The enclosure shall be acoustically designed to provide a unidirectional wide

lateral beam spread of sound with limited cover in the longitudinal direction.

(c) The wooden enclosure shall be rigid and complete with high quality front grille

cloth, and fibre glass or BAF insulation lining of not less than 20 mm thick

covering the interior column; speech coils and magnet air gaps shall be

protected against ingress of dust and moisture.

(d) The column shall be suitable for mounting on any hard surface and the

mounting mechanism shall permit free rotation about the vertical axis and

adjustable tilting angle. Mounting brackets shall e supplied.

(e) The column shall be finished to harmonize with the wall or immediate

background.

(f) It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics: -

(i) on-axis frequency response not to vary by more than + 10 dB over

the frequency range 200 to 10 000 Hz,


4.2.7.3 Ceiling Mount Speaker

(a) The speaker shall be either suitable for flush mounting to a false ceiling of

any configuration, or for surface mounting if there is not false ceiling. It shall be equipped with a multiple tapping matching transformer to provided easy control of speaker sound volume. A dust proof bag or metal box shall be provided to protect the speaker. Supporting brackets to mount the speaker onto false ceilings of different configurations shall be provided.

(b) It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics: -

(i) on-axis frequency response not to vary by more than + 10 dB over the



4.2.7.4 Box Speaker

(a) The speaker shall be contained in a rigid wooden enclosure designed for






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 12 of 22


surface mounting. The volume of the enclosure shall be not less than 4 litres

and its inner rear section shall be fitted with sound absorption lining.


(i) on-axis frequency response not to vary by more than + 10 dB over the



4.2.8 Speaker Selector

(a) The speaker selector shall allow speaker groups and all-call circuit to be

selected individually, collectively or in any combinational manner.

(b) Each speaker group and the all-call circuit shall be provided with lamp

indicators to show the conditions of use.

(c) Each switch shall be capable of handling the power of its controlling circuit.

4.2.9 Monitor Panel

(a) The monitor panel shall be made of 1.6mm stainless steel or 3.2mm

anodised aluminium. All labels shall be engraved if the panel is custom made.

(b) As a minimum requirement, the panel shall be provided with the following

facilities: -

(i) monitor speaker with volume control,

(ii) system power on/off switch,

(iii) VU meter,

(iv) channel selector switch,

(v) line voltage selector switch for monitoring 70 V or 100 V

outputs.

4.2.10 Relay Control Box (a) The relay control box shall be made of 1.6 mm stainless steel or 3.2 mm

anodised aluminium.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 13 of 22


(b) The relay control box shall be equipped with adequate relays sets to provide inhibit circuits to microphone inputs. The tenderer/contractor shall be required to submit a schematic diagram to show the operation of the circuit.

4.2.11 Cassette Deck

(a) The cassette deck shall be of speed 47.5 mm/sec. (b) The cassette deck shall be provided with the following facilities:-


(ii) microphone and headphone jacks,

(iii) input/output level control and meters,

(iv) three-digit resettable tape counter,

(v) automatic shut-off at tape end in every tape mode or auto-reverse

mode as required,

(vi) noise reduction system.

(c) It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics: -

(i) frequency response not to vary be more than + 3 dB over the frequency range 50 to 13 000 Hz using ferric oxide tape,

(ii) signal-to-noise ratio to be better than 55 dB using ferric oxide tape,

(iii) wow and flutter to be less than 0.05% r.m.s., weighted in accordance with BS 4847,

(iv) total harmonic distortion to be less than 1.0% using ferric oxide tapes,

(v) fast forward and rewind time not to be more than 90 seconds for C-60 tapes,

(vi) microphone input sensitivity not to be greater than 0.5 mV for rated output for source impedance of 200 to 600 ohm,

(vii) line input sensitivity not to be greater than 78 mV for source impedance up to 50 kohm,

(viii) line output level not to be less than 400 mV. 4.2.12 Compact Disc Player

(a) The Compact Disc player shall be provided with the following facilities: -

(i) power on/off switch with indicator,






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 14 of 22


(ii) headphone jack preferably with volume control,

(iii) output level control,

(iv) fluorescent information display,

(v) direct track selection buttons,

(vi) random and disc/track repeat playback,

(vii) remote control unit,

(viii) CD, CD-R, CD-RW & MP3 playback capability,

(ix) 24-bit DAC converter,

(x) optical digital outputs and RCA analog outputs.

(b) It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics (i) frequency response not to vary be more than + 1 dB over the


(ii) signal-to-noise ratio to be better than 100 dB,

(iii) wow and flutter to be less than measurable limit,

(iv) total harmonic distortion to be less than 0.0025%,

(v) dynamic range to be better than 95 dB,

(vi) channel separation to be better than 90 dB,

(vii) analog output level to be at 2 V r.m.s.,

(viii) sampling frequency to be at 44.1 kHz or above.

4.2.13 MiniDisc Player/Recorder

(a) The MiniDisc player/recorder shall be provided with the following facilities: -



(iii) input selector,

(iv) fluorescent information display,

(v) digital recording level control,

(vi) random and disc/track repeat playback,

(vii) remote control unit,

(viii) MiniDisc & MP3 playback capability,






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 15 of 22


(ix) 24-bit DAC converter,

(x) optical and RCA inputs and RCA line outputs,

(xi) MD Long Play (MDLP) modes for higher recording time,

(xii) high speed recording and timer standby recording,

(xiii) text entry capability,

(xiv) adaptive transform acoustic coding (ATRAC) and expansion method

for high signal to noise response,

(xv) 2 channel recording and playback.


(i) frequency response not to vary be more than + 1 dB over the




(iv) total harmonic distortion to be less than 0.0025%,


(vi) typical digital input level from –23 dBm to –15 dBm,

(vii) analogue input level to be at 100 mV r.m.s. minimum,

(viii) analogue output level to be at 1.1 V for load impedance of 10kohm,

(ix) sampling frequency to be at 44.1 kHz or above.

4.2.14 Digital Audio Tape (DAT) Recorder

(a) The DAT recorder shall be of speed 8.15 mm/sec in SP mode and 4.075

mm/sec in LP mode. (b) The DAT recorder shall be provided with the following facilities: -



(iii) fluorescent information display,

(iv) mechanism for reduction of radiated noise,

(v) remote control unit,






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 16 of 22


(vi) super bit mapping technology,

(vii) repeat playback mode,

(viii) menu-driven control24-bit DAC converter,

(ix) optical digital outputs,

(x) optical and coaxial digital inputs,

(xi) long recording/playback modes,

(xii) quick loading and high speed searching,

(xiii) menu-driven track title/ID entry,

(xiv) variable record mute time.

(c) It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics: -

(i) frequency response not to vary be more than + 1 dB over the




(iv) total harmonic distortion to be less than 0.005% in SP mode or

0.075% in LP mode,


(vi) fast forward and rewind time not to be more than 60 seconds for 120-

minute tapes,

(vii) channel separation to be better than 90 dB,

(viii) digital line input/output compliant to IEC 60958,

(ix) nominal analog balanced (XLR) and unbalanced (RCA) input level to

be at +4 dBu and –10 dBV,

(x) nominal analog balanced (XLR) and unbalanced (RCA) output level to

be at +4 dBu and –10 dBV,

(xi) sampling frequency for recoding and playback to be selectable at 48

kHz, 44.1 kHz and 32 kHz.

4.2.15 Equipment Cabinet






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 17 of 22


(a) The cabinet shall be standard 483 mm and of compatible height and sufficient strength and rigidity to house the equipment. It shall be complete with locking door and three-pin power sockets

(b) The cabinet shall be constructed from either teakwood of at least 15 mm thick or stainless steel of at least 1.29 mm thick, depending on individual system requirements.

(c) Facilities shall be provided for good free ventilation and easy access of connecting cables from outside for maintenance.

4.2.16 Microphone Cable

(a) The microphone cable shall be flexible twisted pair of tinned annealed copper

conductors, PVC insulation, tinned copper braided shield, and PVC outer sheath. The colour of the sheath shall be either light grey or white.

(b) The cable shall satisfy the following minimum characteristics: -

(i) at least 16 strands per conductor,

(ii) strand diameter not to be less than 0.15 mm,

(iii) nominal outer diamerter not to be greater than 50 mm,

(iv) capacitance between conductors not to be more than 110 pF/m,

(v) inner conductor d.c. resistance not to be more than 36

(vi) ohm/km at 20oC,

(vii) insulation thickness not to be less than 0.25 mm.

(c) For lavalier microphone, the cable shall satisfy (iv) to (vi) above and



(iii) nominal outer diameter not to be greater than 3.4 mm.

4.2.17 Loudspeaker Cable

(a) The loudspeaker cable shall be flexible pair of tinned, annealed copper conductors, PVC insulated, and white or grey PVC sheath. For surface wiring; the cable shall be a parallel pair. For conduit run, the cable shall be a twisted pair.

(b) The cable shall satisfy the following minimum characteristics: -







21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 18 of 22



(iii) nominal outer diameter not to be greater than 8 mm,

(iv) insulation thickness not to be less than 0.5 mm.

4.2.18 Power Cable Power cables shall be three-core PVC insulated, non-armoured with copper conductors of not less than 2.5 mm2 to the latest edition of BS 6004:2000 and BS 6346:1997 or their international equivalent standards and complete with an overall protection sheath of PVC. 4.2.19 Underground Loudspeaker Cable

(a) Underground cables shall be PVC insulated, armoured, with one or two twisted pairs of tinned, annealed copper conductors, tinned copper braided shield and complete with an overall protective jacket of PVC.

(b) The cable shall be of at least 19 strands per conductor of diameter not less

than 0.21 mm. 4.2.20 Conduit

(a) Conduit, except flexible conduit, shall be made of galvanized iron of heavy gauge, screwed, longitudinally welded. All conduits and conduit fittings shall comply with the latest edition of BS 4568-1:1970 and BS EN 50086-1:1994 and subsequent amendments or their international equivalent standards.

(b) Flexible steel conduit and solid type adaptors shall comply with the latest

edition of BS 731-1:1952 or its international equivalent standard, and in addition, the flexible conduit shall be of the metallic water tight pattern, PVC over sheathed and with a separate earth wire enclosed for earth continuity.

4.2.21 Connector & Accessories

(a) All audio connectors for wall panels, mixer inputs, microphones etc. shall be Cannon XLR type.

(b) Each indoor loudspeaker shall be terminated through a 2 A three-pin plug

and socket complying with the latest edition of BS 546:1950 and supplements or its international equivalent standard to facilitate easy removal of the loudspeaker. Locally made plug and socket of equivalent standard is also acceptable. The Contractor shall responsible for properly mounting the socket base plate onto any existing adaptable box provided by others as instructed by the Engineer. Outdoor speakers shall be terminated through






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 19 of 22


(c) Weather proof type plugs and sockets provided with a push-on cap and cap retaining ring. A sheet metal box with stainless steel cover shall be required to house one Cannon XLR male or female socket and a pilot LED indicator. The LED shall be ‘screw-in’ type for easy replacement. Both the socket and LED shall be provided.

4.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

4.3.1 General

(a) All equipment, cabling etc. shall be installed in locations as indicated on the floor plans and drawings accompanied with the Particular Specification or as instructed by the Engineer on site.

(b) All cables shall, as far as practicable, be run inside conduits or trunkings

already provided for the purpose by others. (c) The Contractor shall provide and install all conduits, trunkings, raceways and

adaptable boxes to supplement the conduits or trunkings already provided, or to the requirement laid down in the Particular Specification.

(d) The Contractor shall make good any work disturbed during installation at his

own expense. (e) Where appropriate, the installation of surface wiring, conduit and trunking

systems shall comply with the relevant standards and regulations stipulated.

4.3.2 Equipment Fixing and Interconnection (a) All equipment except portable equipment shall be firmly held in place.

Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. If attachment to roof truss members is required to lift equipment into place attachment shall be made only a permanent lifting eyelets provided in the roof truss. Welding or drilling of the steel roof truss is not permitted; permanent attachment to trusses shall be made by approved clamping arrangements employing neoprene or similar bearing pads to protect the truss finish.

(b) Interconnection of various items of equipment shall be mechanically and electrically connected by multi-pins connectors or terminals.

(c) Lines shall be run in separate conduits for microphone level circuits (level

below -20 dBm), line level circuits (up to +30 dBm), loudspeaker circuits (above +30 dBm), and power circuits. All other conduits shall be spaced not






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 20 of 22


less than 50 mm from power conduits. Power conduits shall be grounded to the power system ground. Microphone and 600 ohm lines shall be insulated from the conduit and from each other for the entire conduit length. Microphone and 600 ohm line conduits shall be mechanically and electrically connected to receptacle boxes and electrically grounded to the audio system ground point. Lines in conduit shall not be spliced.

(d) Microphone line shields shall be grounded only at the microphone frame.

Other shields shall be grounded only at the power amplifier inputs or at the control equipment outputs. Continuity of shields shall be preserved at connecting points. All audio grounds in the sound equipment rack(s) shall be connected to a common point on the rack(s). This point shall be connected to the building ground.

(e) All audio lines, including microphone lines, line-level lines and loudspeaker

lines, shall be floating with respect to the ground; either side of audio lines shall be grounded. If the equipment has a single ended input or output, it must be provided with isolation transformers to provide the floating conditions. Muting of microphones shall be done by shorting the microphone output, not by opening the circuit. Cut-off or transfer switches in line-level lines or loudspeaker lines shall be two-pole, switching both sides of the line simultaneously. Outputs of power amplifiers shall not be inter-connected. Loudspeaker lines leaving the equipment rack(s) shall be connected via barrier strip terminals.

4.3.3 Materials and Workmanship

(a) All cables shall be run in a vertical or horizontal direction. Only cables required to feed a point on a ceiling may be fixed to the ceiling.

(b) When cables pass through walls or columns, a piece of PVC sleeve of

adequate size shall be inserted into the wall or column, and the cables shall be drawn therein. Holes so created around the sleeves shall be fitted up with cement and touched up with paint. The colour of the paint shall match with that of the walls or columns.

(c) Rubber grommets or insulated bushes shall be used to protect cables

passing through metal covers of distribution board, box or any other metal work.

(d) Cables shall be run at least 150 mm clear of non-electrical services. (e) Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, cables shall be secured flat to the surface of walls and ceiling by means of buckle clips or cable saddles.






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 21 of 22


(e) Buckle clips shall be of heavy gauge, heavily tinned brass with counter-sunk fixing holes, and shall be fixed by means of non-corrosive pins or screws of 15 mm minimum length secured to one plug inserted to a depth of 20 mm minimum. Where the buckle clips are secured to plaster, concrete etc. the plug shall be made from teak dwelling or parallel length. Every fixing hole in the buckle clip will be deemed to require a pin or screw. The heads of the screws or pins shall be level with the surface of the clips so that no damage to the sheath of the cables can occur.

(f) Spacing of the clips shall not exceed 150 mm in horizontal direction and 225

mm in vertical direction. (g) A clip shall be provided not less than 75 mm and not more than 100 mm from

any bend or termination and cables shall be set so that they lie flat against the surface.

4.3.5 Surface Conduit

(a) Surface conduits shall be fixed by galvanized heavy spacing saddles, and shall run only in a perpendicular or horizontal direction. On straight run 20 mm and 25 mm conduits shall be supported by not less than one saddle every one metre in addition to the support provided by any structure, box or fitting.

(b) For 32 mm and larger conduits, saddles may be placed not more than 1.2 m

apart. Angle bends shall, in all cases, be supported by two saddles, as near thereto as possible. Heavy spacing galvanized saddles shall be fixed with brass screws in rawl plugs, or other approved methods.

(c) Conduit bends shall have a radius of four times the outer diameter of the

conduit. (d) A saddle shall be provided not less than 150 mm and not more than 200 mm

from any bend or termination.

(e) Steel conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout, and efficiently earthed (f) Chases for conduit in walls shall be either perpendicular or horizontal. (g) Joints in runs of steel conduit shall be made by means of a coupler into which

the ends of both conduits are to be inserted and tightened up. (h) An adequate number of suitably sized hot-dipped galvanized cast iron draw-






21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 22 of 22


in boxes shall be provided in conduit runs to enable cables to be drawn in easily and without damage. Draw-in boxes shall be fitted after every two bends, or after a maximum straight run of 15 m.

END OF SECTION


_________________________________________



SPECIAL MATERIALS




Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – SPECIAL MATERIALS


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 2 of 6


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................................... 3

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................... 3

1.3 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................ 3

2.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 3

2.3 THERMOMETERS .................................................................................................................. 3

2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES ............................................................................................................... 4

2.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES ............................................................................................... 4

2.6 STRAINERS ........................................................................................................................... 4

2.7 PIPE GUIDES ......................................................................................................................... 5

2.8 PIPE ANCHOR ....................................................................................................................... 5

2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTER ........................................................................................................ 5

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................... 5

2.11 FILTERS ............................................................................................................................... 5

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 6

3.1 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 6





21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 3 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions, Special Conditions, Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Requirements,

and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide shop drawings all items specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It is the

sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that

meet or exceed the specifications included here.

2.2 MATERIALS


2.3 THERMOMETERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers are American, Ashcroft, Marshalltown, Taylor, Trerice, Weksler

and Weiss equal to Trerice number listed.

B. Thermometers shall be 9 inch die cast aluminium case, double strength glass window,

adjustable angle stem, lens, front reading mercury tube, readable scale with gradations from

30 degrees F. to 240 degrees F. Provide brass extension neck sockets of appropriate length.

Trerice Series #BX91400.

C. Thermometers shall be 5 inch round bi-metal type, stainless steel case, readable scale

and gradations from 30 degrees F. to 240 degrees F., external calibrator adjustment, back or





21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 4 of 6


bottom connection as appropriate. Provide brass extension neck sockets of appropriate

length. Trerice Series #B85200.

2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Acceptable manufacturers are American, Marshalltown, Taylor, Trerice, Weksler and

Weiss equal to Trerice number listed.

B. Pressure gauge shall be 4-1/2 inch die cast aluminium case, double strength glass

window, readable dial scale with gradations form 0 psi to 200 psi, phosphor bronze bourdon

tube, stainless steel movement. Provide shutoff valve with pressure gauge. Trerice Series

#500X. MATERIAL SPECIALITIES 15090 - 2

C. Pressure gauge shall be 3-1/2 inch die cast aluminium case, double strength glass

window, readable dial scale with gradations from 0 psi to 200 psi, phosphor bronze bourdon

tube, brass socket. Provide shutoff valve with pressure gauge. Trerice Series #600.

D. Pressure gauge shall be 3-1/2 inch stainless steel case, glass window, readable dial

scale with gradations from 0 psi to 200 psi, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brass socket.

Provide shutoff valve with pressure gauge Trerice Series #890.

2.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Thrush, Watts or Wilkens shall be diaphragm operated and pressure adjustable with anti-

syphon check valve and inlet strainer. Install in domestic water supply piping where indicated

on drawings. Set the valve for pressures required for proper operation of plumbing

equipment.

2.6 STRAINERS

A. Metraflex, Mueller Stream Specialty Hoffman, Trane, Sarco, Armstrong, Keckley, Illinois.

B. Strainers shall be "Y" type with stainless steel strainer baskets having perforations

suitable for water service as required.

C. Strainers 2-1/2" and Larger - full pipeline size, 125 lb. cast iron, with flanged ends.

Furnish strainer with a bolted screen retainer and an off-center blowdown connection, piped

and valved.

D. Strainers 2" and Smaller - full pipeline size, 250 lb. cast iron with screwed ends. Furnish

strainer with a removable plug type screen retainer unless otherwise indicated on the

drawings.





21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 5 of 6


2.7 PIPE GUIDES

A. Guides shall be factory-made of cast semi-steel or other heavy fabricated steel, consisting

of a bolted two-section cylinder and base with a two-section guiding spider bolted or welded

tight to the pipe. Guide and spider shall be of sufficient size to clear pipe insulation and long

enough to prevent over travel of spider and cylinder.

2.8 PIPE ANCHOR

A. Construct anchors of steel sections to be suitable for the location of installation and to

withstand not less than five times the anchor load.

2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

A. Backflow preventers shall be an approved type meeting the appropriate ASSE standards.

B. Manufacturers: The reduced pressure backflow preventer (RPBP) shall be ITT Lawler,

Beeco, Claval, Watts or Febco.

C. All non potable water lines shall be properly labelled.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Flexible connections shall be bronze, braided flexible hose or neoprene twin sphere

connectors by Mason Industries with 150 psi working pressure rating. MATERIAL

SPECIALITIES 15090 - 3

B. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are Redflex, Resistoflex and Flexonics.

2.11 FILTERS

A. Filters shall be of Talc Polypropylene, clear styrene or natural polypropylene construction

for water systems of 120° F or less. Provide high strength glass reinforced nylon type

construction for water systems greater than 120° F.

B. Filters shall be of pure 100% polypropylene construction with smooth contact surfaces

and non-lubricated o-ring for pure water systems.

C. Cartridge shall be polyester type sized as indicated on drawings. One spare cartridge

shall be provided for each filter installed.





21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 6 of 6


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet side of water heaters and where indicated

on drawings. All thermometers shall be easily read from the floor or maintenance

platforms. Calibrate thermometers to insure accuracy.

B. Install pressure gauges at domestic water riser 4'-6" AFF and where indicated on

drawings. All gauges shall be easily read from the floor or maintenance platforms.

Provide extensions as required to make gauges easily readable. Calibrate gauges to

insure accuracy.

C. Install flexible connections for all base mounted pumps and other vibrating

equipment.

- END OF SECTION -


_________________________________________



ELEVATOR




Approved by: Date:

Company Approval: Date:



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - ELEVATOR


21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 2 of 9


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 3

PART 2 - CODES & STANDARDS 3

PART 3 - COUNTRY OF MANUFACTURE 3

PART 4 - SCOPE OF WORK 3

PART 5 - DRAWINGS 4

PART 6 - WORK BY OTHERS 4

PART 7 - ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 5

PART 8 - PASSENGER LIFTS 5

8.1 SHAFT SIZE 5

8.2 CODES AND STANDARD 5

8.3 MACHINE TYPE 5

8.4 SPEED PERFORMANCE 5

8.5 DUTY 5

8.6 CAPACITY 5

8.7 COUNTER WEIGHT 5

8.8 CONTROL SYSTEM 5

8.9 PECIAL PROVISION FOR CONTROL SYSTEM 6

8.10 LANDING INDICATIONS, BUTTONS, SWITCHES 6

PART 9 - CONTRACTOR SHOP DRAWINGS 7

PART 10 - INSTALLATION AND TESTING 7

10.1 ERECTION 7

10.2 CONTRACTORS INSTALLATION 7

10.3 TESTS 8

10.4 GOVERNMENT INSPECTION 8





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 3 of 9


PART 1 - GENERAL

The design caters for one wheel chair Lift, in the entrance lobby. Automatic controls must be provided for easy operation and a smooth ride. Elevator must come with safety features, including an emergency light and alarm, handrails, and a battery powered descent in the event of a power failure. The elevators shall be designed to accommodate people with disabilities and provide ADA-compliant accessibility that meets international and national codes. The cab shall be large enough to accommodate a wheelchair and at least two able passengers. The elevator shall have elevator call buttons and handrails mounted at specified heights and door protective reopening devices that will reopen the door without physical contact.

PART 2 - CODES & STANDARDS

Lifts shall conform to one of the following standards:

1. EN81/1998

2. ASME 17.1

3. JIS

PART 3 - COUNTRY OF MANUFACTURE

Lifts shall be manufactured either in Europe (to EN8/1998 Codes), USA (to ASME A17.1 Code) or Japan (to JIS Code).

PART 4 - SCOPE OF WORK

The Contractor shall undertake the supply, installation and commissioning of the lifts as described in the drawings and specification. This shall include but shall not be limited to the following:

1. Supply and install the Lifts as specified. Supply includes freight insurance and transport to the Client’s dock. The GC will be responsible for transport from dock to site.

2. Commission and test the equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the local Government Inspector.

3. Obtain and submit to the Engineer the first successful Certificate of Inspection from the Government Inspector.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 4 of 9


4. Maintain all equipment in proper working condition for a period of 12 months from the date of the Government Inspector’s Certificate.

PART 5 - DRAWINGS

Two (2) drawings are attached at the end of this document:

1. Section through the lift shafts

2. Plan of the lift shafts

PART 6 - WORK BY OTHERS

The following work will be performed by others and these items are specifically omitted from the Lift Contractors scope. Provision of the following:

1. Hoistway, properly framed and enclosed which will withstand the forces and loads resulting from the use of the lifts.

2. The casting in of any special embedded brackets for fixing equipment. (Brackets to be supplied by lift contractor). * Please note that non-embedded metal bracket support beams separator beams etc, are to be supplied and fixed by the lift contractor.

3. Pit of proper depth with steel ladders for each lift where required, waterproof as required, fluorescent batten type wall mounted, high power factor ballast, lighting fixture with switch and receptacle. * Note: The lift contractor is required to supply his own scaffolding.

4. Recess and grouting as necessary under the hoist-way entrance sills and behind architraves.

5. Chases and openings as required for the installation of the lift and accessories.

6. Main Line Switches, fuses and/ or circuit breakers to provide one power circuit, one lighting circuit and one control circuit per lift.

7. Supports for buffers in the lift pit. * Lift Contractor to specially note these items.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 5 of 9


PART 7 - ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

The electrical characteristics are 400Y-230V/3Ph/60Hz. This supply would be made available by others at the top of the lift shaft. The contractor shall take his supply from this point. All wiring shall meet the approval of the Government Electrical Inspector who shall review the installation and issue the necessary certificates. All live sections of the installation shall be enclosed so as to be inaccessible to unauthorized personnel. Insulated wiring shall have a flame retarding and moisture resisting outer cover and shall be run in metal conduit, metallic tubing or wire ducts.

PART 8 - PASSENGER LIFTS

8.1 SHAFT SIZE

The shaft size available is clearly indicated on the drawings. The elevators cannot exceed the shaft size.

8.2 CODES AND STANDARD

The lifts shall conform to EN81-1998, ASME A17.1 and JIS and shall have features which are the Manufacturers standard design or normal optional features.

8.3 MACHINE TYPE

Lift machine shall be traction type variable frequency/ voltage control.

8.4 SPEED PERFORMANCE

Machines shall be rated for Car Speed of 1.6m/sec. Level stop tolerance shall not exceed +/- 12mm.

8.5 DUTY

The lift motors shall be capable of a minimum of 200 starts per hour.

8.6 CAPACITY

Car capacity: 17 Persons

8.7 COUNTER WEIGHT

* All counter weights to be factory supplied by manufacturer in cast iron. Concrete weights will not be accepted.

8.8 CONTROL SYSTEM

The lifts shall be furnished with Destination full collective Control System.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 6 of 9


The system shall operate by storing car and landing calls and responding in the predetermined order irrespective of the sequence of registration of the calls.

8.9 SPECIAL PROVISION FOR CONTROL SYSTEM

In the event of a fire signal to the annunciator panel the lifts must precede immediately to the ground floor and the door shall open. The lifts must not respond to any other signal in this mode except if the Fireman’s Switch is initiated and car internal buttons are operated. All floor buttons in car to have Braille indications.

8.10 LANDING INDICATIONS, BUTTONS, SWITCHES

Level 1: Up Call Button back lighted “UP” arrow only. Electronic Chime. Car to have standard floor buttons. Landing Lantern with dot matrix up arrow and floor number indication of elevator

position. Level 2: Dual Call button with back lighted down and up arrows Electronic Chime. Landing Lantern with dot matrix down arrow and floor number indication of

elevator position. Level 3: Single Call button with back lighted down arrow Electronic Chime. Landing Lantern with dot matrix down arrow and floor number indication of

elevator position. The control module in each car shall consist of:

1. Telephone Cabinet

With any standard lift telephone with communication to security desk.

2. Car Direction Lantern

Located at top f car entrance column.

3. Car Position Display

Dot Matrix red display for complete alpha-numeric capability. Minimum 25mm high single stroke electronic chime to sound when car has reached floor at which it is stopping.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 7 of 9


4. Floor Buttons

Audible and tactile feedback with back lighting when pushed; one spare.

5. Passenger Safety & Service

Include alarm bell, door open and close buttons.

Light key switches, fan key switch, Inspection initiation key switch.

Emergency Battery Drive.

PART 9 - CONTRACTOR SHOP DRAWINGS

Within thirty (30) days after official award of the Lift Contract, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer for approval two (2) copies each of final equipment drawings. Drawings shall be of professional quality, fully dimensioned and shall contain all relevant details. Equipment final arrangement shall take into account:

1. The orientation and connection points of the specific equipment the Contractor had undertaken to supply

2. The most efficient use of the given space and most desirable relative position of individual pieces of equipment.

3. Operational ease and accessibility for inspection and maintenance.

PART 10 - INSTALLATION AND TESTING

10.1 ERECTION

The erection of this work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the particular installation. All lift entrances and sections shall be set in perfect alignment with the lift car openings and true with plumb hoistway lines. Sills, structural supporting angles, headers and unit frames shall be erected prior to the erection of rough walls and doors, fascias or to guards shall be installed after the walls are finished. Unit frames shall have a protective covering for finished surfaces.

10.2 CONTRACTORS INSTALLATION

Apart from installation, Technicians and workmen, the lift contractor shall at all times during the construction work, have on site a suitably qualified





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 8 of 9


representative of “Project Engineer” status who is fully knowledgeable about the job. This representative must be authorized to act on the Contractor’s behalf in matters pertaining to;

1. The coordination with other trades.

2. The site instruction given by the Engineer during site inspections.

3. The organization of such tests as the Engineer may require.

4. The updating of drawings to “As Built” status.

10.3 TESTS

On completion of the installation an Engineer or Senior Technician in the direct employ of the manufacturer or as authorized by manufacturer as Local Agent shall test and set the whole installation in detail and shall certify that both equipment and installation meet the requirements of the manufacturer, the specifications and local authority codes.

After submission of Certificates of installation and tests, the lift contractor shall with the Architect, Engineers and client’s representative, inspect the entire installation to their mutual approval.

10.4 GOVERNMENT INSPECTION

The Lift Contractor shall at his own cost obtain for the lifts the first certificate from a Government appointed lift inspector and present these to Engineer. If the Government Inspector should list defects or deficiencies in the lift system these shall be corrected by the lift contractor and obtain re-inspection if required.





21-SEP-2016 Rev. A

Page 9 of 9


PASSENGER LIFT SPECIFICATION SHEET

No. Required 1 Machine Room-Less (MRL)

Electrical Supply 400Y230V/3Ph/50Hz

Capacity Eight (8) persons mainly wheelchair patrons

Type Traction/ V.V./V.F. Machine Room-Less

Speed 1.6m/sec

Car Doors Automatic Centre Opening

Landing Doors Automatic Centre Opening

Provide 1. Destination Control

2. Communication to Security Desk

3. Fireman’s Switch

4. Fire Alarm return to ground floor rest position (door opens)

5. Power Failure return to ground floor (door opens)

6. Ventilation standby system

No. of Stops/ Landings Two (2)

Total Travel Height As per Architect Drawing

Shaft Size Available Single: 2,100mm D x 1,950mm W

Pit Depth Provided 1,600 mm

Car Finish 1. Diorite black composite stone.

2. Diffused fluorescent lighting

3. Walls to be Asturias satin stainless steel

4. Ceiling in mirror polished stainless steel

5. Handrails brushed stainless steel with rounded ends

6. Skirting Asturias satin stainless steel

7. Car operating panel face plate finish in stainless steel with dot matrix display.

Landing Entrances and Door Frames 1. Asturias satin stainless steel with 2 hour fire rating to

EN81-72/73.

2. Door safety devices to include curtain light fixed to door and door emergency unlocking device.


_________________________________________



VIBRATION ISOLATION




Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 2 of 12


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 -GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 4

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................. 4

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................ 4

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA ....................................................................................................... 4

1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................ 4

PART 2 -PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 5

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................. 5

2.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................................................. 5

2.3 MANUFACTURERS ...................................................................................................... 5

2.4 TYPE 1 MOUNTS ......................................................................................................... 5

2.5 TYPE 2 MOUNTS ......................................................................................................... 5

2.6 TYPE 3 MOUNTS ......................................................................................................... 6

2.7 TYPE 4 MOUNTS ......................................................................................................... 6

2.8 TYPE 5 MOUNTS ......................................................................................................... 6

2.9 TYPE S BASES ............................................................................................................. 6

2.10 TYPE I BASES ............................................................................................................ 7

2.11 TYPE 5 HANGERS ..................................................................................................... 7

2.12 TYPE 6 HANGERS ..................................................................................................... 7

2.13 TYPE 7 HANGERS ..................................................................................................... 8

2.14 TYPE 8 HANGERS ..................................................................................................... 8

2.15 TYPE AG PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES ................................................................. 8

2.16 TYPE T THRUST RESTRAINTS ................................................................................ 9

2.17 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTIONS ........................................................................... 9

2.18 PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................................... 10




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 3 of 12


PART 3 -EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 12

3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 12

3.2 PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS .......................................................................... 12




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 4 of 12


PART 1 -GENERAL








1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Isolate all motor driven mechanical equipment, unless otherwise noted, from the

building structure, and from the systems which they serve, to prevent equipment

vibrations from being transmitted to the structure.

B. Consider equipment weight distribution to provide uniform deflections.

C. For equipment with variable speed capability, select vibration isolation devices

based on the lowest speed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following:

1. Schedule and product data of isolation devices related to the equipment

served. Schedule and data shall indicate isolation materials, isolator heights

both free and operating, isolator dimensions, deflections, and isolation

efficiency based on lowest operating speed.




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 5 of 12


PART 2 -PRODUCTS


A. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It

is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for

products that meet or exceed the specifications included herein.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All isolation devices shall be designed for the equipment with which they will be

used. Materials used shall retain their isolation characteristics for the life of the

equipment served. All elastomeric materials shall be industrial grade neoprene.

Isolation devices subject to weather shall have hot dipped galvanized finish.

B. Coordinate the selection of devices with the isolator and equipment manufacturer.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products and methods of fabrication shall be as manufactured by Mason

Industries, Korfund Company, Amber-Booth Company, or Consolidated Kinetics

Corporation, equal to the manufacturer’s model listed.

2.4 TYPE 1 MOUNTS

A. Mason type ND or rails type DNR, double deflection neoprene mounts with cast-in

metal inserts for bolting to equipment, and shall have a minimum static deflection of

0.35".

2.5 TYPE 2 MOUNTS

A. Both surfaces shall be rib moulded for skid resistance. On equipment such as

small vent sets and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the

mountings to compensate for the overhang.




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 6 of 12


2.6 TYPE 3 MOUNTS

A. Mason type SLF, combination spring and neoprene with rib moulded base. Spring

type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing, and

complete with 1/2" neoprene acoustical friction pads between the baseplate and the

support.

B. All mountings shall have levelling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the

equipment. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of

the rated deflection. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed

height of the spring at rated load.

2.7 TYPE 4 MOUNTS

A. Mason type SLR, combination spring and neoprene with rib moulded base similar

to type 2 above, but shall have a housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent

springs extension when weight is removed.

B. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of

1/2" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the

spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact

during normal operation.

2.8 TYPE 5 MOUNTS

A. Mason type W pads shall be bridge bearing neoprene, ¾” thick minimum. Pads

shall be oil resistant.

2.9 TYPE S BASES

A. Mason type WF, structural steel bases, rectangular in shape for all equipment

other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases which may be "T" or

"L" shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and

discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth

equal to 1/10 of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14"

provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as

determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 7 of 12


mounting locations to provide a base clearance of two inches. Example of call-out

"3-S."

2.10 TYPE I BASES

A. Mason type K, rectangular structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating

foundations. Base for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for

suction and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12" unless

specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity.

B. Bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of base, but not less

than 6". Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 1/2" bars,

or angles welded in place, on 6” centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2" above

the bottom or additional steel as is required by the structural conditions. Forms shall

be furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below the holes to

receive equipment anchor bolts where anchor bolts fall in concrete locations. Height

saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 2"

clearance below the base. Example of call-out "3-I."

2.11 TYPE 5 HANGERS

A. Mason type 30N, vibration hangers with a steel spring and 0.3" deflection

neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be moulded with a rod

isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger

box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through

a 30 degrees arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs

shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.

2.12 TYPE 6 HANGERS

A. Mason type PC30N, vibration hangers similar to type 4, but pre-compressed to the

rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during

installation. Design hangers with a release mechanism to free the spring after the

installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load.




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 8 of 12


2.13 TYPE 7 HANGERS

A. Mason type HES, a steel spring in a steel housing and include a deflection

indicator scale. Hangers shall be preset at the factory for the required load. Hangers

shall be capable of 130% of rated deflection, but no more than 100% of rated

deflection shall be used when selecting the hanger.

B. Submittals shall include isolator rated deflection, required deflection, and

supporting calculation. Calculations shall be made by a registered mechanical or civil

engineer demonstrating the structural adequacy of the hanger and that its

connections to the building and the pipe are adequate for the live and dead loads

encountered.

2.14 TYPE 8 HANGERS

A. Mason type W30, a steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a

grommet to prevent short circuiting of the hanger rod. Neoprene cup to contain a

steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its

extrusion. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole size to be large enough to

permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole

and short circuiting the spring. Springs are to have a minimum additional travel to

solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Provide hangers with an eye bolt on the

spring end and provision to attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps.

2.15 TYPE AG PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES

A. Shall be directional acoustical pipe anchors and guides for vertical piping

consisting of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a

minimum half inch thickness of heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation

material. Vertical restraints shall prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable

loads on the isolation materials shall not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be

balanced for equal resistance in any direction.

B. Submittals shall include supporting calculations by a registered mechanical or civil

engineer indicating anchor/ guide loads and isolator selection.




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 9 of 12


C. Pipe anchors and guides for vertical piping shall be Mason type ADA or ADAH or

similar by other manufacturers listed.

2.16 TYPE T THRUST RESTRAINTS

A. Mason type WB, horizontal thrust restraint consisting of a spring element in series,

with a neoprene pad as described for type 2 mounts with the same deflection as

specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be contained within

a steel frame and designed so it can be present for thrust at the factory and adjusted

in the field for a maximum of 1/4" movement at start and stop. Furnish thrust

restraints complete with rods and angle brackets for attachment to both the

equipment and ductwork or equipment and structure. Attach horizontal restraints at

the centre line of thrust and symmetrically on either side of the unit.

2.17 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide flexible connections for all piping to equipment mounted on vibration

isolators and all piping connected to rotating or reciprocating equipment.

B. Flexible connection shall be suitable for pressure, temperature and fluid involved.

C. Minimum line length of flexible hose shall be 12" or length required to absorb 3/4"

lateral movement, whichever is longer.

D. Piping connected to a coil which is in an assembly mounted on vibration isolators

is to have flexible piping connections and piping vibration hangers as specified

below. Piping connected to a coil which is in an assembly where the fan is separately

isolated by means of vibration isolators and duct flexible connections does not

require flexible piping connectors or piping vibration hangers.

E. Water and/or Pumped Condensate System:

1. Flexible pipe connections shall be moulded Teflon bellows with flange connections

and rubber isolated restraining bolts in systems where extreme chemical resistance

is required or short flange to flange dimensions are required. Otherwise, flexible pipe

connections shall be reinforced moulded rubber double sphere expansion joints for 2-

1/2" and over, double sphere union type with control cables for 2" and smaller.




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 10 of 12


2. Flexible pipe connections Metraflex or Mason-Flex equal to Mason MF series with

type ACC control cable assemblies where required.

3. Connections shall consist of multiple plys of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene

both moulded and cured in hydraulic rubber presses. No steel wire or rings shall be

used as pressure reinforcement. 2" and smaller may have threaded connections; 2-

1/2" and larger shall have floating class 150 lb. steel flanges recessed to lock the

raised face of the neoprene connection flange.

4. Construct all straight through connections with twin spheres properly pre-extended

as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional elongation under

pressure. 12" and larger sizes operating above 100 psi, shall employ control cables

with end fittings isolated by means of 1/2" thick bridge bearing neoprene washer

bushings designed for a maximum of 1000 psi.

F. Do not provide flexible piping connectors for the following systems:

1. Refrigerant piping

2. Gas piping

2.18 PERFORMANCE

A. Select all vibration isolation devices to provide minimum 95% isolation efficiency

or based on the minimum static deflection and mounting criteria listed below,

whichever is greater:

FLOOR SPAN

ON GRADE 20 FEET 30 FEET 40 FEET

Type

Min.

Stat.

Defl.

In.

Type

Min.

Stat.

Defl.

In.

Type

Min.

Stat.

Defl.

In.

Type

Min.

Stat.

Defl.

In.

Air-Cooled Condensing Units 2 0.35 4 0.75 4 1.5 4 2.5 Packaged Air Handling Units

Suspended through 5 hp 7 1/2 hp & over through 400 rpm 401 rpm & over

- - -

- - -

5 5 5

1.0 1.5 1.0

5 5 5

1.0 1.5 1.0

5 5 5

1.0 1.5 1.5

Floor Mounted




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 11 of 12


through 5 hp 2 0.35 3 0.75 3 3 0.75 7 1/2 hp and over through 400 rpm

2 0.35 3-S 1.5 3-S 3-S 1.5

7 1/2 HP through 40 HP 401 rpm & over

2 0.35 3 0.75 3 3-S 1.5

50 HP & larger 401 rpm & over

2 0.35 3 0.75 3 3-S 2.5

Utility Sets

Roof Mounted Use type 4 mount with deflection from blower minimum deflection guide up to .75" deflection. Over .75" deflection, use type 4-S mount.

Centrifugal blowers Suspended Use type 5-T hangers with deflections from blower minimum

deflection guide. Floor Mounted Use type 3-I mount with deflection from blower minimum

deflection guide.Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans

Suspended Use type 5 hangers with deflection from blower minimum deflection guide. Use type 4-T for deflection over 4".

Floor mounted motor on/in. fan casing Use type 2 for .35" deflection, type 2 for with 75" and type 3-S for over .75" with deflection from blower minimum deflection guide. Use type 3-S-T for deflection over 4".

Floor mounted arrangement 1 or any separately mounted motor

Use 2-I for .35" deflection and 3-I for .75" and over with deflection from blower minimum deflection guide.

Cabinet Fan and fan heads of air handling units

Suspended Use type 5-T supports with deflection from blower minimum

deflection guide.

Floor Mounted Use type 2-T for .35" deflection, type 3-T for .75" deflections

and 3-S-T for deflections over .75".

Piping connected to rotating or reciprocating equipment

Use flexible piping connections, and type 5 or 6 hangers for a

distance of 100 pipe diameters or a distance of three hangers

away from the equipment, whichever is greater.

Vertical pipe risers greater than 30 feet in height.

Use type 7 hangers at the top of the riser and type AG with

pipe clamps at intermediate points.

Ductwork in mechanical equipment rooms

Use type 8 hanger with .75" minimum deflection for all ducts

with a cross sectional area of 2.0 square feet or over.




VIBRATION ISLOATION


21-SEP-2016Rev. A

Page 12 of 12


BLOWER MINIMUM DEFLECTION GUIDE

Required Deflection (inches)

Fan Speed (RPM)

On

Grade

20’

Floor Span

30’

Floor Span

40’

Floor Span

175-224 .35 3.5 4.5 4.5

225-299 .35 3.5 3.5 3.5

300-374 .35 2.5 2.5 .35

375-499 .35 1.5 2.5 .35

500 & Over .35 .75 1.5

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install vibration isolation devices as specified, as shown on the drawings and

according to the manufacturer's instructions.

B. In no case shall the installation short circuit the isolation device. Flexible piping

connections are to be installed on the equipment side of shut-off valves.

3.2 PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. Install type T thrust restraints at fan sections when isolated from the rest of air

handling unit.

- END OF SECTION -


_________________________________________


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

POTABLE WATER SYSTEM STERILIZATION



A 21-SEP-16 Issue for Tender TOS

Approved by:

Date:

Company Approval:

Date:

UDECOTT

TOBAGO FINANCIAL COMPLEX

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WATER TANK STERILIZATION

DOCUMENT NO.

1180-ME-5-600

REV A


Water storage tanks and delivery pipes must be sterilized prior to use in holding disinfected water for building use. This requires the addition of considerably more chlorine compound than mere disinfection (50 parts per million of available chlorine). The tank and all delivery pipes must be flushed after a period of 24 hours at the least, followed by refilling with potable water. There should be sufficient chlorine compound left in the tanks to disinfect the clean water used to refill the tanks, but larger tanks should have the refilled water disinfected at half the normal 1% rate.

Where galvanized pipe is used, do not leave it filled with a strong chlorine compound for more than several hours, or the galvanizing (tin) may be adversely affected by the chlorine, as tin is an active metal. First, thoroughly flush the pipe line, and determine the capacity (volume) of the pipe line.

Amount of Chlorine Compound Required For Tank Disinfection

Gallons 5.25% Bleach 25% Chloride of lime

100 2 cups 3 ounces

250 5 cups 7.5 ounces

500 2.5 quarts 1 pound

1,000 5 quarts 2 pounds

2,500 2.5 gallons 4.5 pounds

5,000 4 gallons 9 pounds

Volumes of Pipe Lines

Diameter Gallons/100 ft.

2" 16

4" 65

6" 150

STERILIZATION OF POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS (CONCRETE): After the testing of the storage facility for leaks has been satisfactorily completed and the inside coating applied, if coating is called for, disinfect the tank and riser (if

UDECOTT

TOBAGO FINANCIAL COMPLEX

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WATER TANK STERILIZATION

DOCUMENT NO.

1180-ME-5-600

REV A


applicable). Allow at least 24 hours, but not less than paint manufacturer's recommendation, for the coating to dry before disinfection. Disinfection procedure shall conform to AWWA D 105. The forms of chlorine which may be used in the disinfecting operations are liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution and calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets. The following three methods of chlorination are acceptable: Method No. 1: Fill storage facility to overflow level with potable water to which enough chlorine has been added to provide a free chlorine residual of not less than 10 mg/l after six hours if the water has been uniformly chlorinated by gas feed or chemical pump, or 24 hours if chlorinated by sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite. Drain to waste and refill with potable water and test as specified herein after. Method No. 2: Apply a solution of 200 mg/l available chlorine directly to all parts of the storage facility which will be in contact with water when the storage facility is filled to overflow elevation. The chlorine solution may be applied with suitable brushes or with spray equipment. The solution shall thoroughly coat all surfaces including inlet and outlet piping. Apply to separate drain piping such that when filled, available chlorine shall not be less than 10 mg/1. Surfaces disinfected shall remain in contact with the strong chlorine solution for at least 30 minutes. Purge drain pipe and fill storage facility to overflow. After successful testing the water may be released to the distribution system. Method No.3: Add water and chlorine to the storage facility in amounts to provide 50 mg/l available chlorine when filled to 5% storage volume. Hold in storage facility for not less than six hours. Finish filling to piping. After successful testing water, can be released to the distribution system. TESTING Before the tank is placed in operation, the Contractor shall collect and have tested samples of water there from in accordance with the latest edition of Standard Methods of Examination of Water and Waste Water, and secure approval from WASA or CARIRI. The Owner will make the necessary arrangements, transport samples and pay for the bacteriological testing. If the tests show the need for re‐chlorination, repeat the sterilization procedure as often as may be necessary until satisfactory results are obtained.